Omron VARISPEED F7 frequency inverter USER'S MANUAL
Anúncio
Anúncio
Manual No.
YEG-TOE-S616-55.1-OY
VARISPEED F7
Vector Control Frequency Inverter
USER’S MANUAL
1
2
Table of Content
Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use ............................................... VIII
Handling Inverters .................................................................. 1-1
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions ..............................................................1-8
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ...........................................1-11
Installation Orientation and Space .............................................................1-12
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover ............................................1-13
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover .......................1-14
Wiring....................................................................................... 2-1
Connections to Peripheral Devices .............................................................2-2
I
II
3
4
5
Installing and Wiring Option Cards ............................................................ 2-28
Digital Operator and Modes....................................................3-1
Trial Operation .........................................................................4-1
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or Higher) 4-3
User Parameters ......................................................................5-1
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels .......................................... 5-3
6
Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02) ..................................5-70
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04) ................................5-72
Parameter Initial Values that Change With the Setting of C6-01 .................................5-74
Parameter Settings by Function............................................ 6-1
Application and Overload Selections ...........................................................6-2
Run Command Input Methods ...................................................................6-12
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Input .................................6-14
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics ..........................................6-19
Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads (Dwell Function) ....................................6-22
Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration (Stall Prevention
Adjusting Frequency References ..............................................................6-26
Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function) ......................................6-28
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limits) ...............................................6-30
Improving the Operation Performance ......................................................6-33
Reducing the Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function) .......................6-33
Torque Compensation for Sufficient Torque at Start and Low-speed
III
IV
Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs ...................................... 6-50
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed when the Frequency Reference is Lost ..... 6-57
Restarting Operation After Transient Error (Auto Restart Function) ........................... 6-58
Overheating Protection for an Inverter-Mounted Braking Resistor .............................. 6-59
Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and
Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold) ...... 6-66
Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals (UP/DOWN) ... 6-67
Adding/Subtracting a Fixed Speed to an Analog Reference (Trim Control) ................ 6-69
Switching Operation Source to Communication Option Card ..................................... 6-72
Jog Frequency with Direction Commands (FJOG/RJOG) ........................................... 6-72
Stopping the Inverter on External Device Errors (External Error Function) ................. 6-73
7
8
9
Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 7-1
Protective and Diagnostic Functions ...........................................................7-2
If the Motor Operates at Higher Speed than the Frequency Reference ......................7-20
If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy Above Base Speed in
If the Earth Leakage Breaker Operates When the Inverter is Running .......................7-21
If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference .....................................7-23
Maintenance and Inspection.................................................. 8-1
Specifications ......................................................................... 9-1
V
VI
10 Appendix ................................................................................10-1
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts and Chains) ..................... 10-6
Warnings
CAUTION
Cables must not be connected or disconnected, nor signal tests carried out, while the power is switched on.
The Varispeed F7 DC bus capacitor remains charged even after the power has been switched off. To avoid an electric shock hazard, disconnect the frequency inverter from the mains before carrying out maintenance. Then wait for at least 5 minutes after all LEDs have gone out.
Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the inverter. It contains semiconductors, which are not designed for such high voltages.
Do not remove the digital operator while the mains supply is switched on. The printed circuit board must also not be touched while the inverter is connected to the power.
Never connect general LC/RC interference suppression filters, capacitors or overvoltage protection devices to the inverter input or output.
To avoid unnecessary overcurrent faults, etc. being displayed, the signaling contacts of any contactor or switch fitted between inverter and motor must be integrated into the inverter control logic
(e.g. baseblock).
This is absolutely imperative!
This manual must be read thoroughly before connecting and operating the inverter. All safety precautions and instructions for use must be followed.
The inverter must be operated with the appropriate line filters, following the installation instructions in this manual and with all covers closed and terminals covered.
Only then will adequate protection be provided. Please do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts. The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in this manual.
VII
VIII
Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use
General
Please read these safety precautions and instructions for use thoroughly before installing and operating this inverter. Also read all of the warning signs on the inverter and ensure they are never damaged or removed.
Live and hot inverter components may be accessible during operation. Removal of housing components, the digital operator or terminal covers runs the risk of serious injuries or damage in the event of incorrect installation or operation. The fact that frequency inverters control rotating mechanical machine components can give rise to other dangers.
The instructions in this manual must be followed. Installation, operation and maintenance may only be carried out by qualified personnel. For the purposes of the safety precautions, qualified personnel are defined as individuals who are familiar with the installation, starting, operation and maintenance of frequency inverters and have the proper qualifications for this work. Safe operation of these units is only possible if they are used properly for their intended purpose.
The DC bus capacitors can remain live for about 5 minutes after the inverter is disconnected from the power.
It is therefore necessary to wait for this time before opening its covers. All of the main circuit terminals may still carry dangerous voltages.
Children and other unauthorized persons must not be allowed access to these inverters.
Keep these Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use readily accessible and supply them to all persons with any form of access to the inverters.
Intended Use
Frequency inverters are intended for installation in electrical systems or machinery.
Their installation in machinery and systems must conform to the following product standards of the Low Voltage Directive:
EN 50178, 1997-10,Equipping of Power Systems with Electronic Devices
EN 60204-1, 1997-12Machine Safety and Equipping with Electrical Devices
Part 1: General Requirements (IEC 60204-1:1997)/
Please note: Includes Corrigendum of September 1998
EN 61010-1, A2, 1995Safety Requirements for Information Technology Equipment
(IEC 950, 1991 + A1, 1992 + A2, 1993 + A3, 1995 + A4, 1996, modified)
CE marking is carried out to EN 50178, using the line filters specified in this manual and following the appropriate installation instructions.
Transportation and storage
The instructions for transportation, storage and proper handling must be followed in accordance with the technical data.
Installation
Install and cool the inverters as specified in the documentation. The cooling air must flow in the specified direction. The inverter may therefore only be operated in the specified position (e.g. upright). Maintain the specified clearances. Protect the inverters against impermissible loads. Components must not be bent nor insulation clearances changed. To avoid damage being caused by static electricity, do not touch any electronic components or contacts.
Electrical Connection
Carry out any work on live equipment in compliance with the national safety and accident prevention regulations. Carry out electrical installation in compliance with the relevant regulations. In particular, follow the installation instructions ensuring electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), e.g. shielding, grounding, filter arrangement and laying of cables. This also applies to equipment with the CE mark. It is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the system or machine to ensure conformity with EMC limits.
Your supplier or OYMC representative must be contacted when using leakage current circuit breaker in conjunction with frequency inverters.
In certain systems it may be necessary to use additional monitoring and safety devices in compliance with the relevant safety and accident prevention regulations. The frequency inverter hardware must not be modified.
Notes
The VARISPEED F7 frequency inverters are certified to CE, UL, and c-UL.
IX
X
EMC Compatibility
Introduction
This manual was compiled to help system manufacturers using YASKAWA frequency inverters to design and install electrical switch gear. It also describes the measures necessary to comply with the EMC Directive. The manual's installation and wiring instructions must therefore be followed.
Our products are tested by authorized bodies using the standards listed below.
Product standard: EN 61800-3:1996
EN 61800-3; A11:2000
Measures to Ensure Conformity of YASKAWA Frequency inverters to the EMC Directive
YASKAWA frequency inverters do not necessarily have to be installed in a switch cabinet.
It is not possible to give detailed instructions for all of the possible types of installation. This manual therefore has to be limited to general guidelines.
All electrical equipment produces radio and line-borne interference at various frequencies. The cables pass this on to the environment like an aerial.
Connecting an item of electrical equipment (e.g. drive) to a supply without a line filter can therefore allow HF or LF interference to get into the mains.
The basic countermeasures are isolation of the wiring of control and power components, proper grounding and shielding of cables.
A large contact area is necessary for low-impedance grounding of HF interference. The use of grounding straps instead of cables is therefore definitely advisable.
Moreover, cable shields must be connected with purpose-made ground clips.
Laying Cables
Measures Against Line-Borne Interference:
Line filter and frequency inverter must be mounted on the same metal plate. Mount the two components as close to each other as possible, with cables kept as short as possible.
Use a power cable with well-grounded shield. Use a shielded motor cable not exceeding 20 meters in length.
Arrange all grounds so as to maximize the area of the end of the lead in contact with the ground terminal (e.g.
metal plate).
Shielded Cable:
• –Use a cable with braided shield.
• –Ground the maximum possible area of the shield. It is advisable to ground the shield by connecting the cable to the ground plate with metal clips (see following figure).
Ground clip Ground plate
The grounding surfaces must be highly conductive bare metal. Remove any coats of varnish and paint.
• –Ground the cable shields at both ends.
• –Ground the motor of the machine.
Refer to the document EZZ006543 “Making Yaskawa Inverter Products Conform with the EMC Directive”.
Please contact Omron Yaskawa Motion Control to get this document.
XI
XII
Line Filters
Recommended Line Filters for Varispeed F7
Inverter Model
Varispeed F7 Model
EN
55011
Class*
Line Filter
Current
(A)
CIMR-F7Z40P4
CIMR-F7Z40P7
CIMR-F7Z41P5
CIMR-F7Z42P2
3G3RV-PFI3010-SE
B, 25 m*
B, 25 m*
B, 25 m*
B, 25 m*
10
CIMR-F7Z43P7
CIMR-F7Z44P0
CIMR-F7Z45P5
CIMR-F7Z47P5
CIMR-F7Z4011
CIMR-F7Z4015
CIMR-F7Z4018
CIMR-F7Z4022
CIMR-F7Z4030
CIMR-F7Z4037
CIMR-F7Z4045
CIMR-F7Z4055
CIMR-F7Z4075
CIMR-F7Z4090
CIMR-F7Z4110
CIMR-F7Z4132
CIMR-F7Z4160
CIMR-F7Z4185
CIMR-F7Z4220
CIMR-F7Z4300
3G3RV-PFI3018-SE
3G3RV-PFI3035-SE
3G3RV-PFI3060-SE
3G3RV-PFI3070-SE
3G3RV-PFI3130-SE
3G3RV-PFI3170-SE
3G3RV-PFI3200-SE
3G3RV-PFI3400-SE
3G3RV-PFI3600-SE
3G3RV-PFI3800-SE
B, 25 m*
B, 25 m*
B, 25 m*
B, 25 m*
B, 25 m*
B, 25 m*
B, 25 m*
A, 100 m
A, 100 m
A, 100 m
A, 100 m
A, 100 m
A, 100 m
A, 100 m
A, 100 m
A, 100 m
A, 100 m
A, 100 m
A, 100 m
A, 100 m
18
35
60
70
130
170
250
400
600
800
Weight
(kg)
1.1
1.3
2.1
4.0
3.4
4.7
6.0
11
18.5
11,0
Dimensions
W x D x H
141 x 46 x 330
141 x 46 x 330
206 x 50 x 355
236 x 65 x 408
80 x 185 x 329
90 x 180 x 366
120 x 170 x 451
130 x 240 x 610
300 x 160 x 610
260 x 135 x 386
31.0
300 x 160 x 716
* Class A, 100 m
Permissible emission of power drive systems for commercial and light environment (EN61800-3, A11)
(general availability, 1st environment)
Inverter Model
Varispeed F7 Type
CIMR-F7Z20P4
CIMR-F7Z20P7
CIMR-F7Z21P5
CIMR-F7Z22P2
CIMR-F7Z23P7
CIMR-F7Z25P5
CIMR-F7Z27P5
CIMR-F7Z2011
CIMR-F7Z2015
CIMR-F7Z2018
CIMR-F7Z2022
CIMR-F7Z2030
CIMR-F7Z2037
CIMR-F7Z2045
CIMR-F7Z2055
CIMR-F7Z2075
CIMR-F7Z2090
CIMR-F7Z2110
* Class A, 100 m
3G3RV-PFI3010-SE
3G3RV-PFI3018-SE
3G3RV-PFI2035-SE
3G3RV-PFI2060-SE
3G3RV-PFI2100-SE
3G3RV-PFI2130-SE
3G3RV-PFI2160-SE
3G3RV-PFI2200-SE
3G3RV-PFI3400-SE
3G3RV-PFI3600-SE
EN
55011
Class
B, 25 m*
B, 25 m*
B, 25 m*
B, 25 m*
B, 25 m*
B, 25 m*
B, 25 m*
B, 25 m*
B, 25 m*
B, 25 m*
A, 100 m
A, 100 m
A, 100 m
A, 100 m
A, 100 m
A, 100 m
A, 100 m
A, 100 m
Line Filters
Current
(A)
10
18
35
60
100
130
160
200
400
600
Weight
(kg)
1.1
1.3
1.4
3
4.9
4.3
6.0
11.0
18.5
11.0
Dimensions
W x D x H
141 x 45 x 330
141 x 46 x 330
141 x 46 x 330
206 x 60 x 355
236 x 80 x 408
90 x 180 x 366
120 x 170 x 451
130 x 240 x 610
300 x 160 x 564
260 x 135 x 386
XIII
XIV
Installation of Inverters and EMC filters
PE
L1 L3
L2
Ground Bonds
( remove any paint )
PE
Line
Filter
Load
Inverter
PE
L1
L2
L3 U
V
W
PE
Cable Length as short as possible
Metal Plate
Ground Bonds
( remove any paint )
M
3~
Motor cable screened
Registered Trademarks
The following registered trademarks are used in this manual.
• DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendors Association, Inc.).
•
•
InterBus is a registered trademark of Phoenix Contact Co.
Profibus is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
XV
XVI
1
Handling Inverters
This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an Inverter.
Varispeed F7 Introduction......................................................1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery..................................................1-4
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions ........................................1-8
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site .....................1-11
Installation Orientation and Space .......................................1-12
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover ......................1-13
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover..1-14
1
Varispeed F7 Introduction
Varispeed F7 Applications
The Varispeed F7 is ideal for the following applications.
• Fan, blower, and pump applications
• Conveyors, pushers, metal tooling machines, etc.
Settings must be adjusted to the application for optimum operation. Refer to
Varispeed F7 Models
The Varispeed F7 Series includes Inverters in two voltage class es: 200 V and 400 V. The maximum motor capacities vary from 0.55 to 300 kW (42 models).
Voltage
Class
200 V class
37
45
55
75
15
18.5
22
30
90
110
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
0.55
0.75
1.5
2.2
Maximum
Motor
Capacity kW
32
44
55
69
12
17
22
27
Output
Capacity kVA
1.2
1.6
2.7
3.7
5.7
8.8
82
110
130
160
CIMR-F7Z20P4
CIMR-F7Z20P7
CIMR-F7Z21P5
CIMR-F7Z22P2
CIMR-F7Z23P7
CIMR-F7Z25P5
CIMR-F7Z27P5
CIMR-F7Z2011
CIMR-F7Z2015
CIMR-F7Z2018
CIMR-F7Z2022
CIMR-F7Z2030
CIMR-F7Z2037
CIMR-F7Z2045
CIMR-F7Z2055
CIMR-F7Z2075
CIMR-F7Z2090
CIMR-F7Z2110
Table 1.1 Varispeed F7 Models
Varispeed F7
Basic Model Number
Specifications
(Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)
Open Chassis
(IEC IP00)
CIMR-F7Z
Enclosed Wall-mounted
(IEC IP20, NEMA 1)
CIMR-F7Z
20P41
20P71
Remove the top and bottom covers from the Enclosed
Wall-mounted model.
21P51
22P21
23P71
25P51
27P51
20111
20151
20181
20220
20300
20370
20450
20550
20750
20900
21100
20221
20301
20371
20451
20551
20751
–
–
12
Voltage
Class
400 V class
Maximum
Motor
Capacity kW
22
30
37
45
7.5
11
15
18.5
0.55
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
4.0
5.5
132
160
185
220
300
55
75
90
110
34
46
57
69
13
18
24
30
Output
Capacity kVA
1.4
1.6
2.8
4.0
5.8
6.6
9.5
200
230
280
390
510
85
110
140
160
Varispeed F7
Basic Model Number
CIMR-F7Z40P4
CIMR-F7Z40P7
CIMR-F7Z41P5
CIMR-F7Z42P2
CIMR-F7Z43P7
CIMR-F7Z44P0
CIMR-F7Z45P5
CIMR-F7Z47P5
CIMR-F7Z4011
CIMR-F7Z4015
CIMR-F7Z4018
CIMR-F7Z4022
CIMR-F7Z4030
CIMR-F7Z4037
CIMR-F7Z4045
CIMR-F7Z4055
CIMR-F7Z4075
CIMR-F7Z4090
CIMR-F7Z4110
CIMR-F7Z4132
CIMR-F7Z4160
CIMR-F7Z4185
CIMR-F7Z4220
CIMR-F7Z4300
Specifications
(Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)
Open Chassis
(IEC IP00)
CIMR-F7Z
Enclosed Wall-mounted
(IEC IP20, NEMA 1)
CIMR-F7Z
40P41
40P71
41P51
Remove the top and bottom covers from the Enclosed
Wall-mount model.
42P21
43P71
44P01
45P51
40220
40300
40370
40450
40550
40750
40900
41100
41320
41600
41850
42200
43000
47P51
40111
40151
40181
40221
40301
40371
40451
40551
40751
40901
41101
41321
41601
–
–
–
1
13
1
Confirmations upon Delivery
Checks
Check the following items as soon as the Inverter is delivered.
Item
Has the correct model of Inverter been delivered?
Method
Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the Inverter.
Is the Inverter damaged in any way?
Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any scratches or other damage resulting from shipping.
Are any screws or other components loose?
Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness.
If you find any irregularities in the above items, contact the agency from which you purchased the Inverter or your OYMC representative immediately.
Nameplate Information
There is a nameplate attached to the side of each Inverter. The nameplate shows the model number, specifications, lot number, serial number, and other information on the Inverter.
Example Nameplate
The following nameplate is an example for a standard domestic European Inverter: 3-phase, 400 VAC,
0.55 kW, IEC IP20 and NEMA 1 standards
Inverter model
Input specifications
MODEL: CIMR-F7Z40P4
Inverter specifications
OUTPUT: AC3PH 0-480V 0-400Hz 1.8A 1.4kVA
Output specifications
Lot number
Serial number
Mass
Fig 1.1 Nameplate
14
Inverter Model Numbers
The model number of the Inverter on the nameplate indicates the specification, voltage class, and maximum motor capacity of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
CIMR – F7 Z 2 0 P4
Inverter
Varispeed F7
No.
Z
No.
2
4
Specification
OYMC European. Std.
Voltage Class
AC Input, 3-phase, 200 V
AC Input, 3-phase, 400 V
No.
0P4
0P7 to
300
Max. Motor Capacity
0.55 kW
0.75 kW to
300 kW
“P” Indicates the decimal point.
Fig 1.2 Inverter Model Numbers
Inverter Specifications
The Inverter specifications (“SPEC”) on the nameplate indicate the voltage class, maximum motor capacity, the protective structure, and the revision of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
2 0P 4 1
No.
2
4
Voltage Class
AC Input, 3-phase, 200 V
AC Input, 3-phase 400 V
No.
0P4
0P7 to
300
Max. Motor Capacity
0.55 kW
0.75 kW to
300 kW
“P” Indicates the decimal point
No.
0
1
Protective Structure
Open chassis (IEC IP00)
Enclosed wall-mounted (IEC IP20,
NEMA Type 1)
Fig 1.3 Inverter Specifications
1
15
1
Component Names
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 1.4
. The Inverter with the terminal cover removed is shown in Fig 1.5
.
Top protective cover (Part of Enclosed Wallmounted Type (IEC IP20, NEMA Type 1)
Front cover
Digital Operator
Terminal cover
Mounting
Diecast case
Nameplate
Bottom protective cover
Fig 1.4 Inverter Appearance (18.5 kW or Less)
Control circuit terminals
Fig 1.5 Terminal Arrangement (18.5 kW or Less)
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
16
Inverters of 22 kW or More
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in
. The Inverter with the terminal cover removed is shown in
Mounting holes
Inverter cover
Front cover
Cooling fan
Digital Operator
Terminal cover
Nameplate
1
Fig 1.6 Inverter Appearance (22 kW or More)
Charge indicator
Main circuit terminals
Ground terminal
Fig 1.7 Terminal Arrangement (22 kW or More)
17
1
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Open Chassis Inverters (IP00)
Exterior diagrams of the Open Chassis Inverters are shown below.
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.55 to 18.5 kW 200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 110 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 160 kW
18
400 V Class Inverters of 185 to 300 kW
Fig 1.8 Exterior Diagrams of Open Chassis Inverters
Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1)
Exterior diagrams of the Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1) are shown below.
1
Grommet
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.55 to 18.5 kW 200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 75 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 160 kW
Fig 1.9 Exterior Diagrams of Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters
19
1
Table 1.2 Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg) of F7 inverters from 0.4 to 160kW
Voltage
Class
Max.
Applicable
Motor
Output
[kW]
200 V
(3-phase)
400 V
(3-phase)
W H
Open Chassis (IP00)
D W1 H1 H2 D1
37
45
55
75
15
18.5
22
30
4.0
5.5
7.5
11
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
0.55
0.75
1.5
157
140 280 126 266 7
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
177
11
15
200 300 197 186 285
18.5
22 250 400
30
240 350 207 216 335
275 450
258
195 385
220 435
7.5
37
375 600
300
330
250 575
45
55
450 725 350 325 700
75
90 500 850 360 378 820
13
15
110 575 885 380 445 855
0.55
157
140 280 126 266 7
177
200 300 197 186 285
90
110
132
240 350 207 216 335
275 450 258 220 435
325 550 283 260 535
7.5
450 725 350 325 700 13
500 850 360 370 820 14
39
59
65.5
78
100
100
130
140
39
59
65.5
78
100
105
130 t1
5
2.3
3.2
4.5
5
2.3
3.2
4.5
160 575 916 378 445 855 46 140
Approx
Mass
3
4
6
7
Dimensions (mm)
W
200
H
300
310
350
11 240
380
21 250 535
24 275 615
57
380 890
63
86
87
108
150
3
4
6
10
21
88
89
102
120
140 280
455
110
0
140 280
36 325
258
300
330
195 400 385
220 450 435
250 600 575
200 300 197 186 300 285
240 350 207 216 350 335
275 535 258 220 450 435
455
505
635
715
110
0
124
5
160 579
132
4
157
177
Enclosed Wall-mounted (NEMA1)
D W1 H0 H1 H2 H3 D1
157
177
126 280 266
197 186 300 285
207 216 350 335
350 325 725 700
---
126 280 266
283 260 550 535
7
7.5
13
7
7.5
0
10
0
30
135
165
210
305
0
85
165
350 325 725 700 13 305
360 370 850 820 15 395
39
59
65.5
78
100
100
130
39
59
65.5
78
100
105
130
378 445 916 855 46 408 140 t1
5
2.3
3.2
5
2.3
3.2
4.5
Approx.
Mass
Moun ting
Holes d*
Caloric Value (W)
Exter nal
Internal
Total
Heat
Generation
Cool
-ing
Meth od
20 39 59
3
M5
27
50
42 69
50 100
70 59 129
112 74 186
4
Natural
6
7
11 M6
164 84 248
219 113 332
374 170 544
429 183 612
24
27
62
501 211 712
586 274 860
865 352 1217
1015 411 1426
Fan
68
94
95
3
M10
M12
1266 505 1771
1588 619 2207
2019 838 2857
2437 997 3434
2733 1242 3975
14 39 53
17
36
41
48
58
84
Natural
M5
4
6
10
24
40
96
97
122
130
M6
M10
M12
59
80
56 115
68 148
70 91 161
127 82 209
193 114 307
252 158 410
326 172 498
426 208 634
466 259 725
678 317 995
784 360 1144
901 415 1316
1203 495 1698
1399 575 1974
1614 671 2285
2097 853 2950
2388 1002 3390
Fan
170 2791 1147 3938
* Same for Open Chassis and Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters
Voltage
Class
400V
(3-phase)
Table 1.3 Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg) of 400V Class Inverters of 185 kW to 300 kW
Max.
Applicable
Motor
Output
[kW]
185
220
300
W H D
Dimensions (mm)
Open Chassis (IP00)
W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 D1 t1
710 1305 413 540 240 270 1270 15 125.5
4.5
916 1475 413 730 365 365 1440 15 125.5
4.5
Approx.
Mass
260
280
405
Mounting
Holes d
M12
Caloric Value (W)
External
Internal
Total
Heat
Generation
3237
3740
5838
1372
1537
2320
4609
5277
8158
Cooling
Method
Fan
110
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
Install the Inverter in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions.
Installation Site
Install the Inverter under the following conditions in a pollution degree 2 environment.
Type
Enclosed wall-mounted
Open chassis
Ambient Operating Temperature
-10 to + 40 °C
-10 to + 45 °C
Humidity
95% RH or less (no condensation)
95% RH or less (no condensation)
Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter. Be sure to remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18.5 kW or less in a panel.
Observe the following precautions when mounting the Inverter.
•
•
Install the Inverter in a clean location which is free from oil mist and dust. It can be installed in a totally enclosed panel that is completely shielded from floating dust.
When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or other foreign matter does not get into the Inverter.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not install the Inverter on combustible material, such as wood.
Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials.
Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids.
Install the Inverter in a location without excessive oscillation.
Install the Inverter in a location free from chlorides.
Install the Inverter in a location not in direct sunlight.
Controlling the Ambient Temperature
To enhance the reliability of operation, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature increases. If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment, such as a box, use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45 °C.
Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter
Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal power produced by drilling.
Always remove the cover from the Inverter after completing installation. Otherwise, ventilation will be reduced, causing the Inverter to overheat.
1
111
1
Installation Orientation and Space
Install the Inverter vertically so as not to reduce the cooling effect. When installing the Inverter, always provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation.
A
B
Air
30 mm min.
50 mm min.
30 mm min.
Horizontal Space
120 mm min.
Vertical Space
200V class inverter, 0.55 to 90 kW
400V class inverter, 0.55 to 132 kW
200V class inverter, 110 kW
400V class inverter, 160 to 220 kW
400V class inverter, 300 kW
A
50 mm
B
120 mm
120 mm 120 mm
300 mm 300 mm
Air
IMPORTANT
Fig 1.10 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space
1. The same space is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis (IP00) and Enclosed
Wall-mounted (IP20, NEMA 1) Inverters.
2. Always remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of
18.5 kW or less in a panel.
Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 22 kW or more in a panel.
112
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover
Remove the terminal cover to wire cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals.
Removing the Terminal Cover
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
Loosen the screw at the bottom of the terminal cover, press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the directions of arrows 1, and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
1
1
2
1
Fig 1.11 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-F7Z25P5 Shown Above)
Inverters of 22 kW or More
Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover, pull out the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
2
1
Fig 1.12 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-F7Z2022 Shown Above)
Attaching the Terminal Cover
When wiring the terminal block has been completed, attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal procedure.
For Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove on the Inverter and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place.
113
1
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and
Front Cover
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
To attach optional cards or change the terminal card connector, remove the Digital Operator and front cover in addition to the terminal cover. Always remove the Digital Operator from the front cover before removing the front cover.
The removal and attachment procedures are described below.
Removing the Digital Operator
Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Digital Operator and lift the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the Digital Operator as shown in the following illustration
Fig 1.13 Removing the Digital Operator (Model CIMR-F7Z45P5 Shown Above)
114
Removing the Front Cover
Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of the cover in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration.
1
1
2
Fig 1.14 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-F7Z45P5 Shown Above)
Mounting the Front Cover
After wiring the terminals, mount the front cover to the Inverter by performing the steps to remove the front cover in reverse order.
1. Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover; otherwise, Digital
Operator may malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut.
115
1
Mounting the Digital Operator
After attaching the terminal cover, mount the Digital Operator onto the Inverter using the following procedure.
1. Hook the Digital Operator at A (two locations) on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in the following illustration.
2. Press the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B (two locations)
A
B
IMPORTANT
Fig 1.15 Mounting the Digital Operator
1. Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods other than those described above, otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover. Imperfect contact can result.
Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first, and then attach the Digital Operator to the front cover.
116
Inverters of 22 kW or More
For inverters with an output of 22 kW or more, remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures to remove the Digital Operator and main cover.
Removing the Digital Operator
Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
Removing the Front Cover
Lift up at the location label 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal card in the direction of arrow 2.
1
2
1
Fig 1.16 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-F7Z2022 Shown Above)
Attaching the Front Cover
After completing required work, such as mounting an optional card or setting the terminal card, attach the front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it.
1. Confirm that the Digital Operator is not mounted on the front cover. Contact faults can occur if the cover is attached while the Digital Operator is mounted to it.
2. Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Inverter and press in on the cover until it clicks into place on the Inverter.
Attaching the Digital Operator
Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
117
1
118
2
Wiring
This chapter describes wiring terminals, main circuit terminal connections, main circuit terminal wiring specifications, control circuit terminals, and control circuit wiring specifications.
Connections to Peripheral Devices........................................2-2
Connection Diagram ..............................................................2-3
Terminal Block Configuration.................................................2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals ................................................2-6
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals ..........................................2-20
Wiring Check........................................................................2-27
Installing and Wiring Option Cards ......................................2-28
2
Connections to Peripheral Devices
Examples of connections between the Inverter and typical peripheral devices are shown in Fig 2.1
Power supply
Molded-case circuit breaker
Magnetic contactor (MC)
AC reactor for power factor improvement
Input noise filter
Braking resistor
DC reactor for power factor improvement
Inverter
Ground
Output noise filter
Motor
Ground
Fig 2.1 Example Connections to Peripheral Devices
22
Connection Diagram
The connection diagram of the Inverter is shown in Fig 2.2
When using the Digital Operator, the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits.
DC reactor to improve input power factor (optional)
U X
Short-circuit bar
Braking resistor unit (optional)
1
Main contactor
T 1 2 B1 B2
Fuses
3-phase power
380 to 480 V
50/60 Hz
L1
L2
L3
PE
Line
Filter
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Varispeed F7
CIMR-
F7C47P5
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
2
M
MA
MB
MC
Fault contact output
250 VAC, 1A max.
30 VDC, 1A max.
Multi-function digital inputs
[Factory setting]
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
External fault
Fault reset
Multi-step speed setting 1
Multi-step speed setting 2
Jog frequency selection
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
SN
SC
SP
24V
E(G) Shield terminal
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
Shield terminal
E(G)
Contact output 1
[Default : Running]
Contact output 2
[Default : Zero speed]
Contact output 3
[Default :
Frequency agree 1]
3
Multi-function digital output
250 VAC, 1A max.
30 VDC, 1A max.
2k Ω
Analog input setting adjustment
2k
Ω
3
1
2
0 to 10V
4 to 20mA
P P
RP
Pulse train input [Default:
Frequency reference input]
0 to 32kHz
+V
Analog input power supply
+15V, 20mA
A1
Analog input 1: Master frequency reference
0 to +10V (20 k )
MP
AC
FM
AM
AC
Pulse train output
0 to 32kHz (2.2 k )
[Default: Output frequency]
Adjustment,
20 k Ω
+
FM
-
Multi-function analog output 1
(-10 to +10V 2mA / 4 to 20mA)
[Default: Output frequency 0 to +10V]
Adjustment,
20 k Ω
+
AM
-
Multi-function analog output 2
(-10 to +10V 2mA / 4 to 20mA)
[Default: Output current 0 to +10V]
MEMOBUS communication
RS-485/422
P
P
R+
R-
S+
S-
IG
AC
-V
0V
Analog input power supply
-15V, 20mA
Terminating resistance
Shielded wires P
Twisted-pair
Shielded wires
Fig 2.2 Connection Diagram (Model CIMR-F7Z47P5 Shown Above)
2
23
2
Circuit Descriptions
Refer to the numbers indicated in
1 These circuits are hazardous and are separated from accessible surfaces by protective separation
2 These circuits are separated from all other circuits by protective separation consisting of double and reinforced insulation. These circuits may be interconnected with SELV
*
(or equivalent) or non-
SELV
*
circuits, but not both.
3 Inverters supplied by a four-wire-system source (neutral grounded)
These circuits are SELV * circuits and are separated from all other circuits by protective separation consisting of double and reinforced insulation. These circuits may only be interconnected with other SELV * (or equivalent) circuits.
Inverters supplied by a three-wire-system source (ungrounded or corner grounded)
These circuits are not separated from hazardous circuits other circuits by protective separation, but only with basic insulation. These circuits must not be interconnected with any circuits which are accessible, unless they are isolated from accessible circuits by supplemental insulation
* SELV = Safety Extra Low Voltage
1. Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below.
IMPORTANT
2. The output current capability of the +V terminal is 20 mA.
3. Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with single circles.
4. The wiring of the digital inputs S1 to S7 is shown for the connection of contacts or NPN transistors (0V common and sinking mode). This is the default setting.
For the connection of PNP transistors or for using a 24V external power supply, refer to
page 2-24, Sinking/Sourcing Mode .
5. The master speed frequency reference can be input either at terminal A1 or at terminal A2 by changing the setting of parameter H3-13. The default setting is terminal A1.
6. The multi-function analog outputs are dedicated meter outputs for analog frequency meters, ampmeters, voltmeters, wattmeters, etc. Do not use these outputs for feedback control or for any other control purposes.
7. DC reactors to improve the input power factor are built into 200 V Class Inverters from 22 up to 110 kW and 400 V
Class Inverters from 22 up to 300 kW. A DC reactor is an option only for Inverters of 18.5 kW or less. Remove the short circuit bar when connecting a DC reactor.
24
Terminal Block Configuration
The terminal arrangements are shown in
.
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Fig 2.3 Terminal Arrangement (200 V/400 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW)
Charge indicator
Main circuit terminals
Ground terminal
Fig 2.4 Terminal Arrangement (200 V/400 V Class Inverter of 22 kW or more)
2
25
2
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from
TOE-C726-2 for wire sizes for Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units
Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
Possible
Wire Sizes mm 2 (AWG)
Recommended Wire
Size mm 2
(AWG)
Wire Type
F7Z20P4
S/L2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4 1.2 to 1.5
1.5 to 4
(14 to 10)
2.5
(14)
F7Z20P7
S/L2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
1.5 to 4
(14 to 10)
2.5
(14)
F7Z21P5
S/L2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
1.5 to 4
(14 to 10)
2.5
(14)
F7Z22P2
S/L2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4 1.2 to 1.5
1.5 to 4
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
F7Z23P7
S/L2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
4
(12 to 10)
4
(12)
F7Z25P5
S/L2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
6
(10)
6
(10)
F7Z27P5
S/L2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M5 2.5
10
(8 to 6)
10
(8)
F7Z2011
S/L2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M5 2.5
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
F7Z2015
F7Z2018
F7Z2022
F7Z2030
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3
B1, B2
M6
M5
M6
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3
B1, B2
M8
M5
M6
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
M8
M6
M8
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
M8
M6
M8
4.0 to 5.0
2.5
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
2.5
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
16
(6 to 4)
25
(4 to 2)
10
(8 to 6)
25
(4)
25 to 35
(3 to 2)
10
(8 to 6)
25
(4)
25 to 35
(3 to 1)
10 to 16
(8 to 4)
25 to 35
(4 to 2)
50
(1 to 1/0)
10 to 16
(8 to 4)
25 to 35
(4 to 2)
16
(6)
-
25
(4)
25
(3)
-
25
(4)
50
(1)
25
(4)
-
25
(4)
25
(3)
-
25
(4)
26
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
F7Z2037
F7Z2045
F7Z2055
F7Z2075
F7Z2090
F7Z2110
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3 r/l1, ∆/l2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3 r/l1, ∆/l2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3 r/l1, ∆/l2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3 r/l1, ∆/l2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3 r/l1, ∆/l2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 r/l1, ∆/l2
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75 °C
Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
Terminal
Screws
M10
M8
M10
M4
M10
M8
M10
M4
M12
M10
M8
M10
M4
M12
M10
M8
M10
M4
M12
M8
M12
M4
M12
M8
M12
M4
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
17.6 to 22.5
1.3 to 1.4
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
17.6 to 22.5
1.3 to 1.4
31.4 to 39.2
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
17.6 to 22.5
1.3 to 1.4
31.4 to 39.2
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
17.6 to 22.5
1.3 to 1.4
31.4 to 39.2
8.8 to 10.8
31.4 to 39.2
1.3 to 1.4
31.4 to 39.2
8.8 to 10.8
31.4 to 39.2
1.3 to 1.4
Possible
Wire Sizes mm 2 (AWG)
Recommended Wire
Size mm 2
(AWG)
70
(2/0)
70 to 95
(2/0 to 4/0)
6 to 16
(10 to 4)
35 to 70
(2 to 2/0)
0.5 to 4
(20 to 10)
95
(3/0 to 4/0)
6 to 16
(10 to 4)
50 to 70
(1 to 2/0)
0.5 to 4
(20 to 10)
50 to 95
(1/0 to 4/0)
90
(4/0)
6 to 70
(10 to 2/0)
35 to 95
(3 to 4/0)
0.5 to 4
(20 to 10)
95 to 122
(3/0 to 250)
95
(3/0 to 4/0)
6 to 70
(10 to 2/0)
95 to 185
(3/0 to 400)
0.5 to 4
(20 to 10)
150 to 185
(250 to 400)
95 to 150
(4/0 to 300)
6 to 70
(10 to 2/0)
70 to 150
(2/0 to 300)
0.5 to 4
(20 to 10)
–
35
(2)
1.5
(16)
95
(3/0)
240 to 300
(350 to 600)
150 to 300
(300 to 600)
6 to 70
(10 to 2/0)
150
(300)
0.5 to 4
(20 to 10)
Wire Type
–
50
(1)
1.5
(16)
50 × 2P
(1/0 × 2P)
90
(4/0)
–
50
(1/0)
1.5
(16)
95 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P)
95 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P)
–
95
(3/0)
1.5
(16)
150 × 2P
(250 × 2P)
95 × 2P
(4/0 × 2P)
–
70 × 2P
(2/0 × 2P)
1.5
(16)
240 × 2P, or
50 × 4P
(350 × 2P, or
1/0 × 2P)
150 × 2P, or
50 × 4P
(300 × 2P, or
1/0 × 4P)
–
150 × 2P
(300 × 2P)
1.5
(16)
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
2
27
2
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
F7Z40P4
Terminal Symbol
Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
Possible
Wire Sizes mm
2
(AWG)
Recommended Wire
Size mm
(AWG)
2
S/L2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
1.5 to 4
(14 to 10)
2.5
(14)
F7Z40P7
S/L2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4 1.2 to 1.5
1.5 to 4
(14 to 10)
2.5
(14)
F7Z41P5
S/L2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
1.5 to 4
(14 to 10)
2.5
(14)
F7Z42P2
S/L2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M4 1.2 to 1.5
1.5 to 4
(14 to 10)
Wire Type
F7Z43P7
S/L2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
F7Z44P0
S/L2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
F7Z45P5
S/L2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
F7Z47P5
S/L2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
F7Z4011
S/L2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
M4
M4
M4
M5
1.2 to 1.5
1.2 to 1.5
1.2 to 1.5
1.2 to 1.5
2.5
F7Z4015
F7Z4018
F7Z4022
F7Z4030
F7Z4037
S/L2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3
B1, B2
M5
M5
(M6)
M6
M5
M6
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M6
M8
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M6
M8
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/
T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
M8
M6
M8
2.5
2.5
(4.0 to 5.0)
4.0 to 5.0
2.5
4.0 to 5.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
2.5 to 4
(14 to 10)
2.5 to 4
(14 to 10)
4
(12 to 10)
2.5 to 4
(14 to 10)
6
(10)
4
(12 to 10)
6 to 10
(10 to 6)
10
(8 to 6)
6 to 10
(10 to 6)
10 to 35
(8 to 2)
10
(8)
10 to 16
(8 to 4)
16
(6 to 4)
16 to 25
(6 to 2)
25
(4)
25 to 35
(4 to 2)
25 to 50
(4 to 1/0)
10 to 16
(8 to 4)
25 to 35
(4 to 2)
2.5
(14)
6
(10)
10
(8)
6
(10)
2.5
(14)
6
(10)
4
(12)
10
(8)
4
(12)
2.5
(14)
4
(12)
2.5
(14)
4
(12)
25
(4)
35
(2)
16
(6)
25
(4)
10
(8)
10
(8)
10
(8)
16
(6)
-
25
(4)
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
28
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
F7Z4045
F7Z4055
F7Z4075
F7Z4090
F7Z4110
F7Z4132
F7Z4160
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/
T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
3
3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
3
3
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/l1, ∆200/ l2
200, ∆400/ l2
400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/l1, ∆200/ l2
200, ∆400/ l2
400 r/l1, ∆200/ l2
200, ∆400/ l2
400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/l1, ∆200/ l2
200, ∆400/ l2
400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 r/l1, ∆200/ l2
200, ∆400/ l2
400
Terminal
Screws
M8
M6
M8
M8
M6
M8
M10
M10
M8
M10
M4
M10
M10
M8
M10
M4
M10
M8
M12
M4
M10
M8
M12
M4
M12
M8
M12
M4
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
9.0 to 10.0
4.0 to 5.0
9.0 to 10.0
31.4 to 39.2
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
31.4 to 39.2
1.3 to 1.4
31.4 to 39.2
17.6 to 22.5
8.8 to 10.8
31.4 to 39.2
1.3 to 1.4
31.4 to 39.2
8.8 to 10.8
31.4 to 39.2
1.3 to 1.4
31.4 to 39.2
8.8 to 10.8
31.4 to 39.2
1.3 to 1.4
31.4 to 39.2
8.8 to 10.8
31.4 to 39.2
1.3 to 1.4
Possible
Wire Sizes mm 2 (AWG)
Recommended Wire
Size mm 2
(AWG)
35
(2)
35 to 50
(2 to 1/0)
10 to 16
(8 to 4)
25 to 35
(4 to 2)
50
(1 to 1/0)
10 to 16
(8 to 4)
25 to 35
(4 to 2)
70 to 95
(2/0 to 4/0)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
6 to 16
(10 to 4)
35 to 70
(2 to 2/0)
0.5 to 4
(20 to 10)
95
(3/0 to 4/0)
95
(3/0 to 4/0)
10 to 16
(8 to 4)
50 to 95
(1 to 4/0)
0.5 to 4
(20 to 10)
50 to 95
(1/0 to 4/0)
10 to 70
(8 to 2/0)
70 to 150
(2/0 to 300)
0.5 to 4
(20 to 10)
95
(3/0 to 4/0)
75 to 95
(2/0 to 4/0)
10 to 70
(8 to 2/0)
95 to 150
(4/0 to 300)
0.5 to 4
(20 to 10)
95 to 185
(4/0 to 400)
95 to 185
(3/0 to 400)
10 to 70
(8 to 2/0)
50 to 150
(1/0 to 300)
0.5 to 4
(20 to 10)
-
25
(4)
50
(1)
-
70
(2/0)
1.5
(16)
95 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P)
75 × 2P
(2/0 × 2P)
-
95
(4/0)
1.5
(16)
95 × 2P
(4/0 × 2P)
95 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P)
-
50 × 2P
(1/0 × 2P)
1.5
(16)
-
25
(4)
70
(2/0)
50
(1/0)
-
35
(2)
1.5
(16)
95
(4/0)
95
(4/0)
-
50
(1)
1.5
(16)
50 × 2P
(1/0 × 2P)
Wire Type
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
2
29
2
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
F7Z4185
F7Z4220
F7Z4300
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 r/l1, ∆200/ l2
200, ∆400/ l2
400 r/l1, ∆200/ l2
200, ∆400/ l2
400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 r/l1, ∆200/ l2
200, ∆400/ l2
400
Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
3
3
Terminal
Screws
M16
M4
M16
M4
M16
M4
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
78.4 to 98
1.3 to 1.4
78.4 to 98
1.3 to 1.4
78.4 to 98
1.3 to 1.4
Possible
Wire Sizes mm 2 (AWG)
95 to 300
(4/0 to 600)
0.5 to 4
(20 to 10)
95 to 300
(4/0 to 600)
0.5 to 4
(20 to 10)
95 to 300
(4/0 to 600)
0.5 to 4
(20 to 10)
–
120 × 2P
(250 × 2P)
1.5
(16)
120 × 4P
(250 × 4P)
120 × 4P
(4/0 × 4P)
240 × 4P
(400 × 4P)
–
120 × 2P
(250 × 2P
1.5
(16)
Recommended Wire
Size mm
(AWG)
2
150 × 2P
(300 × 2P)
120 × 2P
(250 × 2P)
300 × 2P
(600 × 2P)
–
95 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P
1.5
(16)
240 × 2P
(500 × 2P)
240 × 2P
(400 × 2P)
120 × 4P
(250 × 4P)
Wire Type
Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75 °C.
IMPORTANT
Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage.
Line voltage drop is calculated as follows:
Line voltage drop (V) = 3 x wire resistance (W/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10
-3
210
Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in
. Wire the terminals correctly for the desired purposes.
Table 2.3 Main Circuit Terminal Functions (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Purpose
Main circuit power input
Inverter outputs
DC bus terminals
Braking Resistor Unit connection
DC reactor connection
Braking Unit connection 3,
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
1,
B1, B2
1, 2
Model: CIMR-F7Z
200 V Class 400 V Class
20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300
2022 to 2110
20P4 to 2110
4022 to 4300
40P4 to 4300
20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300
20P4 to 2018
20P4 to 2018
2022 to 2110
40P4 to 4018
40P4 to 4018
4022 to 4300
Ground 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300
2
211
2
Main Circuit Configurations
The main circuit configurations of the Inverter are shown in
Table 2.4 Inverter Main Circuit Configurations
200 V Class
CIMR-F7Z20P4 to 2018
400 V Class
CIMR-F7Z40P4 to 4018
Power supply
Control circuits
CIMR-F7Z2022, 2030
Power supply
Control circuits
CIMR-F7Z4022 to 4055
Power supply
Control circuits
CIMR-F7Z2037 to 2110
Power supply
Control circuits
CIMR-F7Z4075 to 4300
Power supply
Control circuits
Note: Consult your OYMC representative before using 12-phase rectification.
Power supply
Control circuits
212
Standard Connection Diagrams
Standard Inverter connection diagrams are shown in Fig 2.5
. These are the same for both 200 V Class and
400 V Class Inverters. The connections depend on the Inverter capacity.
CIMR-F7Z20P4 to 2018 and 40P4 to
4018
DC reactor
(optional)
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
CIMR-F7Z2022, 2030, and 4022 to 4055
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit (optional)
2
3-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
3-phase 200 VAC
(400 VAC)
Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting the DC reactor.
CIMR-F7Z2037 to 2110
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit (optional)
The DC reactor is built in.
CIMR-F7Z4075 to 4300
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit (optional)
3-phase
200 VAC
3-phase
400 VAC
The control power is supplied internally from the DC bus in all inverter models.
Fig 2.5 Main Circuit Terminal Connections
213
2
Wiring the Main Circuits
This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs.
Wiring Main Circuit Inputs
Observe the following precautions for the main circuit power supply input.
Installing Fuses
To protect the inverter, it is recommended to use semiconductor fuses like they are shown in the table below.
Table 2.5 Input Fuses
Inverter
Type
2011
2015
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
2055
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
27P5
2075
2090
2110
Voltage (V)
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
FUSE
Current (A)
180
240
300
350
80
100
130
150
20
30
40
60
10
10
15
450
550
600
I
2 t (A
2 s)
12~25
12~25
23~55
34~98
82~220
220~610
290~1300
450~5000
1200~7200
1800~7200
870~16200
1500~23000
2100~19000
2700~55000
4000~55000
7100~64000
11000~64000
13000~83000
4011
4015
4018
4022
4030
4037
4045
4055
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
44P0
45P5
47P5
4075
4090
4110
4132
4160
4185
4220
4300
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
100
125
150
150
50
60
70
80
15
20
25
30
5
5
10
10
450
600
700
900
250
300
350
400
6~55
6~55
10~55
18~55
34~72
50~570
100~570
100~640
150~1300
400~1800
700~4100
240~5800
500~5800
750~5800
920~13000
1500~13000
3000~55000
3800~55000
5400~23000
7900~64000
14000~250000
20000~250000
34000~400000
52000~920000
214
Installing a Moulded-case Circuit Breaker
When connecting the power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) to the power supply using a moulded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) observe that the circuit breaker is suitable for the Inverter.
•
•
Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times of the inverter's rated current.
For the MCCB's time characteristics, be sure to consider the inverter's overload protection (one minute at
150% of the rated output current).
Installing an Earth Leakage Breaker
Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated. If an earth leakage breaker should be used, select one that detects only the leakage current which is in the frequency range that is hazardous to humans but not high-frequency leakage currents.
•
•
For a special-purpose earth leakage breaker for Inverters, choose one with a sensitivity amperage of at least 30 mA per Inverter.
When using a general earth leakage breaker, choose one with a sensitivity amperage of 200 mA or more per Inverter and with an operating time of 0.1 s or more.
Installing a Magnetic Contactor
If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off by a control circuit, a magnetic contactor can be used.
The following things should be considered:
•
•
The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.
Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break down.
Do not exceed one power upper hour.
When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed after recovery from a power interruption.
Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block
Input power supply can be connected to any terminal R, S or T on the terminal block; the phase sequence of input power supply is irrelevant to the output phase sequence.
Installing an AC Reactor
If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kW or more) or a phase advancing capacitor is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the inverter unit to break down.
To prevent this, install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the Inverter or a DC reactor to the DC reactor connection terminals.
This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.
Installing a Surge Absorber
Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads include magnetic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoids, and magnetic brakes.
2
215
2
Wiring the Output Side of Main Circuit
Observe the following precautions when wiring the main output circuits.
Connecting the Inverter and Motor
Connect output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 respective to the motor lead wires U, V, and W.
Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward run command. Switch over any two of the output terminals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward run command.
Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals
Never connect a power supply to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. If voltage is applied to the output terminals, the internal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged.
Never Short or Ground Output Terminals
If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter case, an electric shock or grounding may occur. This is extremely hazardous. Do not short the output wires.
Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor
Never connect a phase advancing capacitor to an output circuit. The high-frequency components of the
Inverter output may overheat and be damaged and may cause other parts to burn.
Do Not Use an Electromagnetic Switch
Never connect an electromagnetic switch (MC) between the Inverter and motor and turn it ON or OFF during operation. If the MC is turned ON while the Inverter is operating, a large inrush current will be created and the inverter’s overcurrent protection will operate.
When using a MC to switch for instance between two motors, stop the Inverter output before operating the
MC.
Installing a Thermal Overload Relay Contact for Motor Protection
This Inverter has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating. If, however, more than one motor is operated with one Inverter or a multi-polar motor is used, always install a thermal relay (THR) between the Inverter and the motor and set L1-01 to 0 (no motor protection). The control circuit should be designed so that the contacts of the thermal overload relay turn OFF the magnetic contactor on the main circuit inputs.
Cable Length between Inverter and Motor
If the cable between the Inverter and the motor is long, the high-frequency leakage current will increase, causing the Inverter output current to increase as well. This may affect peripheral devices. To prevent this, adjust the carrier frequency (set in C6-01, C6-02) as shown in
.)
Table 2.6 Cable Length between Inverter and Motor
Cable length
Carrier frequency
50 m max.
15 kHz max.
100 m max.
10 kHz max.
More than 100 m
5 kHz max.
216
Ground Wiring
Observe the following precautions when wiring the ground line.
• Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100 Ω and that of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10 Ω.
•
•
•
Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as welding machines or power tools.
Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire.
Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode and the ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable.
When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.
2
OK NO
Fig 2.6 Ground Wiring
Connecting a Inverter Back Mounted Braking Resistor
A Braking Resistor mounted to back side of the Inverter can be used with 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with outputs from 0.4 to 11 kW. If this type of resistor is used, the internal braking resistor overheat protection can be enabled (see Table below).
Connect the braking resistor as shown in Fig 2.7
.
L8-01 (Protection selection for internal DB resistor)
L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration)
(Select either of them.)
1 (Enable overheat protection)
0 (Disable stall prevention function)
3 (Enable stall prevention function with braking resistor)
Inverter Braking resistor
Fig 2.7 Connecting the Braking Resistor
IMPORTANT
The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2. Do not connect the resistor to any other terminals. Otherwise the resistor and other equipment may get damaged
217
2
Connecting a Braking Resistor Unit (LKEB) and Braking Unit (CDBR)
Connect a Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit to the Inverter as shown in the
. The internal braking resistor overheat protection must be disabled (See table below).
L8-01 (Protection selection for internal DB resistor)
L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration)
(Select either of them.)
0 (Disable overheat protection)
0 (Disable stall prevention function)
3 (Enable stall prevention function with braking resistor)
The Braking Resistor Unit will not work properly if L3-04 is set to 1 (i.e., if stall prevention is enabled for deceleration). Hence the deceleration time may be longer than the set time (C1-02/04/06/08).
To prevent the braking unit/braking resistor from overheating, design the control circuit to turn OFF the power
supply using the thermal overload relay contacts of the units as shown in Fig 2.8
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 0.4 to 18.5 kW Output Capacity
Braking Resistor Unit (LKEB)
Inverter
Thermal overload relay contact
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 22 kW or higher Output Capacity
CDBR Braking Unit Braking Resistor Unit (LKEB)
Inverter
Thermal overload relay contact
Thermal overload relay contact
Fig 2.8 Connecting the Braking Resistor and Braking Unit
218
Connecting Braking Units in Parallel
When connecting two or more Braking Units in parallel, use the wiring and jumper settings like shown in
. There is a jumper for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a master or slave. Select “Master” for the first Braking Unit only, and select “Slave” for all other Braking Units (i.e. from the second Unit onwards).
Thermal overload relay contact
Braking
Resistor
Unit
(LKEB)
Thermal overload relay contact
Braking
Resistor
Unit
(LKEB)
Thermal overload relay contact
Braking
Resistor
Unit
(LKEB)
2
Inverter
Braking Unit #3
Braking Unit #2
Braking Unit #1
Thermal overload relay contact
Thermal overload relay contact
Fig 2.9 Connecting Braking Units in Parallel
Thermal overload relay contact
219
2
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Wire Sizes
For remote operation using analog signals, keep the control line length between the Analog Operator or operation signals and the Inverter to 50 m or less, and separate the lines from main power lines or other control circuits to reduce induction from peripheral devices.
When setting frequencies from an external frequency source (and not from a Digital Operator), use shielded twisted-pair wires and ground the shield for the largest area of contact between shield and ground.
The terminal numbers and the appropriate wire sizes are shown in
Table 2.7 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all Models)
Terminals
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
Possible
Wire Sizes mm
2
(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size mm
2
(AWG)
Wire Type
FM, AC, AM, SC, SP,
SN, A1, A2, +V, –V, S1,
S2, S3, S4, S5, S6, S7
MA, MB, MC, M1, M2,
M3, M4, M5, M6
MP, RP, R+, R-, S+, S-,
IG
Phoenix type
0.5 to 0.6
Single wire
0.5 to 2.5
Stranded wire:
0.5 to 1.5
(26 to 14)
*2
:
0.75
(18)
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire
*1
• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable
E (G) M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
0.5 to 2.5
(20 to 14)
1
(12)
* 1. Use shielded twisted-pair cables to input an external frequency reference.
* 2. We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
Straight Solderless Terminals for Signal Lines
Models and sizes of straight solderless terminal are shown in the following table.
Table 2.8 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
Wire Size mm
2
(AWG)
0.25 (24)
0.5 (20)
0.75 (18)
1.25 (16)
2 (14)
Model
AI 0.25 - 8YE
AI 0.5 - 8WH
AI 0.75 - 8GY
AI 1.5 - 8BK
AI 2.5 - 8BU d1
0.8
1.1
1.3
1.8
2.3
d2
2
2.5
2.8
3.4
4.2
L
12.5
14
14
14
14
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact
Fig 2.10 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
220
Wiring Method
Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block.
1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slot screwdriver.
2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.
3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly
Screwdriver Blade of screwdriver
Control circuit terminal block
Strip the end for
7 mm if no solderless terminal is used.
Wires
Solderless terminal or wire without soldering
3.5 mm max.
Blade thickness: 0.6 mm max.
Fig 2.11 Connecting Wires to Terminal Block
2
221
2
Control Circuit Terminal Functions
The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in
. Use the appropriate terminals for the cor-
rect purposes.
Table 2.9 Control Circuit Terminals with Default Settings
Signal Level Type No.
Signal Name Function
S1 Forward run/stop command Forward run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S2 Reverse run/stop command Reverse run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S3 External fault input
*1 Fault when ON.
Digital input signals
S4 Fault reset
*1
S5
Multi-step speed reference
1
*1
(Master/auxiliary switch)
S6
Multi-step speed reference
2
*1
S7 Jog frequency reference*1
SC Digital input common
SN Digital Input Neutral
Reset when ON
Auxiliary frequency reference when ON.
Multi-step setting 2 when
ON.
Jog frequency when ON.
–
–
Functions are selected by setting H1-01 to
H1-05.
SP Digital Input Power Supply +24VDC power supply for digital inputs
+V 15 V power output
–V –15 V power output
A1 Frequency reference
15 V power supply for analog references
–15 V power supply for analog references
–10 to +10 V/100%
24 VDC, 8 mA
Photocoupler
–
–
24 VDC, 250 mA max.
*2
15 V
(Max. current: 20 mA)
–15 V
(Max. current: 20 mA)
–10 to +10 V(20 k Ω)
Analog input signals
A2 Multi-function analog input
4 to 20 mA/100%
–10 V to +10 V/100%
Function is selected by setting H3-09.
4 to 20 mA(250 Ω)
–10 V to +10 V(20k Ω)
AC Analog reference common
E(G)
Shield wire, optional ground line connection point
–
–
–
–
M1
M2
Running signal
(1NO contact)
Operating when ON.
Sequence output signals
Relay contacts
Contact capacity:
1 A max. at 250 VAC
1 A max. at 30 VDC
*3
Analog output signals
M3
M4
M5
M6
MA
MB
MC
Zero speed
Speed agreement detection
Fault output signal
Zero level (b2-01) or below when ON
Within ±2 Hz of set frequency when ON.
FM
Multi-function analog output
(frequency output)
AC Analog common
AM
Multi-function analog output
(current monitor)
0 to 10 V, 10V=100% output frequency
–
0 to 10 V, 10V=200%
Inverter's rated current
Multi-function contact outputs
Fault when CLOSED across MA and MC
Fault when OPEN across MB and MC
Multi-function analog output 1
Multi-function analog output 2
Relay contacts
Contact capacity:
1 A max. at 250 VAC
1 A max. at 30 VDC
*3
–10 to +10 V max. ±5%
2 mA max.
4 to 20 mA current output
222
Type
Pulse I/O
RS-485/
422
No.
RP
MP
R+
R-
S+
S-
Signal Name
Pulse input
Pulse monitor
MEMOBUS communications input
MEMOBUS communications output
Table 2.9 Control Circuit Terminals with Default Settings
*4
IG Signal common
Function
H6-01 (Frequency reference input)
H6-06 (Output frequency)
For 2-wire RS-485, short R+ and S+ as well as R- and S-.
–
Signal Level
0 to 32 kHz (3 k Ω)
High level voltage 3.5 to
13.2 V
0 to 32 kHz
+15 V output (2.2 k Ω)
Differential input, Photocoupler isolation
Differential input, Photocoupler isolation
–
* 1. The default settings are given for terminals S3 to S7. For a 3-wire sequence, the default settings are a 3-wire sequence for S5, multi-step speed setting 1 for S6 and multi-step speed setting 2 for S7.
* 2. Do not use this power supply for supplying any external equipment.
* 3. When driving a reactive load, such as a relay coil with DC power supply, always insert a flywheel diode as shown in
Fig 2.12
.
* 4. Pulse input specifications are given in the following table.
Low level voltage
High level voltage
H duty
Pulse frequency
0.0 to 0.8 V
3.5 to 13.2 V
30% to 70%
0 to 32 kHz
Flywheel diode
External power:
30 VDC max.
Coil
1 A max.
The rating of the flywheel diode must be at least as high as the circuit voltage.
Fig 2.12 Flywheel Diode Connection
Jumper CN15 and DIP Switch S1
The jumper CN 15 and DIP switch S1 are described in this section.
Ch1
Ch2
CN15
I V
Off
S1
On
Analog Output FM Current/Voltage Signal Selection
Analog Output AM Current/Voltage Signal Selection
RS422/485 Port Termination Resistance
Analog Input A2 Current/Voltage Signal Selection
V I
2
Fig 2.13 Jumper CN15 and DIP Switch S1
223
2
The functions of DIP switch S1 and jumper CN15 are shown in the following table.
Name
S1-1
S1-2
CN15-
CH1
CN15-
CH2
Table 2.10 DIP Switch S1 and Jumper CN15 Settings
Function
RS-485 and RS-422 terminating resistance
Input method for analog input A2
Multifunction analog output FM voltage/ current switch
Multifunction analog output AM voltage/ current switch
V: 0 to 10 V (internal resistance: 20 k Ω)
I: 4 to 20 mA (internal resistance: 250 Ω)
I: Current output
V: Voltage output
I: Current output
V: Voltage output
Setting
OFF: No terminating resistance
ON: Terminating resistance of 110 Ω
Sinking/Sourcing Mode
The input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode (0-V common) and sourcing mode (+24V common) by using the terminals SN, SC, and SP. An external power supply is also supported, providing more freedom in signal input methods.
Table 2.11 Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals
Internal Power Supply – Sinking Mode External Power Supply – Sinking Mode
External +24V
Internal Power Supply – Sourcing Mode External Power Supply – Sourcing Mode
External +24V
224
Control Circuit Terminal Connections
Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in Fig 2.14
Multi-function digital inputs
[Factory setting]
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
External fault
Fault reset
Multi-step speed setting 1
Multi-step speed setting 2
Jog frequency selection
2k Ω
Analog input setting adjustment
2k
Ω
3
1
2
0 to 10V
4 to 20mA
P P
MEMOBUS communication
RS-485/422
≈
S5
S6
S7
SN
S1
S2
S3
S4
SC
SP
24V
E(G) Shield terminal
Varispeed F7
CIMR-F7Z47P5 ≈
MA
MB
MC
Fault contact output
250 VAC, 1A max.
30 VDC, 1A max.
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
Contact output 1
[Default : Running]
Contact output 2
[Default : Zero speed]
Contact output 3
[Default :
Frequency agree 1]
Shield terminal
E(G)
RP
Pulse train input [Default:
Frequency reference input]
0 to 32kHz
+V
Analog input power supply
+15V, 20mA
A1
Analog input 1: Master frequency reference
0 to +10V (20 k )
MP
AC
FM
AM
AC
Multi-function digital output
250 VAC, 1A max.
30 VDC, 1A max.
Pulse train output
0 to 32kHz (2.2 k )
[Default: Output frequency]
Adjustment,
20 k Ω
+
FM
-
Multi-function analog output 1
(-10 to +10V 2mA / 4 to 20mA)
[Default: Output frequency 0 to +10V]
Adjustment,
20 k Ω
+
AM
-
Multi-function analog output 2
(-10 to +10V 2mA / 4 to 20mA)
[Default: Output current 0 to +10V]
P
P
R+
R-
S+
S-
IG
AC
-V
0V
Analog input power supply
-15V, 20mA
Terminating resistance
Shielded wires P
Twisted-pair
Shielded wires
Fig 2.14 Control Circuit Terminal Connections
2
225
2
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions
Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits.
•
•
Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, , 1, 2, and 3) and other high-power lines.
Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M1, M2, M3, M4, M5, and M6 (contact outputs) from wiring to other control circuit terminals.
•
•
•
•
If using an optional external power supply, it shall be a UL Listed Class 2 power supply source.
Use twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults.
Ground the cable shields with the maximum contact area of the shield and ground.
Cable shields have to be grounded on both cable ends.
226
Wiring Check
Checks
Check all wiring after wiring has been completed. Do not perform continuity check on control circuits. Perform the following checks on the wiring.
•
•
Is all wiring correct?
Have no wire clippings, screws, or other foreign material been left?
•
•
Are all screws tight?
Are any wire ends contacting other terminals?
2
227
2
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Option Card Models and Specifications
Up to two Option Cards can be mounted in the Inverter. You can mount one card into each of the two places on the controller card (A, and C) like shown in
.
lists the type of Option Cards and their specifications.
Table 2.12 Option Cards
Card Model Specifications
Mounting
Location
PG Speed Control Cards
PG-B2
PG-X2
Two phase (phase A and B), +12V inputs, max. response frequency: 50 kHz
Three phase (phase A, B, Z), line driver inputs
(RS422), max. response frequency: 300 kHz
A
A
DeviceNet communications card
Profibus-DP communications card
InterBus-S communications card
CANOpen communications card
SI-N1/
PDRT2
SI-P1
SI-R1
SI-S1
Option card for DeviceNet fieldbus
Option card for Profibus-DP fieldbus
Option card for InterBus-S fieldbus
Option card for CANOpen fieldbus
C
C
C
C
Analog Input Cards
Digital Input Cards
AI-14U
AI-14B
2 channel high resolution analog input card
Channel 1: 0 to 10 V (20 k Ω)
Channel 2: 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)
Resolution: 14 Bit
3 Channel high resolution analog input card
Signal level: -10 to +10 V (20 k Ω)
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)
Resolution: 13 Bit + sign
DI-08 8 bit digital speed reference input card
DI-16H2 16 bit digital speed reference input card
C
C
C
C
Installation
Before mounting an Option Card, remove the terminal cover and be sure that the charge indicator inside the
Inverter does not glow anymore. After that remove the Digital Operator and front cover and then mount the
Option Card.
Refer to documentation provided with the Option Card for the mounting instructions for option slots A and C.
228
Preventing C Option Card Connectors from Rising
After installing an Option Card into slot C, insert an Option Clip to prevent the side with the connector from rising. The Option Clip can be easily removed by holding onto the protruding portion of the Clip and pulling it out.
A Option Card mounting spacer hole
CN4
A Option Card connector
CN2
C Option Card connector
A Option Card mounting spacer
(Provided with A Option Card)
C Option Card mounting spacer
C Option Card
Option Clip
(To prevent raising of
C Option Card)
2
A Option Card
Fig 2.15 Mounting Option Cards
A Option Card mounting spacer
229
2
PG Speed Control Card Terminals and Specifications
PG-B2
The terminal specifications for the PG-B2 are given in the following table.
Table 2.13 PG-B2 Terminal Specifications
Terminal
TA1
TA2
TA3
5
6
3
4
1
2
(E)
No.
1
2
3
4
Contents
Power supply for pulse generator
Pulse input terminals phase A
Pulse input terminals phase B
Pulse monitor output terminals phase A
Pulse monitor output terminals phase B
Shield connection terminal -
Specifications
12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
H: +8 to 12 V (max. input frequency: 50 kHz)
GND pulse input phase A
H: +8 to 12 V (max. input frequency: 50 kHz)
GND pulse input phase B
Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
PG-X2
The terminal specifications for the PG-X2 are given in the following table.
Terminal
TA1
TA2
TA3
3
4
1
2
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
No.
1
2
5
6
7
(E)
* 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time.
Table 2.14 PG-X2 Terminal Specifications
Contents
Power supply for pulse generator
Specifications
12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
5 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
Pulse input terminal phase A (+)
Pulse input terminal phase A (–)
Pulse input terminal phase B (+)
Pulse input terminal phase B (–)
Pulse input terminal phase Z (+)
Pulse input terminal phase Z (–)
Common terminal inputs
Pulse monitor output terminal phase A (+)
Pulse monitor output terminal phase A (–)
Pulse monitor output terminal phase B (+)
Pulse monitor output terminal phase B (–)
Pulse monitor output terminal phase Z (+)
Pulse monitor output terminal phase Z (–)
Common terminal monitor outputs
Shield connection terminal
Line driver input (RS422 level)
(maximum input frequency: 300 kHz)
–
Line driver output (RS422 level output)
–
–
230
Wiring
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Wiring the PG-B2
The following illustrations show wiring examples for the PG-B2 using the option cards power supply or an external power source for supplying the PG.
Three-phase
Inverter
Power supply +12 V
Power supply 0
Pulse input phase A
GND pulse input phase A
Pulse input phase B
GND pulse input phase B
Pulse monitor output phase A
Pulse monitor output phase B
Fig 2.16 PG-B2 Wiring Using the Option Cards Power Supply
2
Fig 2.17 PG-B2 Wiring Using a 12 V External Power Supply
•
•
•
•
Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder). Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user parameter F1-05. The factory preset if for forward rotation, A-phase advancement.
A-phase pulses
B-phase pulses
•
•
When connecting to a voltage-output-type PG (encoder), select a PG that has an output impedance with a current of at least 12 mA to the input circuit photocoupler (diode).
The pulse monitor dividing ratio can be changed using parameter F1-06.
231
2
PG power supply
Pulse monitor output phase A
Pulse input
A-phase pulses
Pulse monitor output phase B
Pulse input phase B
B-phase pulses
Fig 2.18 I/O Circuit Configuration of the PG-B2
Wiring the PG-X2
The following illustrations show wiring examples for the PG-X2 using the option cards power supply or an external power source for supplying the PG.
Three-phase 200/400VAC Inverter
PG-X2
+12 V
0 V
+5 V
A-phase pulse input (+)
Pulse input phase A (–)
Pulse input phase B (+)
Pulse input phase B (–)
Pulse input phase Z (+)
Pulse input phase Z (–)
Pulse monitor output phase A
Pulse monitor output phase B
Pulse monitor output phase Z
Fig 2.19 PG-X2 Wiring Using the Option Cards Power Supply
232
PG-X2
TA1
IP12
IG
IP5
A (+)
A (-)
B (+)
B (-)
Z (+)
Z (-)
IG
9
10
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
PG power supply
AC
Capacitor for momentary power loss
0V +12V
+
0 V
+12 V
+
-
-
+
+
-
PG
TA3
Fig 2.20 PG-X2 Wiring Using a 5 V External Power Supply
•
•
•
•
Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder). Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user parameter F1-05 (PG Rotation). The factory preset if for motor forward rotation, A-phase advancement.
Wiring Terminal Blocks
Do not use more cables longer than 100 meters for wiring the PG (encoder) and keep them separate from power lines.
Use shielded, twisted-pair wires for pulse inputs and pulse output monitor wires, and connect the shield to the shield connection terminal.
Wire Sizes (Same for All Models)
Terminal wire sizes are shown in
Table 2.15 Wire Sizes
Terminal
Terminal
Screws
Wire Thickness (mm
2
)
Pulse generator power supply
Pulse input terminal
Pulse monitor output terminal
-
Stranded wire: 0.5 to 1.25
Single wire: 0.5 to 1.25
Shield connection terminal M3.5
0.5 to 2
Wire Type
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire
• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable
(KPEV-S by Hitachi Electric Wire or equivalent)
Straight Solderless Terminals
We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
2
233
2
Cable Lug Connector Sizes and Tightening Torque
The lug sizes and tightening torques for various wire sizes are shown in
Wire Thickness [mm
2
]
0.5
0.75
1.25
2
Table 2.16 Cable Lugs and Tightening Torque
Terminal
Screws
Crimp Terminal Size
M3.5
1.25 - 3.5
1.25 - 3.5
1.25 - 3.5
2 - 3.5
Tightening Torque (N • m)
0.8
Precautions
The wiring method is the same as the one used for straight solderless terminals. Refer to
the following precautions when wiring.
• Separate the control signal lines for the PG Speed Control Card from main power lines and other control circuits.
•
•
•
The shield must be connected to prevent operational errors caused by noise. Also, do not use any lines that are more than 100 m long.
Connect the shield (green grounding cable of the option card) to the shield terminal (E).
Do not solder the ends of wires. Doing so may cause contact faults.
•
•
•
When not using straight solderless terminals, strip the wires to a length of approximately 5.5 mm
A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply consumption is higher than 200 mA. (If momentary power loss must be handled, use a backup capacitor or other method.)
Make sure not to exceed the PG cards maximum input frequency. The output frequency of the pulse generator can be calculated using the following formula.
f PG (Hz) =
Motor speed at maximum output frequency (min
–1
)
60 x PG rating (p/rev)
234
3
Digital Operator and
Modes
This chapter describes Digital Operator displays and functions, and provides an overview of operating modes and switching between modes.
Digital Operator and Modes ...................................................3-1
Modes ....................................................................................3-4
3
Digital Operator
This section describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator.
Digital Operator Display
The key names and functions of the Digital Operator are described below.
Drive Status Indicators
FWD: Lights up when a forward run command is input.
REV: Lights up when a reverse run command is input.
SEQ: Lights up when any other run command source than the digital operator is selected
REF: Lights up when any other frequency reference source than the digital operator is selected
ALARM: Lights up when an error or alarm has occurred.
Data Display
Displays monitor data, parameter numbers, and settings.
Mode Display (displayed at the upper left of data display)
DRIVE: Lights up in Drive Mode.
QUICK: Lights up in Quick Programming Mode.
ADV: Lights up in Advanced Programming Mode.
VERIFY:Lights up in Verify Mode.
A. TUNE:Lights up in Autotuning Mode.
Keys
Execute operations such as setting parameters, monitoring, jogging, and autotuning.
Fig 3.1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions
Digital Operator Keys
The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3.1
.
Table 3.1 Key Functions
Key Name
LOCAL/REMOTE Key
Function
Switches between operation via the Digital Operator (LOCAL) and control circuit terminal operation (REMOTE).
This key can be enabled or disabled by setting parameter o2-01.
MENU Key Selects modes.
ESC Key Returns to the status before the DATA/ENTER key was pressed.
32
Key
JOG Key
Name
Table 3.1 Key Functions (Continued)
Function
Enables jog operation when the Inverter is operated from the Digital
Operator.
FWD/REV Key
Shift/RESET Key
Increment Key
Decrement Key
DATA/ENTER Key
Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is operated from the Digital Operator.
Sets the active digit when programming parameters.
Also acts as the Reset key when a fault has occurred.
Selects menu items, sets parameter numbers, and increments set values.
Used to move to the next item or data.
Selects menu items, sets parameter numbers, and decrements set values.
Used to move to the previous item or data.
Pressed to enter menu items, parameters, and set values.
Also used to switch from one screen to another.
RUN Key
Starts the Inverter operation when the Inverter is being controlled by the Digital Operator.
STOP Key
Stops Inverter operation.
This key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the control circuit terminal by setting parameter o2-02.
* Except in diagrams, Keys are referred to the key names listed in the above table.
There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP keys on the Digital Operator. These indicators will light and flash to indicate operating status.
The RUN key indicator will flash and the STOP key indicator will light during initial excitation or DC braking. The relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP keys and the Inverter status is shown in
3
Inverter output frequency
Frequency setting
: Light up : Blinking : Not light up
Fig 3.2 RUN and STOP Indicators
33
3
Modes
This section describes the Inverter's modes and switching between modes.
Inverter Modes
The Inverter's parameters and monitoring functions are organized in groups called modes that make it easier to read and set parameters.The Inverter is equipped with 5 modes.
The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown in the
Table 3.2 Modes
Drive mode
Quick programming mode
Advanced programming mode
Verify mode
Mode
Autotuning mode*
Primary function(s)
Use this mode to start/stop the inverter, to monitor values such as the frequency references or output current and for displaying fault information or the fault history.
Use this mode to read and set the basic parameters.
Use this mode to reference and set all parameters.
Use this mode to read/set parameters that have been changed from their factory-set values.
Use this mode when running a motor with unknown motor data in the vector control modes. The motor data are measured/calculated and set automatically.
This mode can also be used to measure only the motor line-to-line resistance.
* Always perform autotuning with the motor before operating in the vector control modes.
34
Switching Modes
The mode selection display will appear when the MENU key is pressed. Press the MENU key from the mode selection display to switch through the modes in sequence.
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter a mode and to switch from a monitor display to the setting display.
Display at Startup
Rdy
U1 01 =50.00Hz
U1-02=50.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
Mode Selection
Display
MENU
Monitor Display Setting Display
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
MENU
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
MENU
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
ESC
-DRIVE-
Monitor
Rdy
U1 - 01=50.00Hz
U1-02=50.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
RESET
Rdy
U101 =50.00Hz
U1-02=50.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
ESC ESC
U1- 01= 0 50.00Hz
(0.00 ~ 50.00)
" 00.00Hz "
ESC
-QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02=2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
ESC
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 - 00=1
Select Language
RESET
ESC
-VERIFY-
None Modified
-ADV-
Select Language
A100 =0 *1*
English
-ADV-
Select Language
A1- 00= 0 *1*
English
ESC
The constant number will be displayed if a constant has been changed. Press the
DATA/ENTER key to enable the change.
ESC
ESC
-A.TUNE-
Tuning Mode Sel
T101 =0 1 *0*
Standard Tuning
"0"
ESC
ESC
-QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02= 2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
-A.TUNE-
Tuning Mode Sel
T1- 01= 0 *0*
Standard Tuning
"0"
Fig 3.3 Mode Transitions
IMPORTANT
To run the inverter after viewing/changing parameters press the MENU key and the DATA/ENTER key in sequence to enter the Drive mode. A Run command is not accepted as long as the drive is in any other mode.
3
35
3
36
Drive Mode
The Drive mode is the mode in which the Inverter can be operated. All monitor parameters (U1as fault information and the fault history can be displayed in this mode
) as well
When b1-01 (Reference selection) is set to 0, the frequency can be changed from the frequency setting display using the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys. The parameter will be written and the display returns to the Monitor display.
Example Operations
Example key operations in drive mode are shown in the following figure.
Display at Startup
Rdy
U1 01 =50.00Hz
Mode Selection
Display
MENU
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
MENU
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
MENU
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
ESC
Monitor Display
A B
Rdy
U1 - 01=50.00Hz
RESET
-DRIVE-
Monitor
Rdy
U1 - 02=50.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
U1-04= 2
-DRIVE-
Monitor
Rdy
U1 - 40 = 10H
U1-01=50.00Hz
U1-02=50.00Hz
U2 - 01=OC
Rdy
ESC
1 2
Rdy
U101 =50.00Hz
RESET
-DRIVE-
Output Freq
Rdy
U102 =50.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
U1-04= 2
ESC
RESET
ESC
RESET
Rdy
U140 = 10H
U1-01=50.00Hz
U1-02=50.00Hz
1
3
2
4
U2 01 = OC
Rdy
ESC
Frequency Setting Display
ESC
Rdy
U1 - 01= 0 50.00Hz
(0.00 ~ 50.00)
" 00.00Hz "
The Frequency Setting
Display will not be displayed when using an analog reference.
The fault name will be displayed if the DATA/ENTER
Key is pressed while a constant is being displayed for which a fault code is being displayed.
ESC
U2 - 01= OC
Over Current
U2 - 02= OV
Rdy
DC Bus Overvolt
-DRIVE-
Fault Trace
U2 - 02 = OV
Rdy
U3-03=50.00Hz
U3-04=50.00Hz
RESET
ESC
Rdy
U2 02 = OV
U3-03=50.00Hz
U3-04=50.00Hz
3 4
5 5
Rdy
U3 01 = OC
U3-02=OV
U3-03=OH
U3 - 01= OC
U3-02= OV
U3-03= OH
Rdy
RESET
ESC
U3 - 02 = OV
U3-03= OH
U3-04= UV
Rdy
RESET
ESC
U3 02 = OV
U3-03= OH
U3-04= UV
Rdy
5
A B
Fig 3.4 Operations in Drive Mode
5
ESC
ESC
ESC
U3 - 01= OC
Rdy
Over Current
U3 - 02= OV
Rdy
DC Bus Overvolt
Note: 1. When changing the display with the Increment / Decrement keys, the next display after the one for the last parameter number will be the one for the first parameter number and vice versa. For example, the next display after the one for U1-01 will be U1-40. This is indicated in the figures by the letters A and B and the numbers 1 to 6.
2. The display for the first monitor parameter (frequency reference) will be displayed when power is turned ON. The monitor item displayed at startup can be set in o1-02 (Monitor Selection after Power Up).Operation cannot be started from the mode selection display.
Quick Programming Mode
In quick programming mode, the basic parameters required for Inverter trial operation can be monitored and set.
The parameters can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to change the frequency. The parameter will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to Chapter 5 User Parameters
for details on the parameters displayed in quick programming mode.
Example Operations
Example key operations in quick programming mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
MENU
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
A B
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
-QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02=2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
ESC
-QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02= 2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
ESC
MENU
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
-QUICK-
Reference Source
b1-01=1 *1*
Terminals
ESC
-QUICK-
Reference Source
b1-01= 1 *1*
Terminals
MENU
-QUICK-
Run Source
b1-02=1 *1*
Terminals
-QUICK-
Run Source
b1-02= 1 *1*
Terminals
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
ESC
MENU
-QUICK-
Terminal AM Gain
H4-05 = 50%
(0.0 ~ 1000.0)
50.0%
-QUICK-
Terminal AM Gain
H4-05 = 0 050.0%
(0.0 ~ 1000.0)
50.0% -A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
ESC
-QUICK-
MOL Fault Select
L1-01=1 *1*
Std Fan Cooled
-QUICK-
MOL Fault Select
L1-01= 1 *1*
Std Fan Cooled
ESC
-QUICK-
StallP Decel Sel
L3-04=1 *1*
Enabled
-QUICK-
StallP Decel Sel
L3-04= 1 *1*
Enabled
ESC
A B
Fig 3.5 Operations in Quick Programming Mode
3
37
3
Advanced Programming Mode
In advanced programming mode all Inverter parameters can be monitored and set.
A parameter can be changed from the setting displays using the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys. The parameter will be saved and the display will return to monitor display when the DATA/ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to
Chapter 5 User Parameters for details on the parameters.
Example Operations
Example key operations in advanced programming mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
A B
1 2
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
ESC
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 -00=1
Select Language
RESET
ESC
-ADV-
Select Language
A100 =0
English
*1*
ESC
-ADV-
Select Language
A1- 00=
English
0 *1*
MENU
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
MENU
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 - 02 =2
Control Method
-ADV-
PID Control b5 -01=0
PID Mode
RESET
ESC
RESET
ESC
-ADV-
Control Method
A102 =2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
1
3
2
4
-ADV-
PID Mode b501 =0
Disabled
*0*
ESC
ESC
-ADV-
Control Method
A1- 02= 2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
-ADV-
PID Mode b5-01= 0
Disabled
*0*
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
MENU
-ADV-
PID Control b5 - 14= 1.0Sec
Fb los Det Time
-ADV-
Torque Limit
L7 -01=200%
Fwd Torque Limit
RESET
ESC
RESET
ESC
-ADV-
Fb los Det Time b514 =1.0Sec
(0.0 ~ 25.5)
1.0 sec
3 4
5 6
-ADV-
Fwd Torque Limit
L701 = 200%
(0 ~ 300)
200%
ESC
ESC
-ADV-
Fb los Det Time b5-14= 0 1.0Sec
(0.0 ~ 1000.0)
50.0%
-ADV-
Fwd Torque Limit
L7-01= 2 00%
(0 ~ 300)
200%
-ADV-
Torque Limit
L704 = 200%
Fwd Torque Limit
RESET
ESC
-ADV-
Fwd Torque Limit
L704 = 200%
(0 ~ 300)
200%
ESC
-ADV-
Torq Lmt Rev Rgn
L7-04= 2 00%
(0 ~ 300)
200%
5 6
A B
Fig 3.6 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode
38
Setting Parameters
Here the procedure to change C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 10 s to 20 s is shown.
Table 3.3 Setting Parameters in Advanced Programming Mode
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display Description
1
-DRIVE-
Frequency Ref
Rdy
U1 01 =50.00Hz
U1-02=50.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
Power supply turned ON.
2
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
3
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
Press the MENU key 3 times to enter the advanced programming mode.
4
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 -00=1
Select Language
-ADV-
Accel / Decel
C1 -00 = 10.0sec
Accel Time 1
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
C1-01 = 0 010.0sec
(0.0 ~ 6000.0)
"10.0 sec"
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
(0.0 ~ 6000.0)
"10.0 sec"
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
(0.0 ~ 6000.0)
"10.0 sec"
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
(0.0 ~ 6000.0)
"10.0 sec"
-ADV-
Entry Accepted
Press the DATA/ENTER to access the monitor display.
Press the Increment or Decrement key to display the parameter
C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
Press the DATA/ENTER key to access the setting display. The current setting value of C1-01 is displayed.
Press the Shift/RESET key to move the flashing digit to the right.
Press the Increment key to change set value to 20.00 s.
Press the DATA/ENTER key to save the set data.
“Entry Accepted” is displayed for 1 sec after pressing the
DATA/ENTER key.
12
-ADV-
Accel Time 1
C1-01 = 20.0sec
(0.0 ~ 6000.0)
"10.0 sec"
The display returns to the monitor display for C1-01.
3
39
3
Verify Mode
The Verify mode is used to display any parameters that have been changed from their default settings in a programming mode or by autotuning. “None” will be displayed if no settings have been changed.
The parameter A1-02 is the only parameter from the A1 group, which will be displayed in the modified constants list if it has been changed before. The other parameters will not be displayed, even if they are different from the default setting.
In the verify mode, the same procedures can be used to change settings as they are used in the programming mode. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to change a setting. When the DATA/ENTER key is pressed the parameter setting are written and the display returns to the Monitor display.
Example Operations
In the example below the following settings have been changed from their default settings:
• b1-01 (Reference Selection)
•
•
•
C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1)
E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting)
E2-01 (Motor Rated Current).
Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
MENU
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
MENU
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
MENU
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
MENU
ESC
A B
-VERIFY-
Reference Source
b1-01=0 *0*
Terminals
"1"
C1-01=200.0sec
(0.0 ~ 6000.0)
"10.0sec"
-VERIFY-
Input Voltage
E1-01=190VAC
(155~255)
"200VAC"
-VERIFY-
Motor Rated FLA
E2-01= 2.00A
(0.32~6.40)
"1.90A"
A B
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
-VERIFY-
Reference Source
b1-01= 0 *0*
Terminals
"1"
C1-01= 0 200.0sec
(0.0 ~ 6000.0)
"10.0sec"
-VERIFY-
Input Voltage
E1-01= 1 90VAC
(155~255)
"200VAC"
-VERIFY-
Motor Rated FLA
E2-01= 2 .00A
(0.32~6.40)
"1.90A"
Fig 3.7 Operations in Verify Mode
310
Autotuning Mode
Autotuning automatically measures and sets the required motor data in order to achieve the maximum performance. Always perform autotuning before starting operation when using the vector control modes.
When V/f control has been selected, only stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance can be selected.
When the motor cannot be disconnected from the load, and Open Loop or Closed Loop Vector Control shall be used perform stationary autotuning.
Example of Operation
Enter the motor rated output power (in kW), rated voltage, rated current, rated frequency, rated speed and number of poles specified on the nameplate of the motor and then press the RUN key. The motor is automatically run and the measured motor data are set in the E2 parameters.
Always set the above items. Otherwise autotuning cannot be started, e.g. it cannot be started from the motor rated voltage input display.
A parameter can be changed from the setting displays using the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys. The parameter will be saved when the DATA/ENTER key is pressed.
3
311
3
The following example shows the autotuning input procedure for standard rotating autotuning in Open Loop
Vector Control.
Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
MENU
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
MENU
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
MENU
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
MENU
ESC
-A.TUNE-
Tuning Mode Sel
T1 01 =0 *0*
Standard Tuning
"0"
-A.TUNE-
Mtr Rated Power
T1 02 = 0.40kW
(0.00~650.00)
"0.40kW"
-A.TUNE-
Rated Voltage
T1 03 = 200.0VAC
(0.0~255.0)
"200.0VAC"
-A.TUNE-
Rated Current
T1 04 = 1.90A
(0.32~6.40)
"1.90A"
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
-A.TUNE-
Tuning Mode Sel
01 = 0 *0*
Standard Tuning
"0"
-A.TUNE-
Mtr Rated Power
T1-01= 0 00.40kW
(0.00~650.00)
"0.40kW"
-A.TUNE-
Rated Voltage
T1- 03 = 2 00.0VAC
(0.0~255.0)
"200.0VAC"
-A.TUNE-
Rated Current
T1- 04 = 0 01.90A
(0.32~6.40)
"1.90A"
-A.TUNE-
Rated Frequency
T1 05 = 50.0Hz
(0.0~400.0)
"50.0Hz"
-A.TUNE-
Number of Poles
T1 06 = 4
"4"
ESC
-A.TUNE-
Rated Frequency
T1-05 = 0 50.0Hz
(0.0~400.0)
"50.0Hz"
-A.TUNE-
Number of Poles
T1-06 =
(2~48)
"4"
4
-A.TUNE-
Rated Speed
T1 07 = 1750RPM
(0~24000)
"1750"
ESC
Rdy
0.0Hz/0.0A
Tuning Ready ?
Press RUN key
RUN
The display will automatically change depending on the status of autotuning.
-A.TUNE-
Rated Speed
T107 = 0 1750RPM
(0~24000)
"1750"
-A.TUNE-
Tune Proceeding
40.0Hz/10.5A
START GOAL
STOP
STOP key
Fig 3.8 Operation in Autotuning Mode
If a fault occurs during autotuning, refer to
40.0Hz/10.5A
START GOAL
Tune Successful
-A.TUNE-
Tune Successful
312
4
Trial Operation
This chapter describes the procedures for trial operation of the Inverter and provides an example of trial operation.
Trial Operation Procedure......................................................4-2
Trial Operation .......................................................................4-3
Adjustment Suggestions ......................................................4-14
4
Trial Operation Procedure
Perform trial operation according to the following flowchart. When setting the basic parameters, always set
C6-01 (Heavy/Normal Duty Selection) according to the application.
START
Installation
Wiring
Set power supply voltage jumper.
*1
Turn ON power.
Confirm status.
Select operating method.
Basic settings
(Quick programming mode)
NO
V/f control?
YES
YES
NO
V/f control
PG?
Set E1-03.
V/f default: 200V/50Hz(400V/50Hz)
Settings according to control mode
Vector Control (A1-02=2 or 3)*5
V/f Control with PG (A1-02=1)
Set E1-03, E2-04, and F1-01.
V/f default: 200V/50Hz (400V/50Hz)
*2
Non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance
*4
Motor operation during autotuning possible?
*3
YES
Rotating autotuning *6
NO
Non-rotating autotuning *6
Application settings
(Advanced programming mode)
No-load operation
Loaded operation
Optimum adjustments and parameter settings
Check/record parameters.
END
1. Set for 400 V Class Inverter for 75 kW or more.
2. If there is a reduction gear between the motor and PG, set the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13 in advanced programming mode.
3. Use rotational autotuning to increase autotuning accuracy whenever it is okay for the motor to be operated.
4. If the motor cable changes to 50 m or longer for the actual installation, perform non-rotating autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only on site.
5. The default control mode is Open Loop Vector control
(A1-02=2).
6. If the maximum output frequency and the base frequency are different, set the maximum output frequency (E1-04) after autotuning.
Fig 4.1 Trial Operation Flowchart
42
Trial Operation
Application Confirmation
For applications with quadratic torque characteristic like pumps, fans or blowers set C6-01 (Heavy/Normal
Duty selection) to 1 or 2 (Normal Duty 1 or 2). Select the Normal Duty mode (1 or 2) regarding the required overload capability.
For applications with constant torque characteristics like conveyors etc. always set C6-01 to 0 (Heavy Duty).
The default setting is of C6-01 is 0 (Heavy Duty).
For details on the Heavy/Normal Duty selection refer to
Chapter 6 Application and Overload Selections.
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or Higher)
The power supply voltage jumper must be set for 400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or higher. Insert the jumper into the voltage connector nearest to the actual power supply voltage.
The jumper is factory-set to 440 V. If the power supply voltage is not 440 V, use the following procedure to change the setting.
1. Turn OFF the power supply and wait for at least 5 minutes.
2. Confirm that the CHARGE indicator has gone out.
3. Remove the terminal cover.
4. Insert the jumper at the position for the voltage supplied to the Inverter (see Fig 4.2
).
5. Return the terminal cover to its original position.
4
Connector
200 V class power supply
400V class power supply Jumper (factory-set position)
Power supply input terminals
CHARGE indicator
Fig 4.2 Large-capacity Inverter Connections
43
4
Power ON
Confirm all of the following items and then turn ON the power supply.
• Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage.
200 V class: 3-phase 200 to 240 VDC, 50/60 Hz
400 V class: 3-phase 380 to 480 VDC, 50/60 Hz
•
•
•
•
Make sure that the motor output terminals (U, V, W) and the motor are connected correctly.
Make sure that the Inverter control circuit terminal and the control device are wired correctly.
Set all Inverter control circuit terminals to OFF.
When using a PG Speed Control Card, make sure that it is wired correctly.
Checking the Display Status
After normal power up without any problems the operator display shows the following:
Display for normal operation
-DRIVERdy
Frequency Ref
U1 01 =50.00Hz
U1-02=50.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
The frequency reference monitor is displayed in the data display section.
When a fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the above display. In that case, refer to
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting . The following display shows an example of a display for faulty opera-
tion.
Display for fault operation
-DRIVE-
UV
DC Bus Undervolt
The display will differ depending on the type of fault.
A low voltage alarm is shown at left.
44
Basic Settings
Switch to the quick programming mode (“QUICK” will be displayed on the LCD screen) and set the following parameters.
Refer to
Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes for Digital Operator operating procedures and to
and
Chapter 6 Parameter Settings by Function
for details on the parameters.
Table 4.1 Basic Parameter Settings
: Must be set. : Set as required.
Class
Parameter Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Page
A1-02 b1-01 b1-02 b1-03
C1-01
C1-02
C6-01
Control method selection
Reference selection
Operation method selection
Stopping method selection
Acceleration time 1
Deceleration time 1
Heavy /Normal
Duty selection
Sets the control method for the Inverter.
0: V/f control
1: V/f control with PG
2: Open Loop Vector control
3: Closed Loop Vector Control
Sets the frequency reference input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
Sets the run command input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (digital input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
Selects stopping method when stop command is sent.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC braking stop
3: Coast to stop with timer
Sets the acceleration time in seconds for the output frequency to climb from 0% to
100%.
Sets the deceleration time in seconds for the output frequency to fall from 100% to
0%.
Set to Heavy Duty or Normal Duty regarding to the applications requirements.
0: Heavy Duty
1: Normal Duty 1
2: Normal Duty 2
0 to 3
0 to 4
0 to 3
0 to 3
0.0 to 6000.0
0.0 to 6000.0
0 or 2
0
1
1
0
10.0 s
10.0 s
0
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection
Sets the carrier frequency. The factory setting and setting range depends on the setting of C6-01.
d1-01 to d1-16 and d1-17
Frequency references 1 to 16 and jog frequency reference
Sets the required speed references for multi-step speed operation or jogging.
0 to F
Depends on setting of C6-01.
0 to 150.00 Hz
* d1-01 to d1-16: 0.00
Hz d1-17: 6.00
Hz
4
45
4
Table 4.1 Basic Parameter Settings (Continued)
: Must be set. : Set as required.
Class
Parameter Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Page
E1-01
E2-01
H4-02 and
H4-05
Input voltage setting
Motor rated current
FM and AM terminal output gain
Sets the Inverter's nominal input voltage in volts.
Sets the motor rated current.
Can be used to adjust the analog output when an instrument is connected to the
FM or AM terminal.
155 to 255 V
(200 V class)
310 to 510 V
(400 V class)
10% to 200% of Inverter's rated current
0.0 to
1000.0%
200 V
(200 V class)
400 V
(400 V class)
Setting for generalpurpose motor of same capacity as
Inverter
H4-02:
100%
H4-05:
50%
L1-01
L3-04
Motor protection selection
Stall prevention selection during deceleration
Used to enable or disable the motor overload protection function.
0: Disabled
1: Protection for general purpose motor
(fan cooled)
2: Protection for frequency converter motor (externally cooled)
3: Protection for special vector control motor
If using the dynamic brake option (braking resistor, Braking Resistor Units and
Braking Units), be sure to set parameter
L3-04 to 0 (disabled) or 3 (enabled with braking resistor).
0 to 3
0 to 3
1
1
* The setting range is valid if Heavy Duty is selected (C6-01=0, default setting). If Normal Duty 1 or 2 is selected (C6-01=1 or 2) the setting range will be
0.0 to 400.0 Hz.
46
Settings for the Control Methods
The usable Autotuning methods depend on the control method setting of the Inverter.
Overview of Settings
Make the required settings in quick programming mode and autotuning mode according to
.
Setting the Control Method
Select the appropriate control mode as required by the application.
each control mode.
Table 4.2 Control Mode Properties
Control Mode
Parameter Setting
Basic Control Main Applications
V/f control A1-02 = 0
V/f control with PG A1-02 = 1
Open Loop Vector control
A1-02 = 2
(factory setting)
Closed Loop Vector control
A1-02 = 3
Fixed voltage/frequency ratio control
Fixed voltage/frequency ratio control with speed compensation using a PG
Current vector control without a PG
Closed Loop Vector control
Variable speed control, particularly control of multiple motors with one
Inverter and replacing existing inverters
Applications requiring high-precision speed control using a PG on the machine side
Variable speed control, applications requiring speed and torque accuracy.
Very high-performance control with a
PG (simple servo drives, high-precision speed control, torque control, and torque limiting)
Note With Open Loop or Closed Loop Vector control, the motor and Inverter must be connected 1:1. The motor capacity for which stable control is possible is 50% to 100% of the Inverters capacity.
V/f Control without PG (A1-02 = 0)
• Set either one a fixed V/f pattern (E1-03=0 to E) or specify a user-set V/f pattern (E1-03=F) as required for the motor and load characteristics using E1-04 to E1-13 in advanced programming mode.
Simple operation of a general-purpose motor at 50 Hz:
E1-03 = 0 or F (default)
If E1-03 = F, the default setting in the user setting from E1-04 to E1-13 are for 00 Hz
Simple operation of a general-purpose motor at 60 Hz:
E1-03 = 1
• Perform non-rotating autotuning for the line-to-line resistance if the motor cable is 50 m or longer for the
for details on non-rotating autotuning.
V/f Control with PG (A1-02=1)
Additionally to the V/f control without PG settings the following settings have to be made:
• Set the number of motor poles in E2-04 (Number of Motor Poles)
• Set the number of pulses per rotation in F1-01 (PG Constant). If there is a reduction gear between the motor and PG, set the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13 in advanced programming mode.
4
47
4
Open Loop Vector Control (A1-02 = 2)
Always perform autotuning. If the motor can be operated, perform rotating autotuning. If the motor cannot be operated, perform non-rotating autotuning. Refer to the following section on
Autotuning for details on auto-
tuning.
Closed Loop Vector Control (A1-02=3)
Always perform autotuning. If the motor can be operated, perform rotating autotuning. If the motor cannot be operated, perform non-rotating autotuning. Refer to the following section on
Autotuning for details on auto-
tuning.
Autotuning
Autotuning sets motor parameters automatically when using Open Loop or Closed Loop Vector control, when the cable length is long or the installation has changed.
Setting the Autotuning Mode
One of the following three autotuning modes can be set.
• Rotating autotuning
•
•
Non-rotating autotuning
Non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
Rotating Autotuning (T1-01 = 0)
Rotating autotuning is used for Open Loop and Closed Loop Vector control only. Set T1-01 to 0, input the data from the motor nameplate, and then press the RUN key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will operate the motor for approximately 1 minute and set the required motor parameters automatically.
Non-rotating Autotuning (T1-01 = 1)
Non-rotating autotuning is used for Open Loop and Closed Loop Vector control only. Set T1-01 to 1, input the data from the motor nameplate, and then press the RUN key on the Digital Operator. The inverter will supply power to the non-rotating motor for approximately 1 minute and some of the motor parameters will be set automatically. The remaining motor parameters will be set automatically during the first time operation.
Non-rotating Autotuning for Line-to-Line Resistance (T1-01 = 2)
Non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance can be used in any control mode. This is the only possible autotuning for V/f control and V/f control with PG.
It can be used to improve the performance when the motor cable is long, the cable length has changed or when the motor and inverter have different capacities.
To perform autotuning in V/f control or V/f control with PG, set T1-02 (Motor rated power) and T1-04 (Motor rated current) and then press the RUN key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will supply power to the nonrotating motor for approximately 20 seconds and the Motor line-to-line resistance and cable resistance will be automatically measured.
48
Precautions Before Using Autotuning
Read the following precautions before using autotuning.
• Autotuning an Inverter is fundamentally different from autotuning a servo system. Inverter autotuning automatically adjusts parameters according to detected motor data, whereas servo system autotuning adjusts parameters according to the detected size of the load.
•
•
•
•
When speed precision or torque precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), use a motor with a rated voltage that is ~20 V less than the input power supply voltage of the Inverter for
200 V-class Inverters and ~40 V less for 400 V-class Inverters. If the rated voltage of the motor is the same as the input power supply voltage, the voltage output from the Inverter will be unstable at high speeds and sufficient performance will not be possible.
Use non-rotating autotuning whenever the load cannot be disconnected from the motor.
Use rotating autotuning whenever performing autotuning when high precision is required or for a motor that is not connected to a load.
If rotating autotuning is performed for a motor connected to a load, the motor data will not be found accurately and the might be poor. Never perform rotating autotuning for a motor connected to a load.
•
•
•
•
•
If the wiring between the Inverter and motor changes by 50 m or more perform non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance.
If the motor cable is long (50 m or longer), perform non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance.
If a mechanical brake is used, make sure that it is not opened for non-rotating autotuning. Make sure that it is opened for rotating autotuning.
Power will be supplied to the motor when non-rotating autotuning is performed even though the motor will not turn. Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed .
The status of the multi-function inputs and multi-function outputs during autotuning will be as shown in the following table.
Tuning Mode
Rotating autotuning
Non-rotating autotuning
Non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance
Multi-function Inputs
Do not work
Do not work
Do not work
Multi-function Outputs
Same as during normal operation
Maintain same status as when autotuning is started.
Maintain same status as when autotuning is started.
• To cancel autotuning, press the STOP key on the Digital Operator.
4
49
4
Precautions for Rotating and Non-rotating Autotuning
• If the motor rated voltage is higher than the power supply voltage, lower the base voltage value like shown in
to prevent saturation of the Inverter’s output voltage. Use the following procedure to perform
autotuning.
1. Input the voltage of the input power supply to T1-03 (Motor rated voltage).
2. Input the results of the following formula to T1-05 (Motor base frequency):
T1-05 = Base frequency from motor nameplate ×
Motor rated voltage
3. Perform autotuning.
After the completing autotuning, set E1-04 (Max. output frequency) to the base frequency from the motor’s nameplate.
Output voltage
Rated voltage from motor name plate
T1-03
0
Base frequency from motor name plate x T1-03
Rated voltage from motor name plate
Output frequency
Base frequency from motor name plate
Fig 4.3 Motor Base Frequency and Inverter Input Voltage Setting
• When speed precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), set T1-03 (Motor rated voltage) to the input power supply voltage × 0.9. In this case at high speeds the output current will increase as the input power supply voltage is reduced. Be sure to provide sufficient margin in the Inverter current.
Precautions after Rotating and Non-rotating Autotuning
If the maximum output frequency and base frequency are different, set the maximum output frequency
(E1-04) after autotuning.
410
Parameter Settings for Autotuning
The following parameters must be set before autotuning.
Table 4.3 Parameter Settings before Autotuning
Parameter Number
Name
Display
Display
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Data Displays during Autotuning
V/f
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
T1-00
*1
T1-01
T1-02
T1-03
T1-04
Motor 1/2 selection
Select
Motor
Autotuning mode selection
Tuning
Mode Sel
Motor rated power
Mtr Rated
Power
Motor rated voltage
Rated
Voltage
Motor rated current
Rated
Current
Set the location where the autotuned motor data are to be stored.
1: E1 to E2 (motor 1)
2: E3 to E4 (motor 2)
Set the autotuning mode.
0: Rotating autotuning
1: Non-rotating autotuning
2: Non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
Set the output power of the motor in Kilowatts.
Set the rated voltage of the motor.
*4
Set the rated current of the motor in Amps.
1 or 2 1
0 to 2
10% to 200% of Inverter rated output
*3
0 to 255.0 V
(200 V class)
0 to 510.0 V
(400 V class)
10% to 200% of Inverter rated current
*3
2 (V/f and
V/f with
PG)
0 (Open
Loop Vector)
*2
Same as
Inverter rated output
200.0 V
(200 V class)
400.0 V
(400 V class)
Same as generalpurpose motor with same capacity as
Inverter
Yes
Yes
(only
2)
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
(only
2)
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T1-05
T1-06
T1-07
T1-08
Motor rated frequency Set the base frequency of the
Rated
Frequency motor.
*4
Number of motor poles
Number of poles
Set the number of motor poles.
Motor rated speed
Rated
Speed
Number of
PG pulses per revolution
PG Pulses/
Rev
Set the base speed of the motor in r/min.
Sets the number of pulses for the
PG (pulse generator or encoder) per motor revolution without a multiplication factor
0 to 150.0 Hz
*5
2 to 48 poles
0 to 24000
0 to 60000
50.0 Hz
4 poles
1750 r/min
1024
–
–
–
-
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
* 1. Displayed only, when a motor switch command is set for a multi-function digital input (one of H1-01 to H1-05 set to 16).
* 2. Only setting 2 (non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance only) is possible for V/f control or V/f control with PG.
* 3. Stable vector control will be possible when the setting is between 50% and 100%.
* 4. For an inverter motor or vector control motor, the voltage and frequency may be lower than for a general-purpose motor. Always confirm setting on the nameplate or in test reports. Also, if you know the no-load values, set the no-load voltage in T1-03 and the no-load frequency in T1-05 to obtain better accuracy.
* 5. The setting range is valid if Heavy Duty is selected (C6-01=0, default setting). If Normal Duty 1 or 2 is selected (C6-01=1 or 2) the setting range will be
0.0 to 400.0 Hz.
4
411
4
Application Settings
Parameters can be set as required in advanced programming mode (i.e. “ADV” is displayed on the LCD screen). All the parameters which can be set in quick programming mode are also displayed and can be set in the advanced programming mode.
Setting Examples
•
•
•
•
•
•
The following points are examples of settings for applications.
When using an Inverter-mounted braking resistor (ERF), set L8-01 to 1 to enable ERF braking resistor overheating protection.
To prevent the machine from being operated in reverse, set b1-04 to 1 to disable reverse operation.
To increase the speed of a 50 Hz motor by 10%, set E1-04 to 55.0 Hz.
To use a 0 to 10 V analog signal for a 50 Hz motor for variable-speed operation between 0 and 45 Hz (0% to 90% speed deduction), set H3-02 to 90.0%.
To limit the speed range between 20% and 80% set d2-01 to 80.0% and set d2-02 to 20.0%.
No-load Operation
This section describes trial operation in which the motor is in no-load state, that means the machine is not connected to the motor. To avoid failures caused by the wiring of the control circuit it is recommended to use the
LOCAL mode. Press the LOCAL/REMOTE key on the Digital Operator to change to LOCAL mode (the SEQ and REF indicators on the Digital Operator should be OFF).
Always confirm safety around the motor and machine before starting Inverter operation from the Digital
Operator. Confirm that the motor works normally and that no errors are displayed at the Inverter. For applications, at which the machine can be driven in one direction only, check the motor rotation direction.
Operation with Jog frequency reference (d1-17, default: 6.00 Hz) can be started and stopped by pressing and releasing the JOG key on the Digital Operator. If the external control circuit prevents operation from the Digital Operator, confirm that emergency stop circuits and machine safety mechanisms are functioning, and then start operation in REMOTE mode (i.e., with a signal from the control signal terminal). The safety precautions must always be taken before starting the inverter and the motor connected.
NOTE
Both, a RUN command (forward or reverse) and a frequency reference (or multi-step speed command) must be provided to start Inverter operation.
Loaded Operation
Connecting the Load
•
•
After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system.
Be sure to tighten all the screws when connecting the motor shaft to the mechanical system.
412
Operation using the Digital Operator
•
•
•
Use the Digital Operator to start operation in LOCAL mode in the same way as in no-load operation.
If fault occurs during operation, make sure that the STOP key on the Digital Operator is accessible easily.
At first, set the frequency reference to a low speed, e.g. to one tenth of the normal operating speed.
Checking Operating Status
•
•
•
Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow speed, increase the frequency reference.
After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no oscillation or abnormal sound from the motor. Check the monitor display to ensure that U1-03 (Output Current) is not too high.
if hunting, vibration, or other problems originated by the control system occur.
Check and Recording Parameters
Use the verify mode (“VERIFY” is displayed on the LCD screen) to check parameters that have been changed for trial operation and record them in a parameter table.
Any parameters that have been changed by autotuning will also be displayed in the verify mode.
If required, the copy function in parameters o3-01 and o3-02 displayed in advanced programming mode can be used to copy the changed settings from the inverter to a recording area in the Digital Operator. If changed settings are saved in the Digital Operator, they can be easily copied back to the Inverter to speed up system recovery if for any reason the inverter has to be replaced.
The following functions can also be used to manage parameters.
• Saving user initial parameter values
•
•
Setting access levels for parameters
Setting a password
Saving User Initial Parameter Values (o2-03)
• If o2-03 is set to 1 after completing trial operation, the settings of parameters will be saved in a separate memory area in the inverter. When the Inverter settings have been changed for any reason, the parameters can be initialized to the settings saved in the separate memory area by setting A1-03 (Initialize) to 1110.
Parameter Access Levels (A1-01)
• A1-01 can be set to 0 (monitoring-only) to prevent parameters from being changed. A1-01 can also be set to 1 (User-specified Parameters) to display only parameters required by the machine or application in a programming mode. These parameters can be determined by setting the A2-XX parameters.
Password (A1-04 and A1-05)
• When the access level is set to monitoring-only (A1-01 = 0), a password can be set so that parameters will be displayed only when the correct password has been input.
4
413
4
Adjustment Suggestions
If hunting, vibration, or other problems originated in the control system occur during trial operation, adjust the parameters listed in the following table according to the control method. This table lists the most commonly used parameters only.
Table 4.4 Adjusted Parameters
Control
Method
Name (Parameter
Number)
Influence
Factory
Setting
Recommended
Setting
Adjustment Method
V/f control
(A1-02 = 0 or 1)
Hunting-prevention gain (N1-02)
Carrier frequency selection
(C6-02)
Torque compensation primary delay time constant (C4-02)
Torque compensation gain (C4-01)
Controlling hunting and vibration in middle-range speeds (10 to
40 Hz)
1.00
• Reducing motor magnetic noise
• Controlling hunting and vibration at low speeds
Depends on capacity
• Increasing torque and speed response
• Controlling hunting and vibration
• Improving torque at low speeds (10 Hz or lower)
• Controlling hunting and vibration
Depends on capacity
1.00
0.50 to 2.00
0 to default
200 to 1000 ms
0.50 to 1.50
• Reduce the setting if torque is insufficient for heavy loads.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for light loads.
• Increase the setting if motor magnetic noise is high.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at low to middle-range speeds.
• Reduce the setting if torque or speed response is low.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
• Increase the setting if torque is insufficient at low speeds.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for light loads.
Middle output frequency voltage
(E1-08)
Minimum output frequency voltage
(E1-10)
• Improving torque at low speeds
• Controlling shock at startup
Depends on capacity and voltage
Default to
Default +
5 V
*
• Increase the setting if torque is insufficient at low speeds.
• Reduce the setting if the shock at startup is large.
Speed feedback detection control (AFR) gain
(N2-01)
• Increasing torque and speed response
• Controlling hunting and vibration in middle-range speeds (10 to 40 Hz)
1.00
0.50 to 2.00
• Reduce the setting if torque or speed response is low.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
Open Loop
Vector control
(A1-02 = 2)
Torque compensation primary delay time constant (C4-02)
Slip compensation primary delay time
(C3-02)
• Increasing torque and speed response
• Controlling hunting and vibration
20 ms
• Increasing speed response
• Improving speed stability
200 ms
Slip compensation gain (C3-01)
• Improving speed accuracy
1.0
20 to 100 ms
100 to
500 ms
0.5 to 1.5
• Reduce the setting if torque or speed response is low.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
• Reduce the setting if speed response is low.
• Increase the setting if the speed is not stable.
• Increase the setting if speed response is low.
• Reduce the setting if the speed is too high.
414
Control
Method
Open Loop
Vector control (A1-02
= 2)
Name (Parameter
Number)
Table 4.4 Adjusted Parameters (Continued)
Influence
Factory
Setting
Recommended
Setting
Carrier frequency selection (C6-02)
• Reducing motor magnetic noise
• Controlling hunting and vibration at low speeds (10 Hz or less)
Depends on capacity
0 to default
Middle output frequency voltage
(E1-08)
Minimum output frequency voltage
(E1-10)
• Improving torque at low speeds
• Controlling shock at startup
Depends on capacity and voltage
Default to
Default +
5 V
*
ASR proportional gain
1 (C5-01) and
ASR proportional gain
2 (C5-03)
• Torque and speed response
• Controlling hunting and vibration
ASR integral time 1
(high-speed) (C5-02) and
ASR integral time 2
(low-speed) (C5-04)
• Torque and speed response
• Controlling hunting and vibration
20.00
0.500 s
10.00 to
50.00
0.300 to
1.000 s
Closed
Loop Vector control
(A1-02 = 3)
ASR switching frequency (C5-07)
ASR primary delay time (C5-06)
Carrier frequency selection (C6-02)
Switching the ASR proportional gain and integral time according to the output frequency
0.0 Hz
• Controlling hunting and vibration
0.004 s
• Reducing motor magnetic noise
• Controlling hunting and vibration at low speeds (3 Hz or less)
Depends on the capacity.
0.0 to max. output frequency
0.004 to
0.020
2.0 kHz to default
Adjustment Method
• Increase the setting if motor magnetic noise is high.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at low speeds.
• Increase the setting if torque or speed response is low.
• Reduce the setting if shock at startup is large.
• Increase the setting if torque or speed response is low.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
• Reduce the setting if torque or speed response is low.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
Sets the output frequency at which to change the ASR proportional gain and integral time when the same values cannot be used for highspeed and low-speed operation.
Increase the setting if machine rigidity is low and the system vibrates easily.
• Increase the setting if motor magnetic noise is too high.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at very low to middle-range speeds.
* The setting is given for 200 V Class Inverters. Double the voltage for 400 V Class Inverters.
•
•
•
•
Do not change the Torque Compensation Gain (C4-01) from its default setting of 1.00 when using Open
Loop Vector control.
If speeds are inaccurate during regeneration in Open Loop Vector control, enable Slip Compensation during regeneration (C3-04 = 1).
Use slip compensation to improve speed control during V/f control (A1-02 = 0).
Set the Motor Rated Current (E2-01), Motor Rated Slip (E2-02), and Motor No-load Current (E2-03), and then adjust the Slip Compensation Gain (C3-01) between 0.5 and 1.5. The default setting for V/f control is
C3-01 = 0.0 (slip compensation disabled).
To improve speed response and stability in V/f control with a PG (A1-02 = 1), set the ASR parameters
(C5-01 to C5-05) to between 0.5 and 1.5 times the default value. (Normally it is not necessary to adjust this setting.)
4
415
4
The following parameters will also affect the control system indirectly.
Table 4.5 Parameters Which Affect Control and Applications Indirectly
Name (Parameter Number)
Heavy/Normal Duty selection (C6-01)
DWELL function (b6-01 to b6-04)
Acceleration/deceleration times
(C1-01 to C1-11)
S-curve characteristics (C2-01 to C2-04)
Jump frequencies (d3-01 to d3-04)
Analog input filter time constant (H3-12)
Stall prevention (L3-01 to L3-06)
Torque limits (L7-01 to L7-04)
Feed forward control (N5-01 to N5-03)
Application
Sets the maximum torque and overload capability.
Used for heavy loads or large machine backlashes.
By adjusting the acceleration and deceleration times the torque is influenced indirectly.
Used to prevent shock at the acceleration/deceleration start and end.
Used to avoid continuous operation at possible machine resonance frequencies.
Used to prevent fluctuations in analog input signals caused by noise.
Used to prevent OV (overvoltage errors) and motor stalling for heavy loads or rapid acceleration/deceleration. Stall prevention is enabled by default and the setting normally has not to be changed. When using a braking resistor disable the stall prevention during deceleration by setting
L3-04 to 0 or set it to 3 (enabled with braking resistor).
Sets the maximum torque during Open Loop and Closed Loop Vector control. If a setting is reduced too much, stalling can occur under heavy loads.
Used to increase response for acceleration/deceleration or to reduce overshooting when there is low machine rigidity and the gain of the speed controller (ASR) cannot be increased. The inertia ratio between the load and motor and the acceleration time of the motor running unloaded must be set.
416
5
User Parameters
This chapter describes all user parameters that can be set in the Inverter.
User Parameter Descriptions.................................................5-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels ....................5-3
User Parameter Tables..........................................................5-7
5
User Parameter Descriptions
This section describes the contents of the user parameter tables.
Description of User Parameter Tables
User parameter tables are structured as shown below. Here, b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is used as an example.
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description b1-01
Reference selection
Sets the frequency reference input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0 to 4 1 No Q Q Q Q 180H -
• Parameter Number:
• Name:
• Description:
• Setting Range:
• Factory Setting:
• Change during Operation:
• Control Methods:
• MEMOBUS Register:
• Page:
The number of the user parameter.
The name of the user parameter.
Details on the function or settings of the user parameter.
The setting range for the user parameter.
The factory setting (each control method has its own factory setting.
Therefore the factory setting changes when the control method is changed.)
Refer to page page 5-70, Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)
for factory settings that are changed by setting the control method.
Indicates whether the parameter can be changed or not while the
Inverter is in operation.
Yes: Changes are possible during operation.
No: Changes are not possible during operation.
Indicates the control methods in which the user parameter can be monitored or set.
Q:
A:
The item can be monitored and set as well in quick programming mode as in advanced programming mode.
The item can be monitored and set in advanced programming mode only.
No: The item cannot be monitored or set in this control method.
The register number used for MEMOBUS communications.
Reference page for more detailed information about the parameter.
52
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
The following figure shows the Digital Operator display hierarchy for the Inverter.
MENU
Drive Mode
Inverter can be operated and its status can be displayed.
Quick Programming Mode
Minimum parameters required for operation can be monitored or set.
Advanced Programming Mode
All parameters can be monitored or set.
Verify Mode
Parameters changed from the default settings can be monitored or set.
Autotuning Mode
Automatically sets motor parameters for open-loop vector control or measures the lineto-line resistance for V/f control.
Function
Status Monitor Parameters
Fault Trace
Fault History
Initialize Mode
User-specified Setting Mode
Operation Mode Selections
DC Injection Braking
Speed Search
Timer Function
PID Control
Dwell Functions
Droop Control
Energy Saving
Zero Servo Control
Acceleration/Deceleration
S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration
Motor Slip Compensation
Torque Compensation
Speed Control (ASR)
Carrier Frequency
Preset Reference
Reference Limits
Jump Frequencies
Reference Frequency Hold
Torque Control
Field Weakening
V/f Pattern
Motor Setup
Motor 2 V/f Pattern
Motor 2 Setup
PG Option Setup
Analog Reference Card
Digital Reference Card
Serial Communications Settings
Multi-function Digital Inputs
Multi-function Digital Outputs
Multi-function Analog Inputs
Multi-function Analog Outputs
MEMOBUS Communications
Pulse Train Input/Output
Motor Overload
Power Loss Ride through
Stall Prevention
Reference Detection
Fault Restart
Torque Detection
Torque Limits
Hardware Protection
Hunting Prevention Function
Automatic Frequency Regulator
High-slip Braking
Monitor Selection
Digital Operator Functions
Copy Function
Motor Autotuning
No.
U1
U2
U3
L5
L6
L7
L8
N1
N2
N3 o1 o2 o3
H5
H6
L1
L2
L3
L4
H2
H3
H4
F2
F3
F6
H1 d6
E1
E2
E3
E4
F1
C6 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5
C3
C4
C5 b8 b9
C1
C2 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7
A1
A2 b1
T
Page
5
53
5
User Parameters Available in Quick Programming Mode
The minimum user parameters required for Inverter operation can be monitored and set in quick programming mode. The user parameters displayed in quick programming mode are listed in the following table. These, and all other user parameters, are also displayed in advanced programming mode.
Parameter
Number
A1-02 b1-01 b1-02 b1-03
C1-01
C1-02
C6-01
C6-02
Name
Display
Description
Acceleration time 1
Accel
Time 1
Deceleration time 1
Decel
Time 1
Heavy/Normal Duty selection
Heavy/Normal Duty
Carrier frequency selection
Carrier Freq
Sel
Control method selection
Control
Method
Reference source selection
Reference
Source
RUN source selection
Run Source
Stopping method selection
Stopping
Method
Sets the control method for the Inverter.
0: V/f control
1: V/f control with PG
2: Open-Loop Vector control
3: Closed Loop Vector control
Sets the frequency reference input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
Sets the run command input method
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (digital multi function inputs)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
Select stopping method when stop command is input.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC braking stop (Stops faster than coast to stop, without regenerative operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer (Run commands are disregarded during deceleration time.)
Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 Hz to the maximum output frequency.
Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum output frequency to
0 Hz.
0: Heavy Duty
1: Normal Duty 1
2: Normal Duty 2
Selects the carrier frequency.
Select F to enable detailed settings using parameters C6-03 to C6-05.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to 3
0 to 4
0 to 3
0 to 3
0.0 to
6000.0
*1
0 or 2
0 to F
2
1
1
0
10.0 s
0
1
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
V/f
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO
BUS
Register
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
102H
180H
181H
182H
200H
201H
223H
224H
54
Parameter
Number d1-01 d1-02 d1-03 d1-04 d1-17
E1-01
E1-03
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-09
E1-13
E2-01
E2-04
Name
Display
Description
Max
Frequency
Max. voltage
(VMAX)
Max Voltage
Base frequency (FA)
Base Frequency
Min. output frequency
(FMIN)
Min Frequency
Base voltage
(VBASE)
Base Voltage
Motor rated current
Mtr Rated
Power
Number of motor poles
Number of
Poles
Jog Reference
Input voltage setting
Input
Voltage
V/f pattern selection
V/f
Selection
Max. output frequency
(FMAX)
Frequency reference 1
Reference 1
Frequency reference 2
Reference 2
Frequency reference 3
Reference 3
Frequency reference 4
Reference 4
Jog frequency reference
Sets the master frequency reference.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed command 1 is ON for a multi-function input.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed command 2 is ON for a multi-function input.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed command 1 and 2 are
ON for a multi-function input.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-function inputs „Jog Frequency
Command“, „FJOG command“, or
„RJOG command“is ON.
Sets the inverter input voltage. This set value will be the basis for the protection functions.
0 to E: Select from 15 preset patterns.
F: Custom user-set pattern (Applicable for the setting of E1-04 to
E1-10).
Sets the output voltage at the base frequency (E1-06).
Sets the motor rated current in Amps.
This set value becomes the base value for motor protection and torque limit. It is an input data for autotuning.
Sets the number of motor poles. It is an input data for autotuning.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to
150.00
*2
155 to
255
*3
0 to F
40.0 to
150.0
*2
0.0 to
255.0
*3
0.0 to
150.0
*2
0.0 to
150.0
*2
0.0 to
255.0
*3
0.32 to
6.40
*5
2 to 48
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
6.00 Hz
230 V
*3
F
50.0 Hz
200.0 V
*3
50.0 Hz
*4
0.5 Hz
*4
0.0 V
*5
1.90 A
*6
4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
Q
No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO
BUS
Register
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
280H
281H
282H
283H
292H
300H
302H
303H
304H
305H
308H
30CH
30EH
311H
5
55
5
Parameter
Number
F1-01
H4-02
H4-05
L1-01
L3-04
Name
Display
Description
PG constant
PG Pulses/
Rev
Gain (terminal FM)
Terminal
FM Gain
Gain (terminal AM)
Terminal
AM Gain
Motor protection selection
MOL Select
Stall prevention selection during deceleration
StallP Decel
Sel
Sets the number of PG pulses (pulse generator or encoder).
Sets the multi-function analog output 1
(terminal FM) gain.
Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is equal to 10V/20mA output at terminal FM. Note that the maximum output voltage/current is 10V/20mA.
Sets the multi-function analog output 2
(terminal AM) gain.
Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is equal to 10V/20mA output at terminal AM. Note that the maximum output voltage/current is 10V/20mA.
Set to enable or disable the motor overload protection function using the electronic thermal relay.
0: Disabled
1: Protection for general purpose motor
(fan cooled)
2: Protection for frequency converter motor (external cooled)
3: Protection for special vector control motor
When the inverter power supply is turned off, the thermal value is reset, so even if this parameter is set to 1, protection may not be effective.
When several motors are connected to one Inverter, set to 0 and ensure that each motor is equipped with a protection device.
0: Disabled (Deceleration as set. If deceleration time is too short, a main circuit overvoltage may result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is stopped when the DC bus voltage exceeds the stall prevention level.
Deceleration restarts when voltage falls below the stall level again.)
2: Intelligent deceleration mode
(Deceleration rate is automatically adjusted so that in Inverter can decelerate in the shortest possible time. The set deceleration time is disregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking Resistor Unit)
When a braking option (Braking Resistor, Braking Resistor Unit, Braking
Unit) is used, always set to 0 or 3.
Setting
Range
0 to
60000
0 to
1000%
0 to
1000%
0 to 3
0 to 3
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1024
100%
50%
1
1
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
V/f
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO
BUS
Register
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
380H
41EH
421H
480H
492H
* 1. The setting ranges for acceleration/deceleration times depends on the setting of C1-10 (Acceleration/deceleration Time Setting Unit). If C1-10 is set to
0, the setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 (s).
* 2. The given setting range is valid if Heavy Duty is selected (C6-01=0, default setting). If Normal Duty 1 or 2 is selected (C6-01=1 or 2) the setting range will be 0.0 to 400.0 Hz.
* 3. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double.
* 4. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open Loop Vector control factory settings are given.)
* 5. After autotuning, E1-13 will contain the same value as E1-05.
* 6. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
* 7. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
56
User Parameter Tables
A: Setup Settings
Initialize Mode: A1
Parameter
Number
A1-00
A1-01
A1-02
A1-03
Name
Description
Display
Language selection for
Digital
Operator display
Select
Language
Parameter access level
Access
Level
Control method selection
Control
Method
Initialize
Init Parameters
Used to select the language displayed on the Digital Operator (JVOP-160 only).
0: English
1: Japanese
2: German
3: French
4: Italian
5: Spanish
6: Portuguese
This parameter is not changed by the initialize operation.
Used to set the parameter access level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only
(Monitoring drive mode and setting A1-01 and A1-
04.)
1: Used to select user parameters (Only parameters set in A2-01 to A2-32 can be read and set.)
2: Advanced
(Parameters can be read and set in both, quick programming mode (Q) and advanced programming mode (A).)
Used to select the control method for the Inverter
0: V/f control
1: V/f with PG feedback
2: Open loop vector
3: Closed Loop Vector
This parameter is not changed by the initialize operation.
Used to initialize the parameters using the specified method.
0: No initializing
1110: Initializes using the user parameters
2220: Initializes using a two-wire sequence.
(Initializes to the factory setting.)
3330: Initializes using a three-wire sequence.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to 6
0 to 2
0 to 3
0 to
3330
0
2
2
0
Yes
Yes
No
No
V/f
A
A
Q
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
A
100H –
101H
102H
103H
–
5
57
5
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
A1-04
Password
Enter Password
Password setting
A1-05
Select Password
Password input when a password has been set in A1-05.
This function write-protects some parameters of the initialize mode.
If the password is changed,
A1-01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to
A2-32 parameters can no longer be changed. (Programming mode parameters can be changed.)
Used to set a four digit number as the password.
Usually this parameter is not displayed. When the Password
(A1-04) is displayed, hold down the RESET key and press the Menu key. The password will be displayed.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to
9999
0 to
9999
0
0
No
No
V/f
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
104H
105H
User-set Parameters: A2
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
A2-01 to
A2-32
User specified parameters
User Param
1 to 32
Description
Used to select the function for each of the user specified parameters. User parameters are the only accessible parameters if Parameter Access Level is set to user parameters
(A1-01=1)
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation b1-01 to o3-02
– No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A A A A
106H to
125H
58
Application Parameters: b
Operation Mode Selections: b1
Name Parameter
Number
Display
Description b1-01 b1-02 b1-03 b1-04 b1-05 b1-06
Reference source selection
Reference
Source
RUN command source selection
Run Source
Sets the frequency reference input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
Sets the run command input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(digital multi function inputs)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
Stopping method selection
Stopping
Method
Prohibition of reverse operation
Used to set the stopping method used when a stop command is input.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC injection braking stop
(Stops faster than coast to stop, no regenerative operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer
(Run commands are disregarded during deceleration.)
0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled
2: Output Phase Rotation
(both rotational directions are enabled)
Reverse
Oper
Operation selection for setting frequencies equal or lower than
E1-09
Zero-Speed
Oper
Control input scan
Cntl Input
Scans
Used to set the method of operation when the frequency reference input is less than the minimum output frequency (E1-09).
0: Run at frequency reference
(E1-09 not effective).
1: STOP (coast to stop)
2: Run at min. frequency.
(E1-09)
3: Run at zero speed (Frequencies below E1-09 are zero)
Used to set the responsiveness of the control inputs (forward/ reverse and multi-function inputs.)
0: Fast reading
1: Normal reading (Can be used for possible malfunction due to noise.)
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to 4
0 to 3
0 to 3
*1
0 to 2
*2
0 to 3
0 or 1
1
1
0
0
0
1
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Q
Q
Q
A
A
No
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
Q
Q
Q
A
No
No
A
Q
Q
Q
A
A
No
A
Q
Q
Q
A
No
A
A
180H
181H
182H
183H
184H
185H
–
5
59
5
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation b1-07 b1-08
Operation selection after switching to remote mode
LOC/REM
RUN Sel
Run command selection in programming modes
RUN CMD at PRG
Used to set the operation mode when switching to the
Remote mode using the Local/
Remote Key.
0: Run signals that are input during mode switching are disregarded. (Input Run signals after switching the mode.)
1: Run signals become effective immediately after switching to the Remote mode.
Used to set an operation prohibition in programming modes.
0: Operation prohibited.
1: Operation permitted
(Disabled when Digital
Operator is the selected
Run command source
(b1-02 = 0)).
0 or 1
0 or 1
0
0
* 1. The setting range is 0 or 1 for Closed Loop Vector control.
* 2. The setting range is 0 or 1 for Closed Loop Vector control an V/f control with PG
No
No
V/f
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
186H
187H
-
-
DC Injection Braking: b2
Name Parameter
Number
Display
Description b2-01
Zero speed level (DC injection braking starting frequency)
DCInj Start
Freq
Used to set the frequency at which DC injection braking starts when b1-03 is set to 0
(deceleration to stop).
When b2-01 is less than E1-
09, E1-09 becomes the DC injection braking starting frequency. b2-02 b2-03 b2-04
DC injection braking current
DCInj
Current
DC injection braking time at start
DCInj
Time@Start
DC injection braking time at stop
DCInj
Time@Stop
Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the inverter rated current.
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at start in units of 1 second.
Used to stop coasting motor and restart it. When the set value is 0, DC injection braking at start is not performed.
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at stop in units of 1 second.
Used to prevent coasting after the stop command has been input. When the set value is
0.00, DC injection braking at stop is not performed.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.0 to
10.0
0 to
100
0.00
to
10.00
0.00
to
10.00
0.5 Hz
50%
0.00 s
0.50 s
No
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
189H
18AH
18BH
18CH
510
Speed Search: b3
Name Parameter
Number
Display
Speed search selection
(current detection or speed calculation)
Description
Enables/disables the speed search function for the RUN command and sets the speed search method.
0: Disabled, speed calculation
1: Enabled, speed calculation
2: Disabled, current detection
3: Enabled, current detection
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page b3-01 b3-02 b3-03 b3-05 b3-10
SpdSrch at
Start
Speed Calculation:
When the search is started, the motor speed is calculated and acceleration/deceleration is performed from the calculated speed to the specified frequency
(motor direction is also searched).
Current Detection:
The speed search is started from the frequency when power was momentarily lost or the maximum frequency. The speed is detected by observing the current.
Speed search operating current
(current detection)
SpdSrch
Current
Sets the speed search operation current as a percentage, taking the Inverter rated current as
100%.
Usually not necessary to set.
When restarting is not possible with the factory settings, reduce the value.
Speed search deceleration time
(current detection)
SpdSrch
Dec Time
Speed search wait time (current detection or speed calculation)
Search
Delay
Sets the output frequency deceleration time during speed search in 1-second units.
Sets the time for deceleration from the maximum output frequency to the minimum output frequency.
When a speed search is performed after recovering from a momentary power loss, the search operation is delayed for the time set here.
If e.g. a contactor is used at the output side of the inverter set this parameter to the contactor delay time or more.
Speed
Search
Compensation
Gain
(speed calculation only)
Srch
Detect
Comp
Sets the gain, which is applied to the estimated speed before the motor is restarted.
0 to 3
0 to
200
0.1 to
10.0
0.0 to
20.0
1.00 to
1.20
2 *
100%
*
2.0 s
0.2 s
1.10
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
A
No
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
No
A
No
191H
192H
193H
195H
19AH
5
511
5
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register b3-14
Speed
Search
Rotating
Selection
Direction
Bidir
Search Sel
Selects the direction for the
Speed Search operation.
0: Speed Search is started using the rotation direction from the frequency reference signal
1: Speed Search is started using the rotation direction from the estimated speed during speed search.
0 or 1 1 No A A
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open Loop Vector factory settings are given.)
A No 19EH
Page
Timer Function: b4
Parameter
Number
Name
Display b4-01 b4-02
Timer function ONdelay time
Delay-ON
Timer
Timer function OFFdelay time
Delay-OFF
Timer
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Close d
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Sets the timer function output
ON-delay time (dead time) for the timer function input.
Enabled when a timer function is set in H1 and H2.
0.0 to
3000.0
Sets the timer function output
OFF-delay time (dead band) for the timer function input.
Enabled when a timer function is set in H1 and H2-
0.0 to
3000.0
0.0 s
0.0 s
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1A3H
1A4H
Page
512
PID Control: b5
Parameter
Number b5-01 b5-02 b5-03 b5-04 b5-05 b5-06 b5-07 b5-08 b5-09 b5-10 b5-11
Name
Display
Description
PID offset adjustment
PID Offset
PID delay time constant
PID Delay
Time
PID output characteristics selection
Output
Level Sel
PID output gain
Output Gain
PID reverse output selection
PID control mode selection
PID Mode
Proportional gain (P)
PID Gain
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Deviation is Dcontrolled.)
2: Enabled (Feedback value is D-controlled.)
3: PID control enabled
(frequency reference +
PID output, D control of deviation)
4: PID control enabled
(frequency reference +
PID output, D control of feedback value).
Sets P-control proportional gain.
P-control is not performed when the setting is 0.00.
Integral (I) time
PID I Time
Integral (I) limit
PID I Limit
Differential
(D) time
Sets I-control integral time.
I-control is not performed when the setting is 0.0.
Sets the I-control limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
PID D Time
PID limit
PID Limit
Sets D-control differential time
D-control is not performed when the setting is 0.00.
Sets the limit after PID-control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
Output Rev
Sel
Sets the offset after PID-control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
Sets the time constant for low pass filter for PID-control output.
Usually not necessary to set.
Selects forward/reverse direction for PID output.
0: Normal PID output
1: Reverse PID output
Sets output gain.
0: Limit to 0 when PID output is negative.
1: Reverses when PID output is negative.
Limit to 0 is also active when reverse prohibit is selected by using b1-04.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to 4
0.00
to
25.00
0.0 to
360.0
0.0 to
100.0
0.00 to
10.00
0.0 to
100.0
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.00 to
10.00
0 or 1
0.0 to
25.0
0 or 1
0
1.00
1.0 s
100.0%
0.00 s
100.0%
0.0%
0.00 s
0
1.0
0
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1A5H
1A6H
1A7H
1A8H
1A9H
1AAH
1ABH
1ACH
1ADH
1AEH
1AFH
5
513
5
Parameter
Number b5-12 b5-13 b5-14 b5-15 b5-16 b5-17 b5-18
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Selection of
PID feedback signal loss detection
Fb Los Det
Sel
0: No detection of a feedback loss.
1: Detection of a feedback loss. (feedback under detection level)
Operation continues during detection, the fault contact is not operated.
2: Detection of a feedback loss. (feedback under detection level)
The motor coasts to stop at detection, and the fault contact operates.
3: Detection of a feedback loss. (feedback over detection level)
Operation continues during detection, the fault contact is not operated.
4: Detection of a feedback loss. (feedback over detection level)
The motor coasts to stop at detection, and the fault contact operates.
0 to 4 0
PID sleep function operation level
PID Sleep
Level
PID sleep operation delay time
PID Sleep
Time
PID feedback loss detection level
Fb los Det
Lvl
PID feedback loss detection time
Fb los Det
Time
Accel/decel time for PID reference
PID Acc/
Dec Time
PID Setpoint Selection
PID Setpoint Sel
Sets the PID feedback loss detection level as a percentage using the maximum output frequency as 100%.
Sets the PID feedback loss detection time.
Sets the PID sleep function start level as a frequency.
Sets the delay time until the
PID sleep function starts.
Sets the accel/decel time for
PID reference.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 to 100 0%
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 to
150.0
*
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 to
6000.0
0 to 1
1.0 s
0.0 Hz
0.0 s
0.0 s
0
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1B0H
1B1H
1B2H
1B3H
1B4H
1B5H
1DCH
514
Parameter
Number b5-19 b5-28 b5-29 b5-31 b5-32 b5-33
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
PID Setpoint
PID Setpoint
PID Square
Root Feedback Sel
PID Fd SqRt
PID-target value
Square root
Feedback
Gain
PID Fd SqRt
Gain
PID feedback monitor selection
PID Fb Mon
Sel
Sets the gain for the PID square root feedback function.
Selects one of the inverters monitor items (U1) as
PID feedback signal. The setting number is equal to the monitor item which has to be the feedback value.
PID monitor feedback gain
PID Fb Mon
Gain
PID monitor feedback bias
PID Fb Mon
Bias
Enables/Disables the square root function for the PID feedback
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Sets the gain for the PID feedback signal.
Sets the bias for the PID feedback value
0 to
100.0%
0 or 1
0.00 to
2.00
0 to 18
0.0 to
1000.0
-100.0 to
100.0
0
0
1.00
0
100.0%
0.0%
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1DDH
1EAH
1EBH
1EDH
1EEH
1EFH
Page
* The given setting range is valid if Heavy Duty is selected (C6-01=0, default setting). If Normal Duty 1 or 2 is selected (C6-01=1 or 2) the setting range will be 0.0 to 400.0 Hz.
5
515
5
Dwell Functions: b6
Param eter
Number
Name
Display
Description b6-01 b6-02 b6-03 b6-04
Dwell frequency at stop
Dwell Ref
@ Stop
Dwell time at stop
Dwell
Time
@ Stop
Dwell frequency at start
Dwell Ref
@ Start
Dwell time at start
Dwell
Time
@ Start
Run command
Output frequency
ON
OFF b6-02 b6-01 b6-03 b6-04
Time
The dwell function can be used to hold the output frequency temporarily when driving a motor with a heavy load.
Setting
Range
0.0 to
150.0
*
0.0 to
10.0
0.0 to
150.0
*
0.0 to
10.0
Factory
Setting
Chang e during
Operation
0.0 Hz
0.0 s
0.0 Hz
0.0 s
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1B6H
1B7H
1B8H
1B9H
* The given setting range is valid if Heavy Duty is selected (C6-01=0, default setting). If Normal Duty 1 or 2 is selected (C6-01=1 or 2) the setting range will be 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
Droop Control: b7
Parameter
Number b7-01 b7-02
Name
Description
Display
Droop Control Gain
Droop
Quantity
Droop Control Delay
Time
Droop Delay
Time
Sets the Droop quantity at the rated speed and rated load as percentage of the maximum output frequency.
Sets the Droop Control delay time constant.
Increase the value if hunting occurs.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.0 to
100.0
0.03 to
2.00
0.0%
0.05 s
Yes
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
No
No
No
No
A
A
Page
1CAH
1CBH
516
Energy Saving: b8
Parameter
Number b8-01 b8-02 b8-03 b8-04 b8-05 b8-06
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Energy-saving mode selection
Energy Save
Sel
Energy-saving gain
Energy Save
Gain
Energy-saving filter time constant
Energy Save
F.T
Energy-saving coefficient
Energy Save
COEF
Select whether to enable or disable energy-saving control.
0: Disable
1: Enable
Sets the energy-saving gain for Open Loop and Closed
Loop Vector control.
Sets the energy-saving filter time constant for Open Loop and Closed Loop Vector control.
Sets the energy-saving coefficient depending on the setting in E2-11 (motor rated current).
Adjust the value in 5% steps until the output power becomes minimal.
Power detection filter time constant kW Filter
Time
Search operation voltage limiter
Search V
Limit
Sets the time constant for output power detection.
Sets the limit of the voltage control range during search operation. 100% is the monitor rated voltage.
0 or 1
0.0 to
10.0
0.00 to
10.0
0.0 to
655.00
0 to
2000
0
0.7
*1
0.50 s
*2
*3
20 ms
0 to 100 0%
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A
No
No
A
A
A
A
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
* 1. The factory setting is given for Open Loop Vector control. The Closed Loop Vector control factory setting is 1.0.
* 2. The factory setting is 2.00 s when Inverter capacity is 55 kW min.
* 3. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.
A
A
A
No
No
No
Page
1CCH
1CDH
1CEH
1CFH
1D0H
1D1H
5
517
5
Zero Servo Control: b9
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Zero Servo
Gain b9-01
Zero Servo
Gain b9-02
Zero-Servo completion bandwidth
Zero Servo
Count
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Adjust the strength of the zero-servo lock.
Enabled when the “zero-servo command” is set for a multifunction input. When the zeroservo command has been input and the frequency reference drops below DC Injection level (b2-01), a position control loop is created and the motor stops. Increasing the zero-servo gain increases the strength of the lock. Increasing it by much causes oscillations.
Sets the bandwidth of the Zero
Servo completion output.
Enabled when the “zero-servo completion (end)” is set for a multi-function output. The zero-servo completion signal is ON when the current position is within the range (the zero-servo position + zeroservo completion width.)
Set b9-02 to 4 times of the allowable displacement pulse amount at the PG.
0 to 100
0 to
16383
5
10
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
No
No
No
No
A
A
Page
1DAH
1DBH
518
Tuning Parameters: C
Acceleration/Deceleration: C1
Parameter
Number
C1-01
C1-02
C1-03
C1-04
C1-05
C1-06
C1-07
C1-08
C1-09
C1-10
C1-11
Name
Description
Display
Acceleration time 1
Accel Time 1
Deceleration time 1
Decel Time 1
Acceleration time 2
Accel Time 2
Deceleration time 2
Decel Time 2
Acceleration time 3
Accel Time 3
Deceleration time 3
Decel Time 3
Acceleration time 4
Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 Hz to the maximum output frequency.
Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum output frequency to 0 Hz.
Sets the acceleration time when the multi-function input “accel/ decel time 1” is set to ON.
Sets the deceleration time when the multi-function input “accel/ decel time 1” is set to ON.
Sets the acceleration time when the multi-function input “accel/ decel time 2” is set to ON.
Sets the deceleration time when the multi-function input “accel/ decel time 2” is set to ON.
Accel Time 4
Deceleration time 4
Decel Time 4
Sets the acceleration time when the multi-function input “accel/ decel time 1” and “accel/decel time 2” are set to ON.
Sets the deceleration time when the multi-function input “accel/ decel time 1” and “accel/decel time 2” are set to ON.
Emergency stop time
Fast Stop
Time
Accel/decel time setting unit
Acc/Dec
Units
Sets the deceleration time when the multi-function input
“Emergency (fast) stop” is set to ON.
0: 0.01-second units
1: 0.1-second units
Accel/decel time switching frequency
Acc/Dec SW
Freq
Sets the frequency for automatic acceleration/deceleration switching.
If the output frequency is below the set frequency: Accel/ decel time 4
If the output frequency is above the set frequency: Accel/decel time 1
The multi-function input
“accel/decel time 1” or “accel/ decel time 2” has priority.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.0 to
6000.0
*1
0 or 1
0.0 to
150.0
*2
10.0 s
1
0.0 Hz
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
200H
201H
202H
203H
204H
205H
206H
207H
208H
209H
20AH
Page
* 1. The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times will depends on the setting for C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the setting range for acceleration/ deceleration times becomes 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
* 2. The given setting range is valid if Heavy Duty is selected (C6-01=0, default setting). If Normal Duty 1 or 2 is selected (C6-01=1 or 2) the setting range will be 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
5
519
5
S-Curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C2
Param eter
Number
C2-01
C2-02
C2-03
Name
Display
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
SCrv Acc
@ Start
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end
SCrv Acc
@ End
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start
SCrv Dec
@ Start
C2-01
T accel
= C2-01
2
T decel
= C2-03
2
Description
When the S-curve characteristic time is set, the accel/decel times will increase by only half of the S-curve characteristic times at start and end.
Run command
ON
Output frequency
C2-02
OFF
C2-03
C2-04
Time
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
2.50
0.20 s
0.20 s
0.20 s
No
No
No
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
20BH
20CH
20DH
C2-04
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end
SCrv Dec
@ End
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 s No A A A A 20EH
Motor Slip Compensation: C3
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Slip compensation gain
C3-01
Slip Comp
Gain
Description
Used to improve speed accuracy when operating with a load.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
Adjust this parameter under the following circumstances.
• When motor speed is lower than the frequency reference increase the set value.
• When motor speed is higher than the frequency reference decrease the set value.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.0 to
2.5
1.0* Yes
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A No A No 20FH
520
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Description
C3-02
Slip compensation delay time
Slip Comp
Time
C3-05
Output voltage limit operation selection
V/f Slip
Comp Sel
Sets the Slip Compensation delay time.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
Adjust this parameter under the following circumstances.
• Reduce the setting when
Slip Compensation responsiveness is low.
• When speed is not stable, increase the setting.
C3-03
C3-04
Slip compensation limit
Slip Comp
Limit
Slip compensation selection during regeneration
Slip Comp
Regen
Sets the slip compensation limit as a percentage of motor rated slip.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When the slip compensation during regeneration function has been activated and regeneration capacity increases momentarily, it might be necessary to use a braking option
(braking resistor, braking resistor unit or braking unit.)
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled. (The motor flux will be lowered automatically when the output voltage become saturated.)
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to
10000
0 to
250
0 or 1
0 or 1
200 ms
*
200%
0
0
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
A
210H
211H
212H
213H
Page
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (The Open Loop Vector control factory settings are given.)
5
521
5
Torque Compensation: C4
Parameter
Number
C4-01
C4-02
C4-03
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Display
Torque compensation gain
Torq Comp
Gain
Torque compensation delay time constant
Torq Comp
Time
Sets the torque compensation gain.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
Adjust it under the following circumstances:
• When the cable is long increase the set value.
• When the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity (Max. applicable motor capacity), increase the set values.
• When the motor is oscillating, decrease the set values.
Adjust the torque compensation gain so that at minimum speed the output current does not exceed the Inverter rated output current.
Do not alter the torque compensation gain from its default
(1.00) when using Open Loop
Vector control.
The torque compensation delay time is set in ms units.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
Adjust it under the following circumstances:
• When the motor is oscillating, increase the set values.
• When the responsiveness of the motor is low, decrease the set values.
Starting torque compensation
(FWD)
Sets the torque compensation value at start in FWD direction
FTorqCmp
@ Start
0.00 to
2.50
0 to
10000
0.0 to
200.0%
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1.00
20 ms
*
0.0%
Yes
No
No
A
A
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A
A
No
A
A
A
No
No
No
215H
216H
217H
C4-04
Starting torque compensation
(REV)
RTorqCmp
@ Start
Sets the torque compensation value at start in REV direction
-200.0 to 0.0%
C4-05
Starting torque compensation time constant
TorqCmp-
DelayT
Sets starting torque start-up time.
When 0 ~ 4 ms is set, it is operated without filter.
0 to 200
0.0%
10 ms
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
No
No
218H
219H
Page
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open Loop Vector control factory settings are given.)
522
Speed Control (ASR): C5
Param eter
Number
C5-01
C5-02
C5-03
C5-04
C5-05
C5-06
C5-07
C5-08
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
ASR proportional
(P) gain 2
ASR P
Gain 2
ASR integral (I) time 2
ASR I
Time 2
ASR proportional
(P) gain 1
ASR P
Gain 1
ASR integral (I) time 1
ASR I
Time 1
Sets the proportional gain of the speed loop (ASR)
Sets the integral time of the speed loop (ASR).
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
P,I
0 E1-04
P = C5-01
I = C5-02
P = C5-03
I = C5-04
Motor speed (Hz)
ASR limit Sets the upper limit for the compensation frequency for the speed con-
ASR Limit trol loop (ASR) as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
ASR delay time
ASR
Delay
Time
Sets the filter time constant; the time from the speed loop to the torque command output. Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
ASR switching frequency
ASR Gain
SW Freq
Sets the frequency for switching between Proportion Gain 1, 2 and
Integral Time 1, 2.
ASR integral (I) limit
ASR I
Limit
Set the parameter to a small value to prevent any radical load change. A setting of 100% is equal to the maximum output frequency.
0.00 to
300.00
*1
0.000 to
10.000
0.00 to
300.00
*1
0.000 to
10.000
0.0 to
20.0
0.000 to
0.500
0.0 to
150.0
*3
0 to
400
20.00
*2
0.500 s
*2
20.00
*2
0.500 s
*2
5.0%
0.004
ms
0.0 Hz
400%
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
No No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
Page
21BH
21CH
21DH
21EH
21FH
220H
221H
222H
* 1. The setting range is 1.00 to 300.00 if Closed Loop Vector control is used.
* 2. When the control method is changed, these values are reset to factory settings for the selected control mode. (The Closed Loop Vector control factory settings are given)
* 3. The given setting range is valid if Heavy Duty is selected (C6-01=0, default setting). If Normal Duty 1 or 2 is selected (C6-01=1 or 2) the setting range will be 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
5
523
5
Carrier Frequency: C6
Param eter
Number
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
C6-01
C6-02
C6-03
C6-04
C6-05
Carrier frequency upper limit
Carrier
Freq Max
Carrier frequency lower limit
Carrier
Freq Gain
Carrier frequency proportional gain
Heavy/
Normal
Duty selection
Heavy/
Normal
Duty
Carrier frequency selection
Carrier
Freq Sel
0: Heavy Duty
1: Normal Duty 1
2: Normal Duty 2
Selects the carrier frequency.
Select F to enable detailed settings using parameters C6-03 to C6-05.
0: Low carrier, low noise
1: 2 kHz
2: 5 kHz
3: 8 kHz
4: 10 kHz
5: 12.5 kHz
6: 15 kHz
F: User setting
Sets the carrier frequency upper limit and lower limit in kHz units.
The carrier frequency gain is set as follows:
In the Open Loop and Closed Loop
Vector control, the upper limit of the carrier frequency is fixed with C6-
03.
Carrier frequency
Output frequency x (C6-05) x
Output frequency
(Max. output frequency)
0 to 2
0 to F
2.0 to
15.0
*1 *2
0.4 to
15.0
*1 *2
00 to
99
*2
Carrier
Freq Sel
K is a coefficient that depends on the setting of C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K = 2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 1
Factory
Setting
0
1
2.0 kHz
2.0 kHz
00
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
Q
Q
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
No
No
Q
Q
A
No
No
223H
224H
225H
226H
227H
* 1. The setting range depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
* 2. This parameter can be monitored or set only when 1 is set for C6-01 and F is set for C6-02.
524
Reference Parameters: d
Preset Reference: d1
Parameter
Number d1-01 d1-02
Name
Display
Frequency reference 1
Reference 1
Frequency reference 2 d1-03 d1-04 d1-05 d1-06 d1-07 d1-08 d1-09 d1-10 d1-11
Reference 2
Frequency reference 3
Reference 3
Frequency reference 4
Reference 4
Frequency reference 5
Reference 5
Frequency reference 6
Reference 6
Frequency reference 7
Reference 7
Frequency reference 8
Reference 8
Frequency reference 9
Reference 9
Frequency reference 10
Reference
10
Frequency reference 11
Reference
11
Description
Sets the frequency reference.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed command 1 is ON for a multifunction input.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed command 2 is ON for a multifunction input.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 1 and 2 are ON for multi-function inputs.
Sets the frequency when multi-step speed command 3 is ON for a multi-function input.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 1 and 3 are ON for multi-function inputs.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 2 and 3 are ON for multi-function inputs.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 1, 2, and 3 are ON for multi-function inputs.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed command 4 is ON for a multifunction input.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 1 and 4 are ON for multi-function inputs.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 2 and 4 are ON for a multi-function inputs.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0.00 Hz Yes Q Q Q Q 280H
0.00 Hz Yes
0.00 Hz Yes
0.00 Hz Yes
0.00 Hz Yes
0 to
50.00
*1*2
0.00 Hz Yes
0.00 Hz Yes
0.00 Hz Yes
0.00 Hz Yes
0.00 Hz Yes
0.00 Hz Yes
Q
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
281H
282H
283H
284H
285H
286H
287H
288H
28BH
28CH
5
525
5
Parameter
Number d1-12 d1-13 d1-14 d1-15 d1-16 d1-17
Name
Display
Frequency reference 12
Reference
12
Frequency reference 13
Reference
13
Frequency reference 14
Reference
14
Frequency reference 15
Reference
15
Frequency reference 16
Reference
16
Jog frequency reference
Jog Reference
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 1, 2, and 4 are ON for multi-function inputs.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 3 and 4 are ON for multi-function inputs.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 1, 3, and 4 are ON for multi-function inputs.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 2, 3, and 4 are ON for multi-function inputs.
Sets the frequency reference when multi-step speed commands 1, 2, 3, and 4 are ON for multi-function inputs.
Sets the frequency reference when the jog frequency reference selection, FJOG command, or RJOG command is
ON.
Description
Setting
Range
0 to
50.00
*1*2
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
6.00 Hz
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
V/f
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
Q
28DH
28EH
28FH
290H
291H
292H
Page
* 1. The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor, default: 0.01 Hz). If the display unit is changed, the setting range values also change
* 2. The maximum setting value depends on the setting of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Reference Limits: d2
Parameter
Number d2-01 d2-02 d2-03
Name
Display
Frequency reference upper limit
Ref Upper
Limit
Frequency reference lower limit
Ref Lower
Limit
Master speed reference lower limit
Ref1 Lower
Limit
Description
Sets the frequency reference upper limit as a percentage of the max. output frequency.
Sets the frequency reference lower limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
Sets the master speed reference lower limit as a percentage of the max. output frequency.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.0 to
110.0
100.0%
0.0 to
110.0
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
0.0%
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
289H
28AH
293H
526
Jump Frequencies: d3
Parameter
Number d3-01 d3-02 d3-03 d3-04
Name
Description
Display
Jump frequency 1
Jump Freq 1
Jump frequency 2
Jump Freq 2
Jump frequency 3
Jump Freq 3
Jump frequency width
Jump
Bandwidth
Set the center values of the jump frequencies in Hz.
This function is disabled when the jump frequency is set to 0
Hz. Always ensure that the following applies: d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03
Operation in the jump frequency range is prohibited but during acceleration and deceleration, the speed changes smoothly without jumping
Sets the jump frequency bandwidth in Hz.
The jump frequency range will be the jump frequency ± d3-04.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.0 to
150.0
*
0.0 to
20.0
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
1.0 Hz
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
294H
295H
296H
297H
* The given setting range is valid if Heavy Duty is selected (C6-01=0, default setting). If Normal Duty 1 or 2 is selected (C6-01=1 or 2) the setting range will be 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
Reference Frequency Hold: d4
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Frequency reference hold function selection d4-01 d4-02
MOP Ref
Memory
+ – Speed limits
Trim Control Lvl
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Sets whether the frequency reference value on hold or power loss will be recorded or not.
0: Disabled (when operation is stopped or the power is turned on again the frequency reference is set to
0.)
1: Enabled (when operation is stopped or the power is turned on again the inverter starts at the previous hold frequency.)
This function is available when the multi-function inputs “Accel/Decel Ramp
Hold” or “Up/Down” commands are set.
Sets the frequency to be add to or subtracted from the analog frequency reference as a percentage of the max. output frequency.
Enabled when the increase (+) speed command or decrease
(–) speed command is set for a multi-function input.
0 or 1 0
0 to 100 10%
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
298H
299H
5
527
5
Torque Control: d5
Parameter
Number d5-01 d5-02 d5-03 d5-04 d5-05 d5-06
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Torque control selection
Torq Control
Sel
Torque reference delay time
Torq Ref
Filter
Speed limit selection
Speed Limit
Sel
Speed limit
Speed Lmt
Value
Speed limit bias
Speed Lmt
Bias
Speed/ torque control switching timer
Ref Hold
Time
0: Speed control (C5-01 to
C5-07)
1: Torque control
This function is available in
Closed Loop Vector control mode only. To use the function for switching between speed and torque control, set d5-01 to 0 and set the multifunction input to “speed/ torque control change.”
Sets the torque reference delay time.
It can be used to prevent oscillations caused by signal noise or to increase or decrease the responsiveness.
When oscillation occurs during torque control, increase the set value.
Sets the speed limit reference source for the torque control mode.
1: The analog input limit from a frequency reference
2: Limited by d5-04 parameter setting values.
Sets the speed limit during torque control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
This function is enabled when d5-03 is set to 2. Directions are as follows.
+: run command direction
-: run command opposite
direction
Sets the speed limit bias as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
The bias is applied to the specified speed limit. It can be used to adjust the margin for the speed limit.
Sets the delay time from inputting a “speed/torque control change” (Digital input from On to OFF or OFF to
ON) until the control is actually changed.
This function is enabled when the multi-function input
“speed/torque control change” is set. The analog inputs values are hold from the point, when the “speed/torque control change” is activated.
0 or 1
0 to
1000
1 or 2
-120 to
+120
0 to
1000
0
0 ms
1
0%
0 to 120 10%
0 ms
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
Page
29AH
29BH
29CH
29DH
29EH
29FH
528
Field Weakening: d6
Parameter
Number d6-01 d6-02 d6-03
Name
Display
Field weakening level
Field-Weak
Lvl
Field weakening frequency limit
Field-Weak
Freq
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Sets the inverter output voltage when the field weakening command is input at a digital input.
Sets the voltage level as a percentage taking the voltage set by the V/f pattern as 100%.
Sets the lower limit of the frequency range where field control is valid.
The field weakening command is accepted only at frequencies above this setting and only when the speed is in agreement with the current speed reference.
0 to 100 80%
0.0 to
150.0
*
0.0 Hz
No
No
Field forcing function selection
Field Force
Sel
Enables or disables field forcing function.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 or 1 0 No d6-06
Field forcing function
Limit
FieldForce
Limit
Sets the upper limit for the excitation current applied by the field forcing function.
A setting of 100% is equal to the motor no-load current.
Field forcing is active during all types of operation except
DC Injection.
100 to
400
400% No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A
A
No
No
A
A
No
No
No
No
No
A
No
No
A
A
Page
2A0H
2A1H
2A2H
2A5H
* The given setting range is valid if Heavy Duty is selected (C6-01=0, default setting). If Normal Duty 1 or 2 is selected (C6-01=1 or 2) the setting range will be 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
5
529
5
Motor Parameters: E
V/f Pattern: E1
Param eter
Number
E1-01
E1-03
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Min. output frequency
(FMIN)
Min Frequency
Min. output frequency voltage
(VMIN)
Min Voltage
Mid. output frequency
(FB)
Mid Frequency A
Mid. output frequency voltage
(VB)
Mid Voltage A
Max. output voltage
(VMAX)
Max Voltage
Base frequency
(FA)
Base Frequency
Input voltage setting Sets the Inverter input voltage.
This setting is used as a reference
Input value for protection functions.
Voltage
V/f pattern selection
V/f
Selection
0 to E: Select from the 15 preset
F: patterns.
Custom user-set pattern
(Applicable for setting of
E1-04 to E1-10.)
Max. output frequency
(FMAX)
Max Frequency
Output Voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
To set V/f characteristics in a straight line, set the same values for E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the setting for E1-08 will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-
07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
155 to
255
*1
0 to F
40.0 to
150.0
*2
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 to
150.0
*2
0.0 to
150.0
*2
0.0 to
255
*1
0.0 to
150.0
*2
0.0 to
255.0
*1
200 V
*1
F
50.0
Hz
200.0
V
*1
50.0
Hz
3.0 Hz
*3
13.2 V
*1 *3
0.5 Hz
*3
2.4 V
*1 *3
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
A
Q
A
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
A
Q
A
Q
No
Q
Q
Q
A
A
Q
A
Q
No
Q
Q
Q
No
No
A
No
300H
302H
303H
304H
305H
306H
307H
309H
308H
530
Param eter
Number
E1-11
E1-12
E1-13
Name
Display
Mid. output frequency 2
Mid Frequency B
Mid. output frequency voltage 2
Mid Voltage B
Base voltage
(VBASE)
Base Voltage
Description
Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the output range. Normally, this setting is not required.
E1-11 must be set higher than E1-04.
Sets the output voltage of the base frequency (E1-06).
Setting
Range
0.0 to
150.0
*2
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 to
255.0
*1
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.0 Hz
*4
0.0 V
*4
0.0 V
*5
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
30AH
30BH
30CH
Page
* 1. These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
* 2. The given setting range is valid if Heavy Duty is selected (C6-01=0, default setting). If Normal Duty 1 or 2 is selected (C6-01=1 or 2) the setting range will be 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
* 3. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (The Open Loop Vector Control factory settings are given.)
* 4. E1-11 and E1-12 are disregarded when set to 0.0.
* 5. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
Motor Setup: E2
Parameter
Number
E2-01
E2-02
E2-03
E2-04
E2-05
E2-06
Name
Description
Display
Motor rated current
Motor Rated
FLA
Motor rated slip
Motor Rated
Slip
Sets the motor rated current.
This set value will become the reference value for motor protection and torque limits.
This parameter is an input data for autotuning.
Sets the motor rated slip.
This set value will become the reference value for the slip compensation.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Motor noload current
No-Load
Current
Number of motor poles
Number of
Poles
Motor lineto-line resistance
Term Resistance
Sets the motor no-load current.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Sets the number of motor poles.
This value is an input data for autotuning.
Sets the motor phase-to-phase resistance.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Motor leak inductance
Leak Inductance
Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of the motor rated voltage.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.32 to
6.40
*1
0.0 to
40.0
1.90 A
*2
0.00 to
20.00
2.90 Hz
*2
0.00 to
1.89
*3
2 to 48 4 poles
0.000
to
65.000
1.20 A
*2
9.842
*2
Ω
18.2%
*2
No
No
No
No
No
No
Q
A
A
No
A
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Q
A
A
Q
A
No
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
30EH
Page
30FH
310H
311H
312H
313H
5
531
5
Parameter
Number
E2-07
E2-08
E2-09
Display
Motor iron saturation coefficient 1
Saturation
Comp1
Motor iron saturation coefficient 2
Saturation
Comp2
Motor mechanical losses
Mechanical loss
Name
Description
Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 50% of magnetic flux.
This parameter is automatically set during rotating autotuning.
Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 75% of magnetic flux.
This parameter is automatically set during rotating autotuning.
Sets the motor mechanical losses as a percentage of motor rated output.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
Adjust the value under the following the torque loss is large due e.g. to heavy friction in the machine.
The set mechanical loss will be compensated.
Setting
Range
0.00 to
0.50
0.50 to
0.75
0.0 to
10.0
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.50
0.75
0.0%
No
No
No
V/f
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
No
No
No
A
A
No
A
A
A
E2-10
E2-11
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
Tcomp Iron
Loss
Motor rated output power
Mtr Rated
Power
Sets motor iron losses.
Sets the rated output power of the motor.
This parameter is an input data for autotuning.
0 to
65535
0.00 to
650.00
14 W
*2
0.40
*2
No
No
A
Q
A
Q
No
Q
No
Q
* 1. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The value for a 200 V class inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 3. The setting range depends on the inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
314H
315H
316H
317H
318H
Page
532
Motor 2 V/f Pattern: E3
Param eter
Number
E3-01
E3-02
E3-03
E3-04
E3-05
E3-06
E3-07
E3-08
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Motor 2 min. output frequency
(FMIN)
Min
Frequency
Motor 2 min. output frequency voltage
(VMIN)
Min
Voltage
Motor 2 mid. output frequency 1
(FB)
Mid
Frequency
Motor 2 mid. output frequency voltage 1
(VB)
Mid
Voltage
Motor 2 control method selection
Control
Method
Motor 2 max. output frequency
(FMAX)
Max
Frequency
Motor 2 max. output voltage
(VMAX)
Max
Voltage
Motor 2 max. voltage frequency
(FA)
Base
Frequency
0: V/f control
1: V/f control with PG
2: Open Loop Vector control
3: Closed Loop Vector Control
Output voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
To set V/f characteristics in a straight line, set the same values for E3-05 and E3-07.
In this case, the setting for E3-06 will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner:
E3-02 (FMAX) ≥ E3-04 (FA) > E3-
05 (FB) > E3-07 (FMIN)
0 to 3
40.0 to
150.0
*1
0.0 to
255.0
*2
0.0 to
150.0
*1
0.0 to
150.0
*1
0.0 to
255.0
*2
0.0 to
150.0
*1
0.0 to
255.0
*2
0
50.0
Hz
200.0
V
*2
50.0
Hz
2.5 Hz
*3
15.0 V
*2*3
1.2 Hz
*3
9.0 V
*2*3
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
A
No
319H
31AH
31BH
31CH
31DH
31EH
31FH
320H
Page
* 1. The given setting range is valid if Heavy Duty is selected (C6-01=0, default setting). If Normal Duty 1 or 2 is selected (C6-01=1 or 2) the setting range will be 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
* 2. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double.
* 3. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
5
533
5
Motor 2 Setup: E4
Parameter
Number
E4-01
E4-02
E4-03
E4-04
E4-05
E4-06
E4-07
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Motor 2 rated current
Motor Rated
FLA
Motor 2 rated slip
Motor Rated
Slip
Sets the motor rated current.
This set value will become a reference value for motor protection and torque limits.
This parameter is an input data for autotuning.
Sets the motor rated slip.
This set value will become a reference value for slip compensation.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Motor 2 noload current
No-Load
Current
Motor 2 number of poles (number of poles)
Number of
Poles
Motor 2 line-to-line resistance
Mid
Frequency
Motor 2 leak inductance
Leak Inductance
Sets the motor no-load current.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Sets the number of motor poles.
This value is an input data for autotuning.
Sets the motor phase-to-phase resistance in Ω units.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of the motor rated voltage.
This parameter is automatically set during autotuning.
Motor 2 rated capacity
Mtr Rated
Power
Sets the rated output of the motor in units of 0.01 kW.
This parameter is an input data for autotuning.
0.32
to 6.40
*1
0.00 to
20.00
0.00 to
1.89
*3
2 to 48
0.000 to
65.000
0.0 to
40.0
0.40 to
650.00
1.90 A
*2
2.90 Hz
*2
1.20 A
*2
4 poles
9.842
*2
18.2%
*2
0.40
*2
Ω
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A
A
A
No
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
* 1. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The values for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 3. The setting range will depend upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
321H
Page
322H
323H
324H
325H
326H
327H
534
Option Parameters: F
PG Option Setup: F1
Parameter
Number
F1-01
F1-02
F1-03
F1-04
F1-05
Name
Description
Display
PG constant
PG Pulses/
Rev
Operation selection at
PG open circuit (PGO)
PG Fdbk
Loss Sel
Operation selection at overspeed
(OS)
PG Overspeed Sel
Sets the number of PG pulses per revolution
Sets the PG disconnection stopping method.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time 1,
C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To protect the motor or machinery, avoid to use this setting.)
Sets the stopping method when an overspeed (OS) fault occurs.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time 1,
C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To protect the motor or machinery, avoid to use this setting.)
Operation selection at deviation
PG
Deviation
Sel
Sets the stopping method when a speed deviation (DEV) fault occurs.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time 1,
C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (DEV is displayed and operation continued.)
PG rotation 0: Phase A leads with forward run command.
(Phase B leads with reverse run command,
PG Rotation
Sel
C.C.W.)
1: Phase B leads with forward run command.
(Phase A leads with reverse run command,
C.W.)
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to
60000
0 to 3
0 to 3
0 to 3
0 or 1
1024
1
1
3
0
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
Q
A
A
A
A
Q
No
No
No
A
Q
A
A
A
A
380H
381H
382H
383H
384H
5
535
5
Parameter
Number
F1-06
F1-07
F1-08
F1-09
F1-10
F1-11
F1-12
F1-13
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Overspeed detection level
PG Overspd
Level
Overspeed detection delay time
PG Overspd
Time
Excessive speed deviation detection level
PG Deviate
Level
Excessive speed deviation detection delay time
PG Deviate
Time
Number of
PG gear teeth 1
PG # Gear
Teeth 1
Number of
PG gear teeth 2
PG # Gear
Teeth 1
PG division rate (PG pulse monitor)
PG Output
Ratio
Integral value during accel/decel enable/disable
PG Ramp
PI/I Sel
Sets the division ratio for the
PG speed control card pulse output.
Division ratio = (1+ n) /m
(n=0 or 1 m=1 to 32)
The first digit of the value of
F1-06 stands for n, the second and the third stands for m.
This parameter is effective only when a PG-B2 is used.
The possible division ratio settings are: 1/32 ≤ F1-06
≤ 1.
Enables or disables integral control during acceleration/ deceleration.
0: Disabled (The integral function isn't used while acceleration or deceleration; it is used at constant speeds only.)
1: Enabled (The integral function is always used.)
1 to 132
0 or 1
Sets the overspeed detection method.
Motor speeds that continue to exceed the value set in F1-08
(set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency) for the time set in F1-09 are detected as overspeed faults.
Sets the speed deviation detection method.
Any speed deviation above the
F1-10 set level (set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency) that continues for the time set in F1-11 is detected as a speed deviation.
The speed deviation is the difference between actual motor speed and the speed reference command.
Sets the number of teeth on the gears if there are gears between the PG and the motor.
PG Input Pulses x 60
F1-01 x
F1-13
F1-12
A gear ratio of 1 will be used if one of these parameters is set to 0.
0 to 120
0.0 to
2.0
0 to 50
0.0 to
10.0
0 to
1000
1
0
115%
0.0 s
10%
0.5 s
0
0
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
No
A
A
A
A
No
No
385H
386H
387H
388H
389H
38AH
38BH
38CH
536
Parameter
Number
F1-14
Name
Description
Display
PG open-circuit detection delay time
PGO Detect
Time
Used to set the PG disconnection detection time. PGO will be detected if the detection time exceeds the set time.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.0 to
10.0
2.0 s No No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A No A 38DH
Analog Reference Card: F2
Name
Parameter
Number
Display
Description
F2-01
Bi-polar or uni-polar input selection
AI-14 Input
Sel
If an AI-14B analog reference card is used this parameter sets the functions for the input channels 1 to 3.
0: 2-channel individual, the
AI-14B input channels replace the analog input terminals A1 to A2 of the inverter (Channel 1: terminal A1, Channel 2: terminal
A2). Channel 3 is not used.
1: 3-channel addition (Addition values are the frequency reference)
When b1-01 is set to 1 and
F2-01 is set to 0, the digital input function “Option/Inverter selection” can’t be used.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 or 1 0 No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
A A A A 38FH
5
537
5
Digital Reference Card: F3
Name
Parameter
Number
F3-01
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Digital input option
DI Input
Sets the Digital Reference
Card input method.
0: BCD 1% unit
1: BCD 0.1% unit
2: BCD 0.01% unit
3: BCD 1 Hz unit
4: BCD 0.1 Hz unit
5: BCD 0.01 Hz unit
6: BCD special setting (5digit input)
7: Binary input
6 is effective only, when the
DI-16H2 is used.
When o1-03 is set to 2 or higher, the input will be BCD, and the units will change to the o1-03 setting.
0 to 7 0 No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
A A A A 390H
Analog Output Option Card Setup: F4
Parameter
Number
F4-01
F4-02
F4-03
F4-04
F4-05
F4-06
Name
Channel 1
Monitor
Selection
Channel 1
Gain
Channel 2
Monitor
Selection
Channel 2
Gain
CH1 Output
Bias
CH2 Output
Bias
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
This function is enabled when the analog monitor card is used.
1 to 38 2 No
0.0 to
100.0
100.0% Yes Monitor selection: Sets the number of the monitor item to be output. (Numerical portion
of U1)
4, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 25, 28,
35, 39 and 40 cannot be set.
1 to 38 3 No
Gain: Sets the percentage of the monitor item, which is equal to 10V output.
0.0 to
100.0
–110.0 to
110.0
50.0%
0.0%
Yes
Yes
Bias: Sets the percentage of the monitor item, which is equal to 0V output.
–110.0 to
110.0
0.0% Yes
V/f
A
A
A
A
A
A
F4-07
Analog Output Signal
Level CH1
Selects the analog output signal level for channel 1 (effective for the AO-12 option card only).
0, 1 0 No A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEM
OBUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
391H
392H
393H
394H
395H
396H
397H
F4-08
Analog Output Signal
Level CH2
0:0 to 10V
1:-10 to +10
Using an AO-08 option card the possible outputs signal is 0 to +10V only. The setting of
F4-07 and F4-08 has no effect.
0, 1 0 No A A A A 398H
538
Digital Output Option Card Setup: F5
Parameter
Number
Name Description
Setting
Range
F5-01
F5-02
F5-03
F5-04
F5-05
F5-06
F5-07
F5-08
F5-09
Channel 1
Output
Selection
Channel 2
Output
Selection
Channel 3
Output
Selection
Channel 4
Output
Selection
Channel 5
Output
Selection
Channel 6
Output
Selection
Channel 7
Output
Selection
Channel 8
Output
Selection
DO-08 Output Mode
Selection
Selects the desired multi-function output for channel 1.
This function is enabled when a digital output card (DO-02 or
DO-08) is used.
Selects the desired multi-function output for channel 2.
This function is enabled when a digital output card (DO-02 or
DO-08) is used.
Selects the desired multi-function output for channel 3.
This function is enabled when a digital output card (DO-02 or
DO-08) is used.
Selects the desired multi-function output for channel 4.
This function is enabled when a digital output card (DO-02 or
DO-08) is used.
Selects the desired multi-function output for channel 5.
This function is enabled when a digital output card (DO-02 or
DO-08) is used.
Selects the desired multi-function output for channel 6.
This function is enabled when a digital output card (DO-02 or
DO-08) is used.
Selects the desired multi-function output for channel 7.
This function is enabled when a digital output card (DO-02 or
DO-08) is used.
Selects the desired multi-function output for channel 8.
This function is enabled when a digital output card (DO-02 or
DO-08) is used.
Sets the output mode.
This function is enabled when the digital output card (DO-08) is used.
0:8-Channel Individual Outputs
1:Binary Code Output
2:Outputs according to F5-01 to
08 settings.
00 to 38
00 to 38
0 to 38
0 to 38
0 to 38
0 to 38
0 to 38
0 to 38
0 to 2
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0
1
2
4
6
37
0F
0F
0
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
399H
39AH
39BH
39CH
39DH
39EH
39FH
3A0H
3A1H
5
539
5
Serial Communications Settings: F6
Parameter
Number
F6-01
F6-02
F6-03
F6-04
F6-05
F6-06
Name
Description
Display
Operation selection after communications error
Comm Bus
Flt Sel
Sets the stopping method for communications errors.
0: Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time in
C1-02
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09
3: Continue operation
Input level of external error from
Communications Option
Card
EF0 Fault
Detection
Stopping method for external error from
Communications Option
Card
EF0 Fault
Action
Trace sampling from
Communications Option
Card
Trace Sample Tim
Current monitor unit selection
Current Unit
Sel
Torque reference/ torque limit selection from communications option card
Torque Ref/
Lmt Sel
0: Always detect
1: Detect during operation
0: Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time in
C1-02
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09
3: Continue operation
-
Sets the unit of current monitor
0: Ampere
1: 100%/8192
0: Torque reference/torque limit by communications option disabled.
1: Torque reference/torque limit by communications option enabled.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to 3
0 or 1
0 to 3
0 to
60000
0 or 1
0 or 1
1
0
1
0
0
0
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
3A2H
3A3H
3A4H
3A5H
3A6H
3A7H
Page
-
-
-
-
-
-
540
Terminal Function Parameters: H
Multi-function Digital Inputs: H1
Parameter
Number
H1-01
H1-02
H1-03
H1-04
H1-05
Name
Display
Description
Terminal S3 function selection
Terminal S3
Sel
Multi-function input 1
Terminal S4 function selection
Terminal S3
Sel
Multi-function input 2
Terminal S5 function selection
Terminal S3
Sel
Multi-function input 3
Terminal S6 function selection
Terminal S3
Sel
Multi-function input 4
Terminal S7 function selection
Terminal S3
Sel
Multi-function input 5
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to 78
0 to 78
24
14
0 to 78 3 (0)
*
0 to 78 4 (3) *
0 to 78 6 (4) *
* The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3-wire sequence.
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
400H
401H
402H
403H
404H
-
-
-
-
-
Multi-function Digital Input Functions
Setting
Value
0
1
2
Function
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Page
3
6
7
4
5
8
9
A
B
C
3-wire sequence (Forward/Reverse Run command)
Local/Remote selection (ON: Operator, OFF: Parameter b1-01/b1-02 setting)
Operation Source Option Card/Inverter (OFF: Option Card, ON: b1-01/b1-02)
Multi-step speed reference 1
If H3-09 is set to 2, this function is combined with the master/auxiliary speed switch.
Multi-step speed reference 2
Multi-step speed reference 3
Jog frequency command (higher priority than multi-step speed reference)
Accel/decel time selection 1
External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON)
External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF)
Acceleration/deceleration ramp hold (ON: Acceleration/deceleration stopped, frequency is hold)
OH2 alarm signal input (ON: OH2 will be displayed)
Multi-function analog input A2 disable/enable (ON: Enable)
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
5
541
5
542
12
13
14
10
11
E
F
60
61
62
63
64
31
32
34
35
71
72
77
78
67
68
69
6A
Setting
Value
D
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
20 to 2F
30
65
66
Function
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
V/f control with/without PG (ON: Speed feedback control disabled,) (normal V/f control)
Speed control integral disable (ON: Integral control disabled)
Not used (Set when a terminal is not used)
Up command (Always set with the Down command)
Down command (Always set with the Up command)
FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17)
RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17)
No Yes No
No
-
Yes
-
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
No
-
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Fault reset (Reset when turned ON)
Emergency stop. (NO: Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1-09 when
ON.)
Motor switch command (Motor 2 selection)
Emergency stop (NC: Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1-09 when
OFF)
Timer function input (Functions are set in b4-01 and b4-02 and the timer function outputs are set in H2.)
PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled)
Accel/Decel time 2
Parameters write enable (ON: All parameters can be written-in. OFF: All parameters are write protected.)
Trim control increase (ON: d4-02 frequency is added to analog frequency reference.)
Trim control decrease (ON: d4-02 frequency is subtracted from analog frequency reference.)
Analog frequency reference sample/hold
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes Yes
External fault
Input mode: NO contact/NC contact, Detection mode: Normal/during operation
PID control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when stopped during PID control)
PID control integral hold (ON: Hold)
Multi-step speed command 4
PID soft starter disable
PID input characteristics switch
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
DC injection braking command (ON: Performs DC injection braking)
External search command 1 (ON: Speed search from maximum output frequency)
Yes Yes Yes
Yes No Yes
External search command 2 (ON: Speed search from set frequency) Yes No
Field weakening command (ON: Field weakening control set for d6-01 and d6-02) Yes Yes
Yes
No
Yes Yes Yes External speed search command 3
Kinetic energy buffering (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NC contact)
Yes Yes Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Page
-
Kinetic energy buffering (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact)
Communications test mode
High-slip braking (HSB)
Jog Frequency 2
Drive enable (NC, ON: Drive enabled, OFF: Drive disabled)
Speed/torque control change (ON: Torque control)
Zero-servo command (ON: Zero-servo)
Speed control (ASR) gain switching (ON: C5-03)
Polarity reversing command for external torque reference
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes No
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Multi-function Contact Outputs: H2
Parameter
Number
H2-01
H2-02
H2-03
Name
Display
Terminal
M1-M2 function selection
Term
M1-M2 Sel
Terminal
M3-M4 function selection
Term
M3-M4 Sel
Terminal
M5-M6 function selection
Term
M5-M6 Sel
Description
Multi-function contact output 1
Multi-function contact output 2
Multi-function contact output 3
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to 38
0 to 38
0 to 38
0
1
2
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
40BH
40CH
40DH
-
-
-
Multi-function Contact Output Functions
5
F
10
11
12
13
543
5
16
1B
1C
1D
1E
17
18
19
1A
1F
20
30
31
32
33
37
38
Setting
Value
15
Function
Frequency detection 3 (ON: Output frequency ≤ -L4-03, detection width L4-04 is used)
Frequency detection 4 (ON: Output frequency ≥ -L4-03, detection width L4-04 is used)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact, OFF: Torque detection)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO (NO Contact, ON: Torque detection)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC (NC Contact, OFF: Torque detection)
During reverse run (ON: During reverse run)
During baseblock 2 (OFF: During baseblock)
Motor selection (ON: Motor 2 selected)
During regenerative operation
Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled)
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)
Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm (ON: Temperature exceeds L8-02 setting)
During torque limit (current limit) (ON: During torque limit)
During speed limit
Activated if the speed control circuit (ASR) is operating for torque control. The
ASR output becomes the torque reference. The motor is rotating at the speed limit.
Zero-servo end (ON: Zero-Servo completed)
During run 2 (ON: Frequency output, OFF: Base block, DC injection braking, initial excitation, operation stop)
Drive enabled
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Page
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
No No
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
No No
No No
No No
No
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
544
Analog Inputs: H3
Parameter
Number
H3-01
H3-02
H3-03
H3-08
H3-09
Name
Display
Description
Multi-function analog input terminal A1 signal level selection
Term A1
Signal
Gain (terminal A1)
Terminal A1
Gain
Bias (terminal A1)
Terminal A1
Bias
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 signal level selection
Term A2
Signal
Sets the analog input A1 signal level.
0: 0 to +10V (11 bit)
1: –10V to +10V (11 bit plus sign)
Sets the frequency as a percentage of the maximum output frequency, when 10 V is input.
Sets the frequency as a percentage of the maximum frequency, when 0 V is input.
Sets the analog input A2 signal level.
0: 0 to +10V (11 bit).
1: –10V to +10V (11 bit plus sign).
2: 4 to 20 mA (9-bit input).
Switch current and voltage input using the switch S1 on the control terminal board.
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection
Terminal A2
Sel
Selects the multi-function analog input function for terminal
A2. Refer to the table below.
If H3-13 is set to 1, H3-09 selects the function for analog input A1.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 or 1
0.0 to
1000.0
-100.0
to
+100.0
0 to 2
0 to 1F
0
100.0%
0.0%
2
0
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
H3-10
Gain (terminal A2)
Terminal A2
Gain
Sets the input level when terminal A2 input is 10 V (20 mA) according to the 100% value of the function set in parameter H3-09.
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0% Yes
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
410H
411H
412H
417H
418H
419H
H3-11
Bias (terminal A2)
Terminal A2
Bias
Sets the input level when terminal A2 is 0 V (4 mA) according to the 100% value of the function set in parameter H3-09.
H3-12
H3-13
Analog input filter time constant
Filter Avg
Time
Terminal
A1/A2 switching
TA1/TA2
Select
Sets primary delay filter time constant for the two analog input terminals (A1 and A2).
Effective for noise control etc.
0: Use terminal A1 analog input as main frequency reference.
1: Use terminal A2 analog input as main frequency reference.
Terminal A1 becomes multi functional. Its function can be selected in parameter H3-09.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.00 to
2.00
0 or 1
0.0%
0.03
s
0
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
41AH
41BH
41CH
5
545
5
H3-09 Settings
Setting
Value
Function Contents (100%)
0
1
13
14
15
1F
7
C
D
E
10
A
B
8
9
11
12
5
6
2
4
Frequency bias
Frequency gain
Maximum output frequency
Frequency reference (voltage) command value
Auxiliary frequency reference (is used as frequency reference 2)
Voltage bias
Maximum output frequency
Accel/decel time gain
Motor rated voltage (E1-05)
Set acceleration and deceleration times (C1-
01 to C1-08)
Inverter rated output current DC injection braking current
Overtorque/undertorque detection level
Motor rated torque for vector control
Inverter rated output current for V/f control
Stall prevention level during run Inverter rated output current
Frequency reference lower limit level Maximum output frequency
Jump frequency
PID feedback
PID target value
Frequency bias 2
Motor temperature input
Positive torque limit
Negative torque limit
Regenerative torque limit
Torque reference/torque limit at speed control
Torque compensation
Positive/negative torque limit
Maximum output frequency
Maximum output frequency
Maximum output frequency
Maximum output frequency
–
Motor's rated torque
Motor's rated torque
Motor's rated torque
Motor’s rated torque
Motor’s rated torque
Motor's rated torque
Analog input not used.
–
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Page
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes No
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes No
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
No No Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No No No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes –
-
546
Multi-function Analog Outputs: H4
Parameter
Number
H4-01
H4-02
H4-03
H4-04
H4-05
H4-06
H4-07
Monitor selection
(terminal
AM) tion
Name
Display
Monitor selection
(terminal
FM)
Terminal
FM Sel
Gain (terminal FM)
Terminal
FM Gain
Bias (terminal FM)
Terminal
FM Bias
Terminal
AM Sel
Gain (terminal AM)
Terminal
AM Gain
Bias (terminal AM)
Terminal
AM Bias
Analog output 1 signal level selec-
AO Level
Select1
Description
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output (U1-
) at terminal FM.
The monitors U1-04, -10 to
-14, -28, -34, -39, -40 cannot be set to output at terminal
FM)
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 (terminal FM) gain.
Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is equal to
10V/20mA output at terminal
FM. Note that the maximum output voltage/current is 10V/
20mA.
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 (terminal FM) bias.
Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is equal to
0V/4mA output at terminal
FM.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V/20mA.
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output (U1-
) at terminal AM.
The monitors U1-04, -10 to
-14, -28, -34, -39, -40 cannot be set to be output at terminal
AM).
Set the multi-function analog output 2 (terminal AM) gain.
Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is equal to
10V/20mA output at terminal
AM. Note that the maximum output voltage/current is 10V/
20mA.
Sets the multi-function analog output 2 (terminal AM) bias.
Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is equal to
0V/4mA output at terminal
AM.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V/20mA.
Sets the signal output level for multi-function output 1 (terminal FM)
0: 0 to +10 V output
1: –10V to +10V output
2: 4 – 20 mA
Switch current and voltage output using CN15 on the control panel
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1 to 38
0 to
1000.0
%
-110 to
+110%
1 to 38
0 to
1000.0
%
-110.0 to
+110.0
%
0 to 2
2
100%
0.0%
3
50.0%
0.0%
0
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
41DH
41EH
41FH
420H
421H
422H
423H
5
547
5
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Analog output 2 signal level selection
H4-08
AO Level
Select2
Description
Sets the signal output level for multi-function output 2 (terminal AM)
0: 0 to +10 V output
1: –10V to +10V output
2: 4 – 20 mA
Switch current and voltage output using CN15 on the control panel
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to 2 0 No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A A A A 424H
MEMOBUS Communications: H5
Parameter
Number
H5-01
H5-02
H5-03
H5-04
H5-05
H5-06
H5-07
Name
Description
Display
Station address
Serial
Comm Adr
Communications speed selection
Serial Baud
Rate
Sets the Inverter's node address.
Sets the baud rate for MEMO-
BUS communications.
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
Communications parity selection
Serial Com
Sel
Stopping method after communications error
Serial Fault
Sel
Sets the parity for MEMO-
BUS communications.
0: No parity
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
Sets the stopping method for communications errors.
0: Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time in
C1-02
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09
3: Continue operation
Communications error detection selection
Serial Flt
Dtct
Send wait time
Transmit
WaitTIM
RTS control
ON/OFF
RTS Control Sel
Sets whether or not a communications time-out is to be detected as a communications error.
0: Do not detect.
1: Detect
Sets the time from the Inverter receiving data to when the
Inverter starts to send.
Enables or disables RTS control.
0: Disabled (RTS is always
ON)
1: Enabled (RTS turns ON only when sending)
Setting
Range
0 to 20
*
0 to 4
0 to 2
0 to 3
0 or 1
5 to 65
0 or 1
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1F
3
0
3
1
5 ms
1
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
* Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications.
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
425H
426H
427H
428H
429H
42AH
42BH
548
Pulse Train I/O: H6
Parameter
Number
H6-01
H6-02
H6-03
H6-04
H6-05
H6-06
H6-07
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Pulse train input bias
Pulse Input
Bias
Pulse train input filter time
Pulse In
Filter
Pulse train monitor selection
Pulse train input function selection
Pulse Input
Sel
Pulse train input scaling
Pulse In
Scaling
Pulse train input gain
Pulse Input
Gain
Selects the pulse train input function
0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID target value
Sets the number of pulses in
Hertz, that is equivalent to
100% of the input item selected in H6-01.
Sets the input level according to 100% of the input item selected in H6-01, when a pulse train with the frequency set in H6-02 is input.
Sets the input level according to 100% of the input item selected in H6-01, when the pulse train frequency is 0.
Sets the pulse train input delay filter time constant in seconds.
Pulse Moni
Sel
Pulse Moni
Scaling
PO Scaling
Select the pulse train monitor output items (value of the part of U1).
There are two types of monitor items: Speed-related items and PID-related items.
Sets the number of pulses output in hertz when the monitor item is 100%.
Sets H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to
0, to make the pulse train monitor output synchronously to the output frequency.
0 to 2
1000 to
32000
0.0 to
1000.0
-100.0 to
100.0
0.00 to
2.00
1, 2, 5,
20, 24,
36
0 to
32000
0
1440
Hz
0.10
s
1440
Hz
No
Yes
100.0% Yes
0.0%
2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
42CH
42DH
42EH
42FH
430H
431H
432H
5
549
5
Protection Function Parameters: L
Motor Overload: L1
Parameter
Number
L1-01
L1-02
L1-03
L1-04
Name
Description
Display
Motor protection selection
MOL Fault
Select
Motor protection time constant
MOL Time
Const
Alarm operation selection during motor overheating
Mtr OH
Alarm Sel
Motor overheating operation selection
Mtr OH
Fault Sel
Sets whether the motor thermal overload protection function is enabled or disabled.
0: Disabled
1: General-purpose motor protection (fan cooled motor)
2: Inverter motor protection
(externally cooled motor)
3: Vector motor protection
When the Inverter power supply is turned off, the thermal value is reset, so even if this parameter is set to 1, protection may not be effective.
When several motors are connected to one Inverter, set to
L1-01 to 0 and ensure that each motor is installed with a protection device.
Sets the electric thermal detection time in seconds units.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
The factory setting is 150% overload for one minute.
When the motor's overload capability is known, also set the overload resistance protection time for when the motor is hot started.
Selects the operation when the input motor temperature (thermistor) input exceeds the alarm detection level (1.17 V) (H3-09 must be set to E).
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.
3: Continue operation (oH3 on the Operator flashes).
Selects the operation when the motor temperature (thermistor) input exceeds the overheating detection level (2.34
V) (H3-09 must be set to E).
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to 3
0.1 to
5.0
0 to 3
0 to 2
1
1.0 min
3
1
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
Q
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
480H
481H
482H
483H
550
Parameter
Number
L1-05
Name
Display
Motor temperature input filter time constant
Mtr Temp
Filter
Description
Sets H3-09 to E and sets the delay time constant for the motor temperature (thermistor) input in seconds.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0.00 to
10.00
0.20 s No A A A A 484H
Power Loss Ride Through: L2
Parameter
Number
L2-01
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
L2-05
Name
Description
Display
Momentary power loss detection
PwrL Selection
Min. baseblock time
PwrL Baseblock t
0: Disabled (DC bus undervoltage (UV1) detection)
1: Enabled (Restarted when the power returns within the time set in L2-02. When
L2-02 is exceeded, DC bus undervoltage is detected.)
2: Enabled while CPU is operating. (Restarts when power returns during control operations. Does not detect DC bus undervoltage.)
Momentary power loss ride through time
PwrL Ridethru t
Ridethrough time, when
Momentary Power Loss Selection (L2-01) is set to 1, in units of seconds.
Sets the Inverter's minimum baseblock time, when the
Inverter is restarted after power loss ride through.
Set the time to approximately
0.7 times the motor time constant.
When an overcurrent or overvoltage occurs when starting a speed search or DC injection braking, increase the set values.
Voltage recovery time
PwrL V/F
Ramp t
Sets the time required to return the Inverter output voltage from 0V to normal voltage at the completion of a speed search.
Undervoltage detection level
PUV Det
Level
Sets the DC bus undervoltage
(UV) detection level (DC bus voltage).
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to 2
0 to
25.5
0.1 to
5.0
0.0 to
5.0
150 to
210
*2
0
0.1 s
*1
0.2 s
*1
0.3 s
*1
190 V
*2
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
485H
486H
487H
488H
489H
5
551
5
552
Parameter
Number
L2-06
L2-07
L2-08
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Kinetic
Energy
Buffering deceleration time
KEB Decel
Time
Momentary recovery time
UV Return
Time
Frequency reduction gain at
Kinetic
Energy
Buffering start
KEB
Frequency
Sets the time required to decelerate from the speed where the deceleration at momentary power loss command (Kinetic
Energy Buffering) is input to zero speed.
Sets the time to accelerate to the set speed after recovery from a momentary power loss.
Sets the reduction gain of the output frequency at the beginning of deceleration at momentary power loss (Kinetic
Energy Buffering).
Reduction = slip frequency before Kinetic Energy Buffering operation × L2-08 × 2
0.0 to
200.0
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s
0.0 s
*3
0 to 300 100%
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
A
A
A
A
A
A
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. The value for a 400 V class Inverter is the double.
* 3. If the setting is 0, the axis will accelerate to the specified speed using the specified acceleration time (C1-01 to C1-08).
No
No
No
48AH
48BH
48CH
Page
Stall Prevention: L3
Parameter
Number
L3-01
L3-02
L3-03
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Stall prevention selection during accel
StallP Accel
Sel
Stall prevention level during accel
StallP Accel
Lvl
Stall prevention limit during accel
StallP CHP
Lvl
0: Disabled (Acceleration as set. With a heavy load, the motor may stall.)
1: Enabled (Acceleration stopped when L3-02 level is exceeded. Acceleration starts again when the current has fallen below the stall prevention level).
2: Intelligent acceleration mode (Using the L3-02 level as a basis, acceleration is automatically adjusted. The set acceleration time is disregarded.)
Sets the stall prevention during acceleration operation current level as a percentage of
Inverter rated current.
Effective when L3-01 is set to
1 or 2.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary. Reduce the setting when the motor stalls.
Sets the lower limit for the stall prevention during acceleration, as a percentage of the Inverter rated current.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
0 to 2
0 to 200
1
150%
*
0 to 100 50%
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
48FH
490H
491H
Parameter
Number
L3-04
L3-05
L3-06
Name
Display
Description
Stall prevention selection during decel
StallP Decel
Sel
Selects the stall prevention during deceleration.
0: Disabled (Deceleration as set. If deceleration time is too short, a DC-Bus overvoltage may result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is stopped when the DC-Bus voltage exceeds the stall prevention level.
Deceleration restarts when the voltage falls below the stall prevention level again.)
2: Intelligent deceleration mode (Deceleration rate is automatically adjusted so that in Inverter can decelerate in the shortest possible time. The set deceleration time is disregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking
Resistor Unit)
When a braking option (Braking Resistor, Braking Resistor
Unit, Braking Unit) is used, always set to 0 or 3.
Stall prevention selection during running
StallP Run
Sel
Stall prevention level during running
StallP Run
Level
Selects the stall prevention during running.
0: Disabled (Runs as set. With a heavy load, the motor may stall.)
1: Deceleration using deceleration time 1
(C1-02.)
2: Deceleration using decelerationtime 2 (C1-04.)
Set the stall prevention during running operation current level as a percentage of the Inverter rated current.
Effective when L3-05 is 1 or 2.
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
Reduce the setting when the motor stalls.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to 3
0 to 2
30 to
200
1
1
150%
*
No
No
No
V/f
Q
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Q
A
A
Q
No
No
Q
No
No
492H
493H
494H
Page
* The given initial value is valid if Heavy Duty is selected (C6-01=0, default setting). If Normal Duty 1 or 2 is selected (C6-01=1 or 2) the initial value will be 120%.
5
553
5
Reference Detection: L4
Param eter
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
L4-01
L4-02
L4-03
L4-04
L4-05
L4-06
Display
Speed agreement detection level
Spd Agree
Level
Speed agreement detection width
Spd Agree
Width
Speed agreement detection level (+/-)
Spd Agree
Lvl+-
Effective when "f out
= f set agree 1", "Frequency detection 1" or "Frequency detection 2" is set for a multifunction output.
Effective when "f ref
= f out agree 1", "f out
= f set
agree 1" or "Frequency detection 1" or
"Frequency detection 2" is set for a multi-function output.
Effective when "f out
= f set agree 2", "Frequency detection 3" or "Frequency detection 4" is set for a multifunction output.
Speed agreement detection width (+/-)
Spd Agree
Wdth+-
Operation when frequency reference is missing
Ref Loss Sel
Effective when "f ref agree 2" "f out
= f set
= f out
agree 2",
"Frequency detection 3" or
"Frequency detection 4" is set for a multi-function output.
0: Stop (Operation follows the frequency reference.)
1: Operation continues at the frequency, set in parameter
L4-06.
Frequency reference loss means that the frequency reference value drops over
90% in 400 ms.
Frequency reference value at frequency reference loss
Sets the frequency reference value when the frequency reference is missing
Fref at Floss
0.0 to
150.0
*
0.0 to
20.0
-150.0 to
+150.0
*
0.0 to
20.0
0 or 1
0.0 to
100.0%
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.0 Hz
2.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
2.0 Hz
0
80%
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
499H
49AH
49BH
49CH
49DH
4C2H
* The given setting range is valid if Heavy Duty is selected (C6-01=0, default setting). If Normal Duty 1 or 2 is selected (C6-01=1 or 2) the setting range will be 0.0 to 400.0 Hz.
Fault Restart: L5
Parameter
Number
L5-01
Name
Display
Number of auto restart attempts
Num of
Restarts
Auto restart operation selection
L5-02
Restart Sel
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Sets the number of auto restart attempts.
Automatically restarts after a fault and conducts a speed search from the run frequency.
Sets whether a fault contact output is activated during fault restart.
0: No output (Fault contact is not activated.)
1: Output (Fault contact is activated.)
0 to 10
0 or 1
0
0
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
49EH
49FH
554
Torque Detection: L6
Parameter
Number
L6-01
L6-02
L6-03
L6-04
Name
Description
Display
Torque detection selection 1
Torq Det 1 Sel
Torque detection level 1
Torq Det 1 Lvl
0: Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled.
1: Overtorque detection only with speed agreement; operation continues
(warning is output).
2: Overtorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues
(warning is output).
3: Overtorque detection only with speed agreement; output stopped upon detection.
4: Overtorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection.
5: Undertorque detection only with speed agreement; operation continues
(warning is output).
6: Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues
(warning is output).
7: Undertorque detection only with speed agreement; output stopped upon detection.
8: Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon detection.
Vector control: Motor rated torque is set as 100%.
V/f control: Inverter rated current is set as 100%.
Torque detection time 1
Torq Det 1
Time
Torque detection selection
2
Sets the overtorque/undertorque detection time.
Torq Det 2 Sel
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 to 8
0 to
300
0.0 to
10.0
0 to 8
0
150%
0.1 s
0
No
No
No
No
L6-05
Torque detection level 2
Torq Det 2 Lvl
See L6-01 to L6-03 for a description.
L6-06
Torque detection time 2
Torq Det 2
Time
0 to
300
0.0 to
10.0
150%
0.1 s
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
4A1H
4A2H
4A3H
4A4H
4A5H
4A6H
5
555
5
Torque Limits: L7
Param eter
Number
L7-01
L7-02
L7-03
L7-04
L7-06
L7-07
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Forward drive torque limit
Torq Limit
Fwd
Reverse drive torque limit
Torq Limit
Rev
Forward regenerative torque limit
Torq Lmt
Fwd Rgn
Reverse regenerative torque limit
Torq Lmt
Rev Rgn
Sets the torque limit value as a percentage of the motor rated torque.
Four individual regions can be set.
Reverse
Output torque
Positive torque
Regen.
Regen.
No. motor rotations o
Forward
Negative torque
Torque limit time constant
Torque
Limit Time
Torque
Limit Operation during accel/ decel
Torque
Limit Sel
Sets the torque limit integration time constant
Sets the torque limit operation during acceleration and deceleration.
0: P-control (I control is added at constant speed operation)
1: I-control
Normally changing this setting is not necessary.
If the torque limitation accuracy during accel/decel. has preference, I control should be selected. This may result in an increased accel./decel. time and speed deviations from the reference value.
0 to
300
0 to
300
0 to
300
0 to
300
5 to
10000
0 or 1
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
200%*
200%*
200%*
200%*
200 ms
0
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
No
No
No
No
No
No
* A setting value of 100% is equal to the motor rated torque.
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
4A7H
4A8H
4A9H
4AAH
4ACH
4C9H
556
Hardware Protection: L8
Parameter
Number
L8-01
L8-02
L8-03
L8-05
L8-07
L8-09
L8-10
Name
Description
Display
Protect selection for internal DB resistor
0: Disabled (no overheating protection)
1: Enabled (overheating protection)
DB Resistor
Prot
Overheat prealarm level
OH Pre-
Alarm Lvl
Operation selection after overheat pre-alarm
OH Pre-
Alarm Sel
Input openphase protection selection
Ph Loss In
Sel
Sets the detection temperature for the Inverter overheat detection pre-alarm in °C.
The pre-alarm detects when the cooling fin temperature reaches the set value.
Sets the operation for when the Inverter overheat prealarm occurs.
0: Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time C1-
02.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop in fast-stop time
C1-09.
3: Continue operation
(Monitor display only.)
A fault will be given in setting
0 to 2 and a minor fault will be given in setting 3.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Detects power supply open-phase, power supply voltage imbalance or DC bus electrostatic capacitor deterioration.)
Output openphase protection selection
Ph Loss Out
Sel
0: Disabled
1: Enabled, 1 Phase Observation
2: Enabled, 2 and 3 Phase
Observation
An output open-phase is detected at less than 5% of
Inverter rated current.
When the applied motor capacity is small compared to the Inverter capacity, the detection may not work properly and should be disabled.
Ground protection selection
Ground Fault
Sel
Cooling fan control selection
Fan On/Off
Sel
0:Disabled
1:Enabled
It is not recommended to use another setting than factory setting.
Set the ON/OFF control for the cooling fan.
0: ON when Inverter is running only
1: ON whenever power is
ON
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 or 1
50 to
130
0 to 3
0 or 1
0 or 2
0 or 1
0 or 1
95
0
°C*
3
1
0
1
0
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
4ADH
4AEH
4AFH
4B1H
4B3H
4B5H
4B6H
5
557
5
Parameter
Number
L8-11
L8-12
L8-15
L8-18
Name
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Cooling fan control delay time
Fan Delay
Time
Ambient temperature
Ambient
Temp
OL2 characteristics selection at low speeds
OL2 Sel @
L-Spd
Set the time in seconds to delay turning OFF the cooling fan after the inverter STOP command is given.
0 to 300 60 s
Sets the ambient temperature.
45 to 60 45 °C
0: OL2 characteristics at low speeds disabled.
1: OL2 characteristics at low speeds enabled.
It is not recommended to use another setting than the factory setting.
0 or 1 1
No
No
No
Soft CLA selection 0: Disable
1: Enable
0 or 1 0 No
Soft CLA Sel
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
4B7H
4B8H
4BBH
4BFH
-
* The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
N: Special Adjustments
Hunting Prevention Function: N1
Parameter
Number
N1-01
N1-02
Name
Description
Display
Hunting-prevention function selection
Hunt Prev
Select
Hunting-prevention gain
Hunt Prev
Gain
0: Hunting-prevention function disabled
1: Hunting-prevention function enabled
The hunting-prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load.
If high response has the priority over vibration suppression, disable the huntingprevention function.
Sets the hunting-prevention gain.
Normally, there is no need to change this setting.
If necessary, make the adjustments as follows:
• If vibration occurs with light load, increase the setting.
• If the motor stalls, reduce the setting.
If the setting is too large, the voltage will be too suppressed and the motor may stall.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 or 1
0.00 to
2.50
1
1.00
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
No
580H
581H
558
Automatic Frequency Regulator: N2
Parameter
Number
Name Description
N2-01
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) gain
AFR Gain
Sets the internal speed feedback detection control gain.
Normally, there is no need to change this setting.
If necessary, adjust this parameter as follows:
• If hunting occurs, increase the set value.
• If response is low, decrease the set value.
Adjust the setting by 0.05 at a time, while checking the response.
N2-02
N2-03
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) time constant
AFR Time
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) time constant 2
AFR Time 2
Set the time constant 1 to decide the rate of change in the speed feedback detection control.
Set the time constant 2 to decide the rate of change in the speed.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0.00 to
10.00
0 to
2000
0 to
2000
1.00
50 ms
750 ms
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
No
No
No
A
A
A
No
No
No
584H
585H
586H
Page
High-slip Braking: N3
Parameter
Number
N3-01
N3-02
N3-03
N3-04
Name
Description
Display
High-slip braking deceleration frequency width
HSB Down
Freq
Sets the frequency width for deceleration during high-slip braking in percent, taking the maximum frequency (E1-04) as 100%.
High-slip braking current limit
HSB Current
Sets the current limit for deceleration during high-slip braking in percent, taking the motor rated current as 100%.
The resulting limit must be
150% of the Inverter rated current or less.
High-slip braking stop dwell time
HSB Dwell
Time
Sets the dwell time of the output frequency for FMIN (1.5
Hz) during V/f control.
Effective only during deceleration with high-slip braking.
High-slip braking OL time
HSB OL
Time
Set the OL time when the output frequency does not change for any reason during deceleration with high-slip braking.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1 to 20
100 to
200
0.0 to
10.0
30 to
1200
5%
150%
1.0 s
40 s
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
588H
589H
58AH
58BH
5
559
5
Digital Operator Parameters: o
Monitor Selections: o1
Parameter
Number o1-01 o1-02
Name
Display
Monitor selection
User Monitor Sel
Monitor selection after power up o1-03
Power-On
Monitor
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor
Display
Scaling
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Set the number of the 4rd. monitor item to be displayed in the Drive Mode. (U1-
(On LED operator only.)
)
Sets the monitor item to be displayed when the power is turned on.
1: Frequency reference
2: Output frequency
3: Output current
4: The monitor item set for o1-01
Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the frequency reference and frequency monitor.
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units
(Maximum output frequency is 100%)
2 to 39: rpm units (Set the motor poles.)
40 to 39999: User desired display Set the desired values for setting and display for the max. output frequency.
4 to 33
1 to 4
0 to
39999
6
1
0
Yes
Yes
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
500H
501H
502H
o1-04 o1-05
Sets the value that is to be displayed at
100% excluding the decimal point.
Sets the number of decimal places.
Example: When the max. output frequency value is 200.0, set 12000
Setting unit for frequency parameters related to V/ f characteristics
V/f Display
Unit
LCD Display contrast adjustment
LCD Contrast
Set the setting unit for frequency reference-related parameters.
0: Hz
1: min
−1
Sets the contrast on the optional LCD operator
(JVOP-160).
1: light
2:
3: normal
4:
5: dark
0 or 1
0 to 5
0
3
No
Yes
No No
A A
No
A
A
A
503H
504H
560
Digital Operator Functions: o2
Parameter
Number o2-01 o2-02 o2-03 o2-04 o2-05 o2-06 o2-07
Name
Display
Description
LOCAL/
REMOTE key enable/ disable
Local/
Remote Key
STOP key during control circuit terminal operation
Oper Stop
Key
User parameter initial value
User
Defaults
Enables/Disables the Digital
Operator Local/Remote key
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Switches between the Digital
Operator and the parameter settings b1-01, b1-02.)
Enables/Disables the Stop key in the run mode.
0: Disabled (When the run command is issued from an external terminal, the
Stop key is disabled.)
1: Enabled (Effective even during run.)
Clears or stores user initial values.
0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records the set parameters as user initial values.)
2: All clear (Clears all recorded user initial values)
When the set parameters are recorded as user initial values, 1110 will be set in A1-03.
kVA selection
Inverter
Model #
Frequency reference setting method selection
Operator
M.O.P.
Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected
Oper
Detection
Do not set unless after replacing the control board. (Refer
values).
When the frequency reference is set on the Digital Operator frequency reference monitor, sets whether the Enter key is necessary or not.
0: Enter key needed
1: Enter key not needed
When set to 1, the Inverter accepts the frequency reference without Enter key operation.
Sets the operation when the
Digital Operator is disconnected.
0: Operation continues even if the Digital Operator is disconnected.
1: OPR is detected at Digital
Operator disconnection.
Inverter output is switched off, and the fault contact is operated.
Cumulative operation time setting
Elapsed
Time Set
Sets the cumulative operation time in hour units.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 to 2
0 to FF
0 or 1
0 or 1
0 to
65535
1
1
0
0
0
0
0 hr
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
505H
506H
507H
508H
509H
50AH
50BH
5
561
5
Parameter
Number o2-08 o2-09
Name
Display
Cumulative operation time selection
Elapsed
Time Run
Initialize
Mode
InitModeSet time.
Description
0: Accumulated inverter power on time.
1: Accumulated inverter run
2: Europe
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 or 1
2 o2-10 o2-12 o2-14
Fan operation time setting
Fan ON
Time Set
Fault trace initialize
Fault Trace
Init kWh monitor initialize kWh Monitor Init
Sets the initial value of the fan operation time.
The operation time is accumulated starting from this set value.
0: No initialisation
1: Initialize (= zero clear) after setting ”1“ o2-12 will be returned to ”0“
0: No initialisation
1: Initialize (= zero clear) after setting ”1“ o2-14 will be returned to ”0“
0 to
65535
0 or 1
0 or 1
1
2
0 hr
0
0
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
50CH
50DH
50EH
510H
512H
-
Copy Function: o3
Parameter
Number o3-01
Name
Display
Copy function selection
Copy Function Sel o3-02
Read permission selection
Copy
Allowable
Description
0: Normal operation
1: READ (Inverter to
Operator)
2: COPY (Operator to
Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
0: READ prohibited
1: READ permitted
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Page
0 to 3 0
0 or 1 0
No A A A A 515H
No A A A A 516H
562
T: Motor Autotuning
Parameter
Number
T1-00
T1-01
T1-02
T1-03
T1-04
T1-05
T1-06
T1-07
T1-08
Name
Description
Display
Motor output power
Mtr Rated
Power
Motor rated voltage
Rated
Voltage
Motor rated current
Rated
Current
Motor base frequency
Rated Frequency
Number of motor poles
Number of
Poles
Motor base speed
Rated Speed
Number of
PG pulses
PG Pulses/
Rev
Motor 1/2 selection
Select Motor
Autotuning mode selection
Tuning
Mode Sel
Sets the parameter group, in which the autotuned motor parameters are stored.
1: E1 to E2 (motor 1)
2: E3 to E4 (motor 2)
Displayed only if a digital input is set to “Motor 1/2 selection” (H1=16).
Sets the autotuning mode.
0: Rotating autotuning
1: Non-rotating autotuning
2: Non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
Sets the output power of the motor in kilowatts.
Sets the rated voltage of the motor.
Sets the rated current of the motor.
Sets the base frequency of the motor.
Sets the number of motor poles.
Sets the base speed of the motor in r/min.
Sets the number of PG pulses per revolution.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
1 or 2
0 to 2
*1 poles
0 to
24000
0 to
60000
0.00 to
650.00
0 to
255.0
*3
0.32 to
6.40
*4
0 to
150.0
*5
2 to 48
1
0
0.40 kW
*2
200.0 V
*3
1.90 A
*2
50.0 Hz
4 poles
1750 r/min
1024
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
No No
Yes Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
700H
701H
702H
703H
704H
705H
706H
707H
708H
Page
* 1. Set T1-02 and T1-04 when 2 is set for T1-01. For V/f control or V/f control with PG a set value 2 is possible only.
* 2. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
* 3. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double.
* 4. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
* 5. The given setting range is valid if Heavy Duty is selected (C6-01=0, default setting). If Normal Duty 1 or 2 is selected (C6-01=1 or 2) the setting range will be 0.0 to 400.0 Hz.
5
563
5
U: Monitor Parameters
Status Monitor Parameters: U1
Parameter
Number
U1-01
U1-02
U1-03
U1-04
U1-05
Name
Display
Description
Frequency reference
Frequency
Ref
Output frequency
Output Freq
Output current
Output
Current
Control method
Control
Method
Motor speed
Monitors/sets the frequency reference value.*
Monitors the output frequency.*
Monitors the output current.
Displays the current control method.
Motor Speed
Monitors the detected motor speed.*
U1-06
U1-07
U1-08
U1-09
Output voltage
Output
Voltage
DC bus voltage
DC Bus
Voltage
Output power
Output kWatts
Torque reference
Torque
Reference
Monitors the output voltage reference value.
Monitors the main DC bus voltage.
Monitors the output power
(internally detected value).
Output Signal Level During
Multi-Function Analog Output
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
10 V: Inverter rated output current
(0 to +10 V, absolute value output)
(Cannot be output.)
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
(0 to +10 V output)
10 V: 400 VDC (800 VDC)
(0 to +10 V output)
10 V: Inverter capacity
(max. applicable motor capacity)
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
Monitors the internal torque reference value for open vector control.
10 V: Motor rated torque
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
* The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor
Min.
Unit
0.01
Hz
0.01
Hz
-
0.01
Hz
0.1 kW
V/f
0.1% No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
0.01A
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
No Yes
0.1 V Yes Yes
1 V Yes Yes
Yes Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
40H
41H
42H
43H
44H
45H
46H
47H
48H
564
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
Input terminal status
U1-10
Input Term
Sts
Description
Output Signal Level During
Multi-Function Analog Output
Shows input ON/OFF status.
1: FWD command
(S1) is ON
1: REV command
(S2) is ON
1: Multi input 1
(S3) is ON
1: Multi input 2
(S4) is ON
(Cannot be output.)
1: Multi input 3
(S5) is ON
1: Multi input 4
(S6) is ON
1: Multi input 5
(S7) is ON
Min.
Unit
-
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Yes Yes Yes Yes 49H
U1-11
Output terminal status
Output Term
Sts
Shows output ON/OFF status.
1: Multi-function contact output 1
(M1-M2) is ON
1: Multi-function contact output 2
(M3-M4) is ON
1: Multi-function contact output 3
(M5-M6) is ON
(Cannot be output.)
Not used
(Always 0).
1: Error output
(MA/MB-MC) is
ON
Yes Yes Yes Yes 4AH
U1-12
Operation status
Int Ctl Sts 1
Inverter operating status.
Run
1: Zero speed
1: Reverse
1: Reset signal
input
1: Speed agree
1: Inverter ready
(Cannot be output.)
1: Minor fault
1: Major fault
U1-13
U1-14
U1-15
Cumulative operation time
Elapsed
Time
Monitors the total operating time of the Inverter.
The initial value and the operating time/power ON time selection can be set in o2-07 and o2-08.
(Cannot be output.)
Software
No. (flash memory)
FLASH ID
Terminal A1 input level
Term A1
Level
(Manufacturer’s ID number) (Cannot be output.)
Monitors the input level of analog input A1. A value of
100% corresponds to 10V input.
10 V: 100%
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
-
1 hr
-
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
0.1% Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes
4BH
4CH
4DH
4EH
5
565
5
Parameter
Number
Name
Description
Output Signal Level During
Multi-Function Analog Output
U1-16
U1-18
U1-19
Display
Terminal A2 input level
Term A2
Level
Motor secondary current (Iq)
Mot SEC
Current
Motor excitation current (Id)
Mot EXC current
Monitors the input level of analog input A2. A value of
100% corresponds to 10V/
20mA input.
Monitors the calculated value of the motor secondary current.
The motor rated current corresponds to 100%.
Monitors the calculated value of the motor excitation current.
The motor rated current corresponds to 100%.
10 V/20mA: 100%
(0 to ±10 V possible)
10 V:Motor rated current)
(0 to ±10 V output)
10 V:Motor rated current)
(0 to ±10 V output)
U1-20
U1-21
U1-22
U1-24
U1-25
U1-26
U1-27
U1-28
Output voltage reference (Vq)
Voltage
Ref(Vq)
Output voltage reference (Vd)
Voltage
Ref(Vd)
Software
No. (CPU)
CPU ID
Frequency reference after softstarter
SFS Output
Monitors the frequency reference after the soft starter.
This frequency value does not include compensations, such as slip compensation.
The unit is set in o1-03.
ASR input
ASR Input
Monitors the input to the speed control loop.
The maximum frequency corresponds to 100%.
ASR output Monitors the output from the speed control loop.
ASR output
The maximum frequency corresponds to 100%.
PID feedback value
PID
Feedback
DI-16H2
Input Status
DI-16
Reference
Monitors the feedback value when PID control is used.
Monitors the reference value from a DI-16H2 option card.
The value will be displayed in binary or BCD depending on user constant F3-01.
Monitors the Inverter internal voltage reference for motor secondary current control.
Monitors the Inverter internal voltage reference for motor excitation current control.
(Manufacturer’s CPU software No.)
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
10 V:Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
10 V: 100% feedback value
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
(Cannot be output.)
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
(Cannot be output.)
Min.
Unit
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
0.01H
z
0.01
%
0.01
%
0.01
%
-
0.1 V
0.1 V
-
V/f
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
4FH
51H
52H
53H
54H
55H
57H
58H
59H
5AH
5BH
566
Parameter
Number
Name
Description
Output Signal Level During
Multi-Function Analog Output
U1-29
U1-30
U1-32
U1-33
U1-34
U1-35
U1-36
U1-37
Display
OPE fault parameter
OPE
Detected
Zero servo movement pulses
Zero Servo
Pulse
PID input volume
PID Input
PID output volume
PID Output kWH Lower four digits kWh Lower
4 dig kWH Higher five digits kWh Upper
5 dig
ACR output of q axis
ACR(q)
Output
ACR output of d axis
ACR(d) axis
Shows the consumed energy in kWh. U1-29 shoes the lower four digits, U1-30 shows the upper five digits.
.
U1-30 U1-29
Monitors the current control output value for the motor secondary current.
Monitors the current control output value for the motor excitation current.
Shows the first parameter number when an OPE fault is detected.
Shows the number of PG pulses of the movement range when zero servo was activated. The shown value is the actual pulse number times 4.
PID input volume
PID control output
(Cannot be output.)
(Cannot be output.)
10 V: 100%
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
10 V: 100%
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
(Cannot be output.)
(Cannot be output.)
10 V: 100% PID input
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
10 V: 100% PID output
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
U1-38 PID setpoint PID set point 10 V: 100% PID set point
U1-39
MEMOBUS communications error code
Shows MEMOBUS errors.
1: CRC error
1: Data length error
Not used
1: Parity error
(Cannot be output.)
1: Overrun error
Transmit Err
1: Framing error
1: Timeout
Min.
Unit
0.1
kWh
1
MW
0.1
%
0.1
%
-
-
0.01
%
0.01
%
0.01
%
-
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
No
No
Yes Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
5CH
5DH
5FH
60H
61H
62H
63H
64H
65H
66H
U1-40
Cooling fan operating time
FAN
Elapsed
Time
Monitors the total operating time of the cooling fan. The time can be set in
02-10.
(Cannot be output.)
1 hr
Yes Yes Yes Yes 67H
5
567
5
Fault Trace
Parameter
Number
U2-01
U2-02
U2-03
U2-04
U2-05
U2-06
U2-07
U2-08
U2-09
U2-10
U2-11
U2-12
Name
Description
Output Signal Level During
Multi-Function Analog Output Display
Current fault
Current
Fault
Last fault
Last Fault
Reference frequency at fault
Frequency
Ref
Output frequency at fault
Output Freq
Output current at fault
Output
Current
Motor speed at fault
Motor Speed
Output voltage reference at fault
Output
Voltage
DC bus voltage at fault
DC Bus
Voltage
Output power at fault
Output kWatts
Torque reference at fault
Torque
Reference
Input terminal status at fault
Input Term
Sts
Output terminal status at fault
Output Term
Sts
The content of the current fault.
The error content of the last fault.
The reference frequency when the last fault occurred.
The output frequency when the last fault occurred.
The output current when the last fault occurred.
The motor speed when the last fault occurred.
The output reference voltage when the last fault occurred.
The main current DC voltage when the last fault occurred.
The output power when the last fault occurred.
The reference torque when the last fault occurred. The motor rated torque corresponds to
100%.
The input terminal status when the last fault occurred.
The format is the same as for U1-
10.
The output terminal status when the last fault occurred. The format is the same as for U1-11.
(Cannot be output.)
Min.
Unit
-
-
0.01
Hz*
0.01
Hz*
V/f
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0.01A
Yes Yes
0.01
Hz*
0.1 V
1 V
0.1 kW
0.1%
-
-
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
80H
81H
82H
83H
84H
85H
86H
87H
88H
89H
8AH
8BH
568
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
U2-13
U2-14
Operation status at fault
Inverter Status
Cumulative operation time at fault
Elapsed
Time
Description
The operating status when the last fault occurred. The format is the same as for U1-12.
The operating time when the last fault occurred.
Output Signal Level During
Multi-Function Analog Output
(Cannot be output.)
* The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor
Min.
Unit
-
1 hr
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
MEMO-
BUS
Register
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8CH
8DH
Fault History: U3
Parameter
Number
Name
Display
U3-01
U3-02
U3-03
U3-04
U3-05
U3-06
U3-07
U3-08
Last fault
Last Fault
Second last fault
Fault Message 2
Third last fault
Fault Message 3
Fourth last fault
Fault Message 4
Cumulative operation time at fault
Elapsed Time 1
Accumulated time of second fault
Elapsed Time 2
Accumulated time of third fault
Elapsed Time 3
Accumulated time of fourth/oldest fault
Elapsed Time 4
Fifth last to tenth last fault
U3-09
–
U3-14
Fault Message 5 to 10
Description
The error content of 1st last fault.
The error content of 2nd last fault.
The error content of 3rd last fault.
The error content of 4th last fault.
The total operating time when the 1st previous fault occurred.
The total operating time when the 2nd previous fault occurred.
The total operating time when the 3rd previous fault occurred.
The total operating time when the 4th previous fault occurred.
The error content of the 5th to 10th last fault
Output Signal Level During
Multi-Function Analog Output
(Cannot be output.)
Min.
Unit
-
MEMO-
BUS
Register
90H
-
-
-
1 hr
1 hr
1 hr
1 hr
–
91H
92H
93H
94H
95H
96H
97H
U3-15
–
U3-20
Accumulated time of fifth to tenth fault
Elapsed Time 5 to 10
Total generating time when 5th ... 10th previous fault occurred
1hr
804
805H
806H
807H
808H
809H
806H
80FH
810H
811H
812H
813H
IMPORTANT
The following errors are not recorded in the Fault Trace and Fault History:
CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
5
569
5
Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)
Param eter
Number
Name b3-01 Speed search selection b3-02 Speed search operating current b8-02 Energy saving gain b8-03 Energy saving filter time constant
C3-01 Slip compensation gain
C3-02
Slip compensation primary delay time constant
C4-02
Torque compensation primary delay time constant
C5-01 ASR proportional gain 1
C5-02 ASR integral time 1
C5-03 ASR proportional gain 2
C5-04 ASR integral time 2
C5-06 ASR delay time d5-02 Torque reference delay time
E1-07
E3-05 Mid. output frequency (VB)
*2
E1-08
E3-06 Mid. output frequency voltage (VB)
*2
E1-09
E3-07
Min. output frequency (FMIN)
E1-10
E3-08 Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)
*2
F1-09 Over speed detection time
Setting Range
0 to 3
0 to 200
0.0 to 10.0
0.0 to 10.0
0.0 to 2.5
0 to 10000
0 to 10000
0.00 to 300.00
0.000 to 10.000
0.00 to 300.00
0.000 to 10.000
0.000 to 0.500
0 to 1000
0.0 to 150.0
*4
0.0 to 255.0
(0.0 to 510.0)
0.0 to 150.0
*4
0.0 to 255.0
(0.0 to 510.0)
0.0 to 2.0
Unit
1 ms
-
1 ms
-
1 ms
0.001
1 ms
0.1 V
-
1%
-
-
-
1 ms
0.1 V
0.1 Hz
0.1 V
1
V/f Control
A1-02=0
2
120
-
-
0.0
2000
200
0.20
0.200
0.02
0.050
-
-
2.5
15.0
*2*3
1.5
*2
9.0
*2*3
1.0
200
-
-
-
-
-
-
2.5
15.0
*2*3
1.2
*2
9.0
*2*3
-
Factory Setting
V/F with
PG
A1-02=1
Open Loop
Vector
A1-02=2
3
-
-
-
-
2
100
0.7
0.50
*1
1.0
Closed
Loop Vector
A1-02=3
-
-
1.0
0.01
*1
1.0
200 -
20
-
-
-
-
-
-
3.0
13.2
0.5
2.4
-
-
0.0
-
0.0
-
20.00
0.500
20.00
0.500
000.4
0
-
* 1. The settings are 0.05 (Closed Loop Vector) / 2.00 (Open Loop vector) for inverters of 55kW or larger.
* 2. Settings vary as shown in the following tables depending on the Inverter capacity and E1-03.
* 3. The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
* 4. The given setting range is valid if Heavy Duty is selected (C6-01=0, default setting). If Normal Duty 1 or 2 is selected (C6-01=1 or 2) the setting range will be 0.0 to 400.0 Hz.
570
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 1.5 kW*
Parameter
Number
E1-03
Unit
Factory Setting Open
Loop
Vector
Control
Closed
Loop
Vector
Control 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
E1-04 Hz 50.0
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
120.0 180.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
E1-05
*
V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
200.0
E1-06 Hz 50.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
E1-07
*
E1-08
*
Hz
V
2.5
15.0
3.0
15.0
3.0
15.0
3.0
15.0
25.0
35.0
25.0
50.0
30.0
35.0
30.0
50.0
2.5
19.0
2.5
24.0
3.0
19.0
3.0
24.0
3.0
15.0
3.0
15.0
3.0
15.0
3.0
15.0
3.0
13.2
0.0
0.0
E1-09 Hz 1.3
E1-10
*
V 9.0
1.5
9.0
1.5
9.0
1.5
9.0
1.3
8.0
1.3
9.0
1.5
8.0
1.5
9.0
1.3
11.0
1.3
13.0
1.5
11.0
1.5
15.0
1.5
9.0
1.5
9.0
1.5
9.0
1.5
9.0
0.5
2.4
0.0
0.0
* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 2.2 to 45 kW*
Parameter
Number
E1-03
Unit
Factory Setting Open
Loop
Vector
Control
Closed
Loop
Vector
Control 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
E1-04 Hz 50.0
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
120.0 180.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
E1-05
*
V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
E1-06 Hz 50.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
E1-07
*
Hz 2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
25.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
0.0
E1-08
*
V 14.0
E1-09 Hz 1.3
14.0
1.5
14.0
1.5
14.0
1.5
35.0
1.3
50.0
1.3
35.0
1.5
50.0
1.5
18.0
1.3
23.0
1.3
18.0
1.5
23.0
1.5
14.0
1.5
14.0
1.5
14.0
1.5
14.0
1.5
11.0
0.5
E1-10
*
V 7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
6.0
7.0
6.0
7.0
9.0
11.0
9.0
13.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
2.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
200 V Class Inverters of 55 to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 55 to 300 kW*
Parameter
Number
E1-
03
Unit
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Factory Setting
7 8 9 A B C D E F
Open
Loop
Vector
Control
Closed
Loop
Vector
Control
E1-04 Hz 50.0
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
120.0 180.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
E1-05
*
V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
E1-06 Hz 50.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
E1-07
*
Hz 2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
25.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
0.0
E1-08
*
V 12.0
E1-09 Hz 1.3
12.0
1.5
12.0
1.5
12.0
1.5
35.0
1.3
50.0
1.3
35.0
1.5
50.0
1.5
15.0
1.3
20.0
1.3
15.0
1.5
20.0
1.5
12.0
1.5
12.0
1.5
12.0
1.5
12.0
1.5
11.0
0.5
E1-10
*
V 6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
5.0
6.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
9.0
7.0
11.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
2.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
5
571
5
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)
200 V Class Inverters
E2-02
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
(E4-06)
Parameter Number
o2-04 b8-03
Name
Inverter Capacity kVA selection
Energy-saving filter time constant b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient
E2-01
(E4-01)
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor leak inductance
E2-10
L2-02
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
Momentary power loss rid through time
L2-03 Min. baseblock (BB) time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level
Unit kW
s
-
A
Hz
A
W
%
W s
E2-02
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
(E4-06)
Parameter Number
o2-04 b8-03
Name
Inverter Capacity kVA selection
Energy-saving filter time constant b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient
E2-01
(E4-01)
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor leak inductance
E2-10
L2-02
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
Momentary power loss ride through time
L2-03 Min. baseblock (BB) time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level
Unit
-
A
Hz
A
W
%
W s s s
°C kW
s s s
°C
0.4
0
1.90
2.90
1.20
1.0
0.6
100
0.1
0.3
95
18.5
9
0.75
1
3.30
2.50
1.80
1.0
0.6
90
0.2
0.3
95
1.5
2
6.20
2.60
2.80
1.1
0.6
90
0.3
0.3
95
Factory Setting
2.2
3
3.7
4
5.5
5
0.50 (Open Loop vector)
7.5
6
288.20
223.70
169.40
156.80
122.90
94.75
72.69
70.44
63.13
8.50
2.90
3.00
0.4
0.3
100
22
A
30
B
37
C
0.50 (Open Loop vector)
1.1
0.6
95
14.00
19.60
26.60
2.73
4.50
0.5
0.3
95
45
D
1.2
0.6
100
1.50
5.10
1.2
1.0
105
0.6
0.3
95
15
8
55
E
75
F
90
10
2.00 (Open Loop vector)
110
11
1.3
1.0
110
0.7
0.3
95
11
7
0.8
0.3
95
1.5
1.0
100
1.7
1.0
95
0.9
0.3
90
57.87
51.79
46.27
38.16
35.78
31.35
23.10
23.10
23.10
1.43
45.6
0.101
0.079
0.064
0.039
0.030
0.022
0.023
0.023
0.023
20.5
960
1.30
8.00
39.7
1.70
11.2
9.842
5.156
1.997
1.601
0.771
0.399
0.288
0.230
0.138
18.2
14
0.1
65.8
1.67
15.7
20.1
505
2.0
13.8
26
0.1
77.2
1.70
18.5
19.5
538
2.0
18.5
53
0.2
19.5
245
1.0
105.0
131.0
160.0
190.0
260.0
260.0
260.0
1.80
21.9
20.8
699
2.0
18.4
77
0.3
1.33
38.2
18.8
823
2.0
19.6
112
0.5
Factory Setting
1.60
44.0
20.2
852
2.0
18.2
172
1.0
2.0
15.5
262
1.0
1.39
72.0
20.0
1200
2.0
1.39
72.0
20.0
1200
2.0
53.0
1.60
15.2
17.2
272
2.0
1.39
72.0
20.0
1200
2.0
572
400 V Class Inverters
Parameter Number
-
Name
Inverter Capacity o2-04 b8-03 kVA selection
Energy-saving filter time constant
Energy-saving coefficient b8-04
E2-01
(E4-01)
E2-02
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor leak inductance
E2-10
L2-02
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
Momentary power loss ride through time
L2-03 Min. baseblock (BB) time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level
Unit kW
s
-
A
0.4
20
0.75
21
1.5
22
2.2
23
3.7
24
4.0
25
0.50 (Open Loop vector)
5.5
26
7.5
27
11
28
15
29
576.40
447.40
338.80
313.60
245.80
236.44
189.50
145.38
140.88
126.26
1.00
1.60
3.10
4.20
7.00
7.00
9.80
13.30
19.9
26.5
Hz 2.90
A
W 38.198
22.459
10.100
6.495
3.333
3.333
1.595
1.152
0.922
0.550
%
W s s s
°C
0.60
18.2
14
0.1
0.1
0.3
95
2.60
0.80
14.3
26
0.1
0.2
0.3
95
2.50
1.40
18.3
53
0.2
0.3
0.3
95
3.00
1.50
18.7
77
0.3
0.4
0.3
90
Factory Setting
2.70
2.30
19.3
130
0.5
0.5
0.3
95
2.70
2.30
19.3
130
0.5
0.6
0.3
95
1.50
2.60
18.2
193
0.8
0.6
0.3
95
1.30
4.00
15.5
263
0.8
0.7
0.3
90
1.70
5.6
19.6
385
1.0
0.8
0.3
95
1.60
7.6
17.2
440
2.0
0.9
0.3
95
Parameter Number
-
Name
Inverter Capacity o2-04 b8-03 kVA selection
Energy-saving filter time constant
Energy-saving coefficient b8-04
E2-01
(E4-01)
E2-02
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
Motor line-to-line resis-
(E4-05)
E2-06 tance
(E4-06)
Motor leak inductance
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
L2-02
Momentary power loss ride through time
L2-03 Min. baseblock (BB) time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level
Unit kW
s
-
A
Hz
A
W
%
W s s s
°C
1.67
7.8
0.403
20.1
508
2.0
1.0
0.6
98
18.5
2A
22
2B
30
2C
37
2D
0.50 (Open Loop vector)
115.74
103.58
92.54
32.9
38.6
52.3
76.32
65.6
1.70
9.2
0.316
23.5
586
2.0
1.0
0.6
78
1.80
10.9
0.269
20.7
750
2.0
1.1
0.6
85
1.33
19.1
0.155
18.8
925
2.0
1.1
0.6
85
Factory Setting
45
2E
71.56
79.7
1.60
22.0
0.122
19.9
1125
2.0
1.2
0.6
90
55
2F
67.20
95.0
1.46
24.0
0.088
20.0
1260
2.0
1.2
1.0
90
75
30
90
31
110
32
2.00 (Open Loop vector)
46.20
130.0
41.22
156.0
36.23
190.0
1.39
36.0
0.092
20.0
1600
2.0
1.3
1.0
98
1.40
40.0
0.056
20.0
1760
2.0
1.5
1.0
108
1.40
49.0
0.046
20.0
2150
2.0
1.7
1.0
100
132
33
33.18
223.0
1.38
58.0
0.035
20.0
2350
2.0
1.7
1.0
110
5
573
5
E2-02
(E4-02)
E2-03
(E4-03)
E2-05
(E4-05)
E2-06
(E4-06)
Parameter Number
o2-04 b8-03
Name
Inverter Capacity kVA selection
Energy-saving filter time constant b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient
E2-01
(E4-01)
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor leak inductance
E2-10
L2-02
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
Momentary power loss ride through time
L2-03 Min. baseblock (BB) time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level
Unit kW
s
-
A
Hz
A
W
%
W
s s
°C
160
34
2.00 (Open Loop vector)
30.13
270.0
1.35
70.0
0.029
20.0
2850
2.0
1.8
1.0
108
Factory Setting
185
35
30.57
310.0
1.30
81.0
0.025
20.0
3200
2.0
1.9
1.0
95
220
36
27.13
370.0
1.30
96.0
0.020
20.0
3700
2.0
2.0
1.0
100
300
37
21.76
500.0
1.25
130.0
0.014
20.0
4700
2.0
2.1
1.0
95
Parameter Initial Values that Change With the Setting of C6-01
Parameter
Number
C6-02
L3-02
L3-06
L8-15
Name
Carrier frequency selection
Stall prevention at acceleration level
Stall prevention during running operation level
OL2 characteristics at low speed
C6-01=0 (Heavy Duty)
1
Initial Value
C6-01=1 or 2 (Normal Duty 1 or 2)
Depends on the inverter rated power
150%
150%
0 (Disabled)
120%
120%
1 (Enabled)
574
Parameter Setting Ranges that Change With the Setting of C6-01
Parameter
Number
C6-02
Name
Carrier frequency selection
Setting Range
C6-01=0 (Heavy Duty)
C6-01=1 or 2
(Normal Duty 1 or 2)
0,6,F
0 to 6, F (depends on the inverter rated power) d6-02
E1-04
E1-06
E1-07
E1-09
E1-11
E3-02
E3-04 b5-15 b6-01 b6-03
C1-11
C5-07 d3-01 d3-02 d3-03
E3-05
E3-07
L4-01
L4-03
PID sleep function operation level
Dwell frequency at start
Dwell frequency at stop
Accel./Decel. time switching frequency
ASR gain switching frequency
Jump frequency 1
Jump frequency 2
Jump frequency 3
Field weakening limit
Maximum output frequency
Base frequency
Middle output frequency
Minimum output frequency
Middle output frequency 2
Motor 2 maximum output frequency
Motor 2 base frequency
Motor 2 middle output frequency
Motor 2 minimum output frequency
Frequency detection level
Frequency detection bandwidth
Upper Limit = 150.0 Hz
-150.0 to +150.0 Hz
Upper Limit = 400.0 Hz
-400.0 to 400.0 Hz
5
575
5
576
6
Parameter Settings by
Function
Application and Overload Selections .....................................6-2
Frequency Reference ............................................................6-7
Run Command Input Methods .............................................6-12
Stopping Methods ................................................................6-14
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics ....................6-19
Adjusting Frequency References.........................................6-26
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limits)..........................6-30
Frequency Detection............................................................6-31
Improving the Operation Performance.................................6-33
Machine Protection ..............................................................6-43
Automatic Restart ................................................................6-52
Inverter Protection................................................................6-59
Input Terminal Functions .....................................................6-64
Output Terminal Functions...................................................6-74
Monitor Parameters .............................................................6-77
Individual Functions .............................................................6-80
Digital Operator Functions .................................................6-130
Option Cards......................................................................6-138
6
Application and Overload Selections
Select the Overload to Suit the Application
Set C6-01 (Heavy Duty: constant torque, Normal Duty: High carrier, variable torque) depending on the application. The setting ranges for the Inverter carrier frequency, overload capability and maximum output frequency depend on the setting of C6-01. For applications like fans and blowers (quadratic torque characteristic) set C6-01 to 1 or 2 (Normal Duty 1 or 2). For applications with a constant torque characteristic set C6-01 to 0
(Heavy Duty).
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
C6-01
C6-02
C6-03
C6-04
C6-05
Name
Heavy/Normal Duty selection
Carrier frequency selection
Carrier frequency upper limit
Carrier frequency lower limit
Carrier frequency proportional gain
Factory
Setting
0
1
2.0 kHz
2.0 kHz
00
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
Q
Q
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Q Q
Q Q
A
A
A
A
No
No
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q
Q
A
No
No
Difference Between Heavy Duty and Normal Duty
The characteristics of Heavy Duty (constant torque) and Normal Duty (variable torque) are shown below.
Heavy Duty / Constant Torque
Constant Torque
Normal Duty / Variable Torque
Variable Torque
Torque Torque
Motor speed
Motor speed
Constant torque means a constant load torque for all motor speed. Typical applications are pushers, conveyors, cranes, and other high friction or heavy loads. These applications may require overload capability.
Variable torque means that the load torque will increase as the speed increases. Typical applications are fans and pumps. Normally not much overload capability is required.
62
Setting Precautions
C6-01 (Heavy/Normal Duty Selection)
The inverter supplies Heavy/Normal Duty modes Heavy Duty, Normal Duty 1 and Normal Duty 2. The set-
and page 5-75, Parameter Setting Ranges that
Change With the Setting of C6-01
.
The table below shows the main differences of the three modes.
C6-01 Set Value
Inverter Current Overload Capability
0 (Heavy Duty)
150% of the Heavy Duty rated current for 1 min. *1
C6-02 (Carrier Frequency Selection)
0: Low carrier frequency, low noise
1: 2 kHz
6: 15kHz *2
1 (Normal Duty 1)
120% of the Normal Duty 1 rated current for 1 min. *1
0: Low carrier low noise
1: Carrier 2 kHz
2: Carrier 5 kHz *3
3: Carrier 8.0 kHz *3
4: Carrier 10.0 kHz
*3
5: Carrier 12.5 kHz
*3
6: Carrier 15 kHz *3
F: User-set *3
2 (Normal Duty 2)
120% of the Normal Duty 2 rated current for 1 min.
*1
E1-04 and E3-02 (Max. Output
Frequency)
L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level
During Acceleration)
L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level
During Operation)
L8-15 (OL2 Characteristics at low Speed)
150 Hz
150%
150%
0 (Disabled)
400 Hz
120%
120%
1 (Enabled)
* 1. The rated current depends on on the Heavy/Normal Duty selection. (See
page -2, Specifications by Model for details)
* 2. If the carrier frequency in Heavy Duty mode is set to a higher value than 2.5kHz, a current derating must be considered.
* 3. The factory setting and the maximum carrier frequency depend on the inverter capacity. (See
page -2, Specifications by Model for details)
Carrier Frequency Selection
When selecting the carrier frequency, observe the following precautions:
• Adjust the carrier frequency according to the cases shown below.
• If the wiring distance between Inverter and motor is long: Set the carrier frequency low. (Use the following values as guidelines.
Wiring Length
C6-02 (carrier frequency) setting
50 m or less
0 to 6 (15 kHz)
100 m or less
0 to 4 (10 kHz)
Over 100 m
0 to 2 (5 kHz)
•
•
•
•
If speed and torque vary at low speeds: Lower the carrier frequency.
If Inverter noise is affecting peripheral devices: Lower the carrier frequency.
If leakage current from the Inverter is large: Lower the carrier frequency.
If metallic noise from the motor is large: Increase the carrier frequency.
6
63
6
• When using V/f control or V/f control with PG, the carrier frequency can be set to vary depending on the output frequency, as shown in the following diagram by setting C6-03 (Carrier Frequency Upper Limit),
C6-04 (Carrier Frequency Lower Limit), and C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain).
Carrier Frequency
C6-03
Output frequency x C6-05 x K*
C6-04
E1-04
Max. Output Frequency
Output frequency
*K is the coefficient determined by the set value in C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K=3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K=2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K=1
Fig 6.1 Variable Carrier Frequency
•
•
•
With Open Loop and Closed Loop Vector control, the carrier frequency is fixed by the Carrier Frequency
Upper Limit in C6-03 if user-set, or by the carrier frequency set in C6-02.
To fix the carrier frequency, set C6-03 and C6-04 to the same value, or set C6-05 to 0.
If the settings are as shown below, OPE11 (Data setting error) will occur.
If Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain (C6-05) > 6 and C6-03 < C6-04.
If C6-01 = 0 and Carrier Frequency Selection C6-02 is set from 2 to E.
If C6-01 = 1 and Carrier Frequency Selection C6-02 is set from 7 to E.
64
Carrier Frequency and Inverter Overload Capability
The inverter overload capability depends among other things on the carrier frequency setting. If the carrier frequency setting is higher than the factory setting, the overload current capability must be reduced.
Heavy Duty (C6-01=0)
The default carrier frequency for the Heavy Duty mode is 2 kHz. The overload capability is 150% of the
Heavy Duty rated current for 1 minute.
If the carrier frequency is increased, a derating for the continuous output current like shown on
must be considered. The overload capability (OL2 Level) does not change. It will be 150% of the derated current for 1 min.
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
2 4 6 8 10
Carrier Frequency (kHz)
12
200V/400V 22kW and less
200V 30kW / 400V 30 to 55kW
200V 37 to 90kW / 400V 75 to 160kW
400V 185kW
200V 110kW / 400V 220 and 300kW
Fig 6.2 Current Derating in Heavy Duty Mode
14
6
65
Normal Duty 1 (C6-01=1)
The default carrier frequency for the Normal Duty 1 mode depends on the inverter capacity. The overload capability is 120% of the Normal Duty 1 rated current for 1 minute.
If the carrier frequency is set to a higher value than the factory setting, the overload capability is reduced like shown in
200V Class 37 to 90kW
400V Class 75 to 110kW
200V Class 0.4 to 22kW
400V Class 0.4 to 22kW
120%
96%
90%
400V Class 132kW
400V Class 160kW
200V Class 30kW
400V Class 30 to 55kW
6
Carrier Freq.
0
5kHz 8kHz 10kHz
Fig 6.3 Overload Capability in Normal Duty 1 Mode
15kHz
Normal Duty 2 (C6-01=2)
In the Normal Duty 2 mode the maximum carrier frequency is decreased compared to the Normal Duty 1
mode but the short term overload capability is increased. Refer to Fig 6.4
for the overload capability of both
modes.
100
10
1
0.1
100 110 120 130 140 150 160
Overload Level [%]
Normal Duty 1
170 180
Normal Duty 2
Fig 6.4 Normal Duty 1 and 2 Inverter Overload Detection Curve
190 200
66
Frequency Reference
Selecting the Frequency Reference Source
Set parameter b1-01 to select the frequency reference source.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
b1-01
H3-09
H3-13
H6-01
H6-02
Name
Frequency reference source selection
Analog input 2 function selection
Terminal A1/A2 main reference input switching
Pulse train input function selection
Pulse train input scaling
Factory
Setting
1
0
0
0
1440 Hz
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
Q
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Q Q
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q
A
A
A
A
Input the Frequency Reference from the Digital Operator
When b1-01 is set to 0, you can input the frequency reference from the Digital Operator.
For details on setting the frequency reference, refer to
page 3-1, Digital Operator and Modes .
-DRIVE-
Frequency Ref
U1-01= 0 0 0.0 0Hz
Rdy
"0.00Hz"
Fig 6.5 Frequency Setting Display
Inputting the Frequency Reference Using Voltage (Analog Setting)
When b1-01 is set to 1, you can input the frequency reference from control circuit terminal A1 (voltage input), or control circuit terminal A2 (voltage or current input).
Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only
If inputting the master speed frequency reference only, input the voltage reference to control circuit terminal
A1.
Inverter
2 k Ω
2 k Ω
+V(Power supply: 15 V, 20 mA)
A1(Master frequency reference)
A2(Auxiliary frequency reference)
AC (Analog common)
6
Fig 6.6 Master Speed Frequency Reference Input
67
6
2-Step Switching: Master/Auxiliary
If performing 2-step switching between master and auxiliary speed frequencies, input the master speed frequency reference to control circuit terminal A1, and input the auxiliary speed frequency reference to A2.
When terminal S3 (multi-step speed command 1) is OFF, terminal A1 input (master speed frequency reference) will be the Inverter frequency reference, and when terminal S3 is ON, terminal A2 input (auxiliary speed frequency reference) will be the Inverter frequency reference.
0 to 10 V input
2 k Ω
Master/
Auxiliary
2 k Ω
2 k Ω
0 to 10 V input
Inverter
S3 Multi-step speed command 1
SN Digital input neutral
+V (Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA)
A1(Master frequency reference)
A2(Auxiliary frequency reference)
AC (Analog common)
DIP switch S1
Fig 6.7 Master/Auxiliary Frequency Reference Input
Setting Precautions
When inputting a voltage signal to terminal A2, turn OFF pin 2 on DIP switch S1 to switch to voltage input
(factory setting is ON).
Inputting the Frequency Reference Using a Current Signal / Making Analog Input A1
Multifunctional
The frequency reference can be input from control circuit terminal A2 using a 4-20mA current signal. To use this function parameter H3-13 must be set to 1 (terminal A1/A2 switching).
In this case A2 becomes the master frequency input and A1 becomes multi-functional. The function for the analog input A1 can be set in parameter H3-09.
Inverter
4 to 20 mA
+V (Power supply: 15 V,
A1(Auxiliary frequency
A2(Master frequency
AC (Analog common)
DIP switch S1
Fig 6.8 Frequency Reference Using Current
Setting Precautions
• When inputting a current signal to terminal A2, turn ON pin 2 on DIP switch S1 (factory setting: ON).
68
Setting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Signals
When b1-01 is set to 4, the pulse train input signal at terminal RP input is used as the frequency reference.
Set H6-01 (Pulse Train Input Function Selection) to 0 (frequency reference), and then set the reference pulse frequency that is equal to 100% of the reference value to H6-02 (Pulse Train Input Scaling).
Inverter
Pulse Input Specifications
Low level voltage 0.0 to 0.8 V
High level voltage
Pulse duty factor
3.5 to 13.2 V
30 to 70%
Pulse frequency 0 to 32 kHz
32 kHz max.
3.5 to 13.2 V
Pulse input
(Pulse train input terminal)
(Analog common)
Fig 6.9 Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Input
6
69
6
Using Multi-Step Speed Operation
The inverter supports a multi step speed operation with a maximum of 17 speed steps, using 16 multi-step frequency references, and one jog frequency reference.
The following example of a multi-function input terminal function shows a 9-step operation using multi-step references 1 to 3 and jog frequency selection functions.
Related Parameters
To switch frequency references, set multi-step references 1 to 3 and the jog reference selection in the multifunction digital inputs.
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Terminal
S4
Parameter
Number
H1-02
Set Value
5
S5
S6
S7
H1-03
H1-04
H1-05
3 (default)
4 (default)
6 (default)
Details
Multi-step speed command 3
Multi-step speed command 1 (Also used for master speed/auxiliary speed switching when multi-function analog input H3-09 is set to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference).)
Multi-step speed command 2
Jog frequency selection (given priority over multi-step speed command)
Combining Multi-Step Speed References and Digital Inputs
You can change the selected frequency reference by combining the ON/OFF status of S4 to S7 (digital input terminals). The following table shows the possible combinations.
Speed
6
7
4
5
8
1
2
3
17
Multi-step
Speed Command 1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
-
Multi-step
Speed Command 2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
-
Multi-step
Speed Command 3
Jog Frequency Selection
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
-
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON *
Selected Frequency
Frequency reference 1 d1-01, master speed frequency
Frequency reference 2 d1-02, auxiliary frequency
Frequency reference 3 d1-03
Frequency reference 4 d1-04
Frequency reference 5 d1-05
Frequency reference 6 d1-06
Frequency reference 7 d1-07
Frequency reference 8 d1-08
Jog frequency d1-17
* Terminal S7's jog frequency selection is given priority over multi-step speed commands.
610
Setting Precautions
When setting analog inputs to step 1 and step 2, observe the following precautions.
•
•
When setting terminal A1's analog input to step 1 set b1-01 to 1, when setting d1-01 (Frequency Reference
1) to step 1 set b1-01 to 0.
When setting terminal A2's analog input to step 2 set H3-09 to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference). When setting d1-02 (Frequency Reference 2) to step 2 set H3-09 to an other setting than 2.
Connection Example and Time Chart
The following diagram shows a time chart and control circuit connection example for a 9-step operation.
Inverter
Forward/stop
Reverse/stop
Error reset
Multi-step command 3
Multi-step command 1
Multi-step command 2
Jog frequency
SN Digital input neutral
Frequency reference
Fig 6.10 Control Circuit Configuration for 9-step Operation
Frequency reference 2: Auxiliary speed frequency
Frequency reference 1: Master speed frequency
Frequency reference 8
Frequency reference 7
Frequency reference 6
Frequency reference 5
Frequency reference 4
Frequency reference 3
Jog frequency
Forward/stop
Multi-step speed command 1
Multi-step speed command 2
Multi-step speed command 3
Jog frequency selection
Fig 6.11 Multi-step speed command/Jog Frequency Selection Time Chart
Note:
• The multifunction input setting “Multistep Speed Reference 4” (32) has to be used for selecting the frequency references from d1-09 to d1-16.
• The multifunction input setting “Jog Frequency 2” (69) can be used for jog frequency selection when a 3wire control is used for the control circuit. If it is selected while the inverter is initialized to 2-wire control an OPE03 error will be displayed.
6
611
6
Run Command Input Methods
Selecting the Run Command Source
Set parameter b1-02 to select the source for the run command.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
b1-02
Name
RUN command source selection
Factory
Setting
1
Change during
Operation
No
V/f
Q
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Q Q
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q
Performing Operations Using the Digital Operator
When b1-02 is set to 0, you can perform Inverter operations using the Digital Operator keys (RUN, STOP, and
FWD/REV). For details on the Digital Operator, refer to
page 3-1, Digital Operator and Modes .
Performing Operations Using Control Circuit Terminals
When b1-02 is set to 1, you can perform Inverter operations using the control circuit terminals.
Performing Operations Using a 2-wire Control
The factory setting is set to a 2-wire control. When the control circuit terminal S1 is set to ON, forward operation will be performed, and when S1 is turned OFF, the Inverter will stop. In the same way, when the control circuit terminal S2 is set to ON, reverse operation will be performed, and when S2 is turned OFF, the Inverter will stop.
Inverter
Forward/Stop
Reverse/Stop
SN Digital input neutral
Fig 6.12 2-Wire Control Wiring Example with Positive Logic
612
Performing Operations Using 3-Wire Control
If one of the parameter H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminals S3 to S7) is set to 0, the terminals S1 and S2 are used for a 3-wire control, and the multi-function input terminal that has been set to 0 works as a forward/ reverse selection command terminal.
When the Inverter is initialized for 3-wire control with A1-03, multi-function input 3 becomes the input terminal for the forward/reverse run command.
Stop switch (NC contact)
Operation switch
(NO contact)
Run command (operates when ON)
SN
Stop command (stopped when ON)
Forward/reverse command (multi-function input)
Digital input neutral
Run command
Stop command
Forward/reverse command
Fig 6.13 3-Wire Control Wiring Example
50 ms min.
Can be either ON or OFF
OFF
(stopped)
OFF (forward)
ON (reverse)
INFO
Motor speed
Stop Forward Reverse
Fig 6.14 Three-wire Control Timing Chart
Stop Forward
Use a control circuit that turns ON terminal S1 for 50 ms or longer for the run command. This will make the run command self-holding in the Inverter.
6
613
6
Stopping Methods
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Input
There are four methods of stopping the Inverter when a stop command is input:
• Deceleration to stop
•
•
•
Coast to stop
DC braking stop
Coast to stop with timer
Set parameter b1-03 to select the Inverter stopping method. DC injection braking to stop (b1-03=2) and coast to stop with a timer (b1-03=3) can not be set for Closed Loop Vector control.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
b1-03 b1-05 b2-01 b2-02 b2-04
Name
Stopping method selection
Zero speed operation selection
Zero speed level
DC injection braking current
DC injection braking time at stop
Factory
Setting
0
0
0.5 Hz
50%
0.50 s
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Q
No
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Q Q
No
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q
A
A
No
A
Deceleration to Stop (b1-03=0)
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 0, the motor decelerates to stop according to the deceleration time that has been set. (Default: C1-02 (Deceleration Time 1))
If the output frequency when decelerating to stop falls below b2-01, the DC injection brake will be applied using the DC current set in b2-02 for the time set in b2-04.
For deceleration time settings, refer to page 6-19, Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times .
Run command
Output frequency
Decelerates to stop deceleration time
DC injection brake
DC injection brake time when stopping (b2-04)
Fig 6.15 Deceleration to Stop
614
When Closed Loop Vector control is selected, the stopping behavior depends on the setting of b1-05.
RUN OFF ON
Analog frequency reference f ref
0
E1-09 b1-05=0
Run at frequency reference f out
Initial excitation
Zero speed control
The Run command turns
OFF and zero speed control starts when the motor speed feedback drops below b2-01.
b1-05=1
Coast to stop f out
Baseblock b2-03
Initial excitation Zero speed control b2-04 Baseblock
The frequency reference drops to less than E1-09 and zero speed control starts when the motor speed feedback drops below b2-01.
Baseblock b1-05=2
Run at minimum frequency E1-09 f out
Initial excitation b1-05=3
Zero Speed
Operation f out
Baseblock b2-03
Initial excitation b2-03
Baseblock b2-03 b2-04 Baseblock
The Run command turns OFF and zero speed control starts when the motor speed feedback drops below b2-01.
Zero speed control b2-04 Baseblock
The Run command turns OFF and zero speed control starts when motor speed feedback drops below b2-01.
Zero speed control b2-04 Baseblock
Fig 6.16 Deceleration to Stop in Closed Loop Vector Control
Coast to Stop (b1-03=1)
When b1-03 is set to 1 and the Run command is turned off, the inverter output will be interrupted immediately and the motor will coast to stop. The time until the motor stands depends on the inertia and load situation.
Run command
ON OFF
Output frequency
Inverter output frequency interrupted
INFO
Fig 6.17 Coast to Stop
After the stop command is input, Run commands are ignored until the Minimum Baseblock Time
(L2-03) has elapsed.
6
615
DC Braking to Stop (b1-03=2)
After the stop command has been input and the minimum baseblock time (L2-03) has elapsed, DC injection will be applied to the motor. The applied DC injection current can be set in parameter b2-02. The DC injection braking time depends on the set value of b2-04 and on the output frequency at the moment when the stop command is input and. If the output frequency was higher than 10% of the maximum output frequency (E1-04) the
DC injection time is lengthened like shown in the figure below.
DC injection brake time
Run command
Output frequency
ON OFF b2-04 x 10
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03)
Inverter output voltage interrupted
DC injection brake
DC injection brake time b2-04
10%
Fig 6.18 DC Injection Braking to Stop
Output frequency at stop command input
100% (maximum output frequency
INFO
Lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) when an overcurrent (OC) occurs during stopping.
6
Coast to Stop with a Timer (b1-03=3)
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 3, the Inverter output is switched off so that the motor coasts to stop. After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored until the time T has elapsed. The time T depends on the output frequency when the stop command is input and on the deceleration time.
Operation wait time T
Run command
Deceleration time
(e.g., C1-02)
Output frequency
Inverter output voltage interrupted
Operation wait time T
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03)
Minimum output frequency
Output frequency at stop command input
100% (Maximum output frequency)
Fig 6.19 Coast to Stop with Timer
616
Using the DC Injection Brake
The DC injection brake can be used to stop a coasting motor before restarting it or to hold it at the deceleration end when the inertia is large. Set parameter b2-03 to apply DC injection to the motor, before it starts to accelerate. Set parameter b2-04 to apply a DC injection brake to the motor at stopping.
Setting b2-03/04 to 0 to disables the DC injection brake at start/stop.
Set the DC injection brake current using b2-02.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
b2-01 b2-02 b2-03 b2-04
Name
Zero speed level (DC injection braking starting frequency)
DC injection braking current
DC injection braking time at start
DC injection braking time at stop
Factory
Setting
0.5 Hz
50%
0.00 s
0.50 s
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
No
A
A
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
60 DC injection brake command
Function
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Inputting the DC Injection Brake Command from Control Circuit Terminals
If you set a digital input terminal (H1) to 60 (DC injection brake command), the DC brake can be applied by enabling or disabling this input. The time chart for the DC injection brake is shown below.
DC injection brake command
FRUN
Output frequency
DC injection brake
E1-09 b2-01
DC injection brake
If you input the DC injection brake command from an external terminal, and if a run command or jog command is input, the DC injection brake will be disabled, and operation will resume.
Fig 6.20 DC Injection Brake Time Chart
6
617
Changing the DC Injection Brake Current Using an Analog Input
If you set H3-09 (Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) to 6 (DC injection brake current), you can change the DC injection brake current level using the analog input.
At 10 V input (voltage) or 20 mA input (current), 100% of the Inverter rated current will be applied.
DC injection brake current level
Inverter rated current
6
Fig 6.21 DC Injection Brake Current Using an Analog Input
Using an Emergency Stop
Set a digital input terminal (H1) to 15 or 17 (emergency stop) to decelerate to stop using the emergency stop deceleration time set in C1-09. If inputting the emergency stop with an NO contact, set the multi-function input terminal (H1input terminal (H1-
) to 15, and if inputting the emergency stop with an NC contact, set the multi-function
) to 17.
After the emergency stop command has been input, operation cannot be restarted until the Inverter has stopped. To cancel the emergency stop, turn OFF the run command and emergency stop command.
Related parameters
Parameter
No.
C1-09
Name
Emergency stop time
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
15
17
Emergency Stop, NO contact
Emergency Stop, NC contact
Function
Factory
Setting
10.0 s
Change during
Operation
No
V/f
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
V/f
Yes
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Yes
618
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times
The acceleration time indicates the time to increase the output frequency from 0% to 100% of the maximum output frequency (E1-04). The deceleration time indicates the time to decrease the output frequency from
100% to 0% of (E1-04). The accel./decel. times 1 are used with the factory setting, the accel./decel. times 2 to
4 can be selected using a multifunction digital input.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
C1-08
C1-10
C1-11
C2-01
C2-02
C2-03
C2-04
C1-01
C1-02
C1-03
C1-04
C1-05
C1-06
C1-07
Name
Acceleration time 1
Deceleration time 1
Acceleration time 2
Deceleration time 2
Acceleration time 3
Deceleration time 3
Acceleration time 4
Deceleration time 4
Acceleration/deceleration time setting unit
Acceleration/deceleration time switching frequency
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start
S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
7
1A
Acceleration/Deceleration time 1
Acceleration/Deceleration time 2
Function
1
0.0 Hz
0.20 s
0.20 s
0.20 s
0.00 s
Factory
Setting
10.0 s
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Change during
Operation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Q Q
Q
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q
Q
A
V/f
Yes
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Yes
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Units
Set the acceleration/deceleration time units using C1-10. The factory setting is 1.
Set value
0
1
Details
The acceleration/deceleration time setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 in units of 0.01 s.
The acceleration/deceleration time setting range is 0.00 to 6000.0 in units of 0.1 s.
6
619
6
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi-Function Input Terminal
Commands
Four different acceleration times and deceleration times can be set. When the multi-function input terminals
(H1) are set to 7 (acceleration/deceleration time selection 1) and 1A (acceleration/deceleration time selection 2), you can switch the acceleration/deceleration time even during operation by combining the ON/
OFF status of the terminals.
The following table shows the acceleration/deceleration time switching combinations.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time
Selection 1 Terminal
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Acceleration/Deceleration Time
Selection 2 Terminal
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Acceleration Time
C1-01
C1-03
C1-05
C1-07
Deceleration Time
C1-02
C1-04
C1-06
C1-08
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Times Using a Frequency Level
The acceleration/deceleration times can be switched over automatically at a certain output frequency which can be set in parameter C1-11.
shows the working principle of the function.
Set C1-11 to a value other than 0.0 Hz. If C1-11 is set to 0.0 Hz, the function will be disabled.
Output
Frequency
Accel./Decel. time
Switching Freq.
C1-11
C1-07 C1-01 C1-02 C1-08
When output frequency ≥ C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 1 (C1-01, C1-02).
When output frequency < C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 4 (C1-07, C1-08).
Fig 6.22 Acceleration/deceleration Time Switching Frequency
620
Adjusting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using an Analog Input
If you set H3-09 (Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) to 5 (acceleration/deceleration time gain), you can adjust the acceleration/deceleration time using terminal A2's input voltage.
The resulting acceleration time is as follows:
Acceleration time = C1-01 set value x acceleration/deceleration time gain
Acceleration/deceleration time gain
(Acceleration/deceleration gain from 1 to 10 V)
= 10 V/Input voltage (V) x 10 (%)
Fig 6.23 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Gain Using an Analog Input
Entering S-curve Characteristics in the Acceleration and Deceleration Time
By performing acceleration and deceleration using an S-curve pattern, you can reduce shock when starting and stopping the machine.
Four different S-curve characteristic times can be set: At acceleration start, at deceleration start, at acceleration end and at deceleration end.
INFO
When S-curve is set, calculate acceleration/deceleration time as follows:
Accel.Time
=
2
Decel. Time =
2
Setting Example
The S-curve characteristic when switching operation (forward/reverse) is shown in the following diagram.
Forward
Reverse
6
Output frequency
Fig 6.24 S-curve Characteristic during Operation Switching
621
6
622
Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads (Dwell Function)
The dwell function holds the output frequency temporarily when starting or stopping heavy loads. When using the dwell function, deceleration to stop must be set as stopping method (b1-03 = 0).
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
b6-01 b6-02 b6-03 b6-04
Dwell frequency at start
Dwell time at start
Dwell frequency at stop
Dwell time at stop
Name
Factory
Setting
0.0 Hz
0.0 s
0.0 Hz
0.0 s
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
Applying an Output Frequency Dwell
An output frequency dwell can be applied to prevent a stalling of the motor at start if the static friction and the inertia are large or to prevent a coasting of the motor at stop. The frequency level at which the dwell function starts can be set separately for the start and the stop in the parameters b6-01 and b6-03. The times can be set in
the parameters b6-02 and b6-04 (refer to Fig 6.25
)
Run command
ON
OFF
Output frequency b6-01 b6-03 Time b6-02 b6-04
Fig 6.25 Output Frequency Dwell Settings
Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration (Stall Prevention
During Acceleration Function)
The Stall Prevention During Acceleration function prevents the motor from stalling if a heavy load is applied to the motor, or sudden rapid acceleration is performed.
If L3-01 is set to 1 (enabled) and the Inverter output current reaches 85 % of the set value in L3-02, the acceleration rate will begin to slow down. When L3-02 is exceeded, the acceleration will stop.
If L3-01 is set to 2 (optimum adjustment), the motor accelerates so that the current is held at the level set in
L3-03. With this setting, the acceleration time setting is ignored.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L3-01
L3-02
L3-03
Name
Stall prevention selection during acceleration
Stall prevention level during acceleration
Stall prevention limit during acceleration
Factory
Setting
1
150%*
50%
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
* Shows the initial value when C6-01 is set to 0 (default). If C6-01 is set to 1 or 2, the initial value is 120%.
V/f
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A A
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
No
No
No
Time Chart
The following figure shows the frequency characteristics when L3-01 is set to 1.
Output current
Stall level during acceleration
L3-02
85% of L3-02
Time
Output frequency
*1.
*2.
* 1. The acceleration rate is lowered.
* 2. The acceleration is stopped to reduce the output current.
Fig 6.26 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration
Time
Setting Precautions
•
•
•
If the motor capacity is small compared to the Inverter capacity or if the inverter is operated using the factory settings and the motor stalls, lower the set value of L3-02.
If using the motor in the constant power range, L3-02 will be automatically lowered to prevent stalling.
L3-03 is the limit value to prevent the stall prevention level in the constant power range from being reduced more than necessary (see
Set the parameters as a percentage taking the inverter rated current to be 100%.
Stall prevention level during acceleration
L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during
Acceleration)
L3-03 (Stall Prevention Limit during
Acceleration)
6
Output frequency
E1-06
Base Frequency (FA)
Fig 6.27 Stall Prevention Level and Limit During Acceleration
623
6
Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration
The stall prevention during deceleration function lengthens the deceleration time automatically with respect to the DC-bus voltage to avoid overvoltage tripping.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L3-04
Name
Stall prevention selection during deceleration function selection
Factory
Setting
1
Change during
Operation
No
V/f
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
Setting the Stall Prevention Selection During Deceleration (L3-04)
There are four different settings selectable for L3-04.
L3-04=0: Disabled
This setting disables the stall prevention function during deceleration. The motor will be decelerated using the time set in C1-02 (C1-04/06/08). If the load inertia is very high and an OV fault occurs during deceleration a Braking option has to be used or the time has to be lengthened.
L3-04=1: Enabled
This setting enables the stall prevention during deceleration. The inverter tries to decelerate within the set deceleration time. It also observes the DC bus voltage. If the DC bus voltage reaches the stall prevention level the deceleration is stopped and the output frequency is held. When the DC bus voltage falls below the stall prevention level the deceleration will be continued.
L3-04=2: Intelligent deceleration
This setting enables the stall prevention during deceleration. The deceleration time set as C1 is taken as reference. The function automatically tries to optimize the deceleration time by observing the DC bus voltage and shortening the deceleration time. The function does not lengthen the deceleration time, i.e. if C1 is set too short OV may occur.
L3-04=3: Enabled with braking resistor
This setting enables the stall prevention during deceleration using a braking option. It works similar to setting 2, the only difference is that a braking option is used. The deceleration time set in C1is also disregarded.
624
Setting Example
An example of stall prevention during deceleration when L3-04 is set to 1 is shown below.
Output frequency Deceleration time controlled to prevent overvoltage
Time
Deceleration time
(set value)
Fig 6.28 Stall Prevention During Deceleration Operation
Setting Precautions
• The stall prevention level during deceleration differs depending on the inverter rated voltage and input voltage. Refer to the following table for details.
200 V class
400 V class
Inverter Rated/Input Voltage
E1-01 ≥ 400 V
E1-01 < 400 V
Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration (V)
380
760
660
•
•
When using the braking option (braking resistor, braking resistor units, and braking units), be sure to set parameter L3-04 to 0 or 3.
When a braking option is used and the deceleration time shall be optimized (shorter than setting of C1-02/
04/06/08), L3-04 has to be set to 3.
6
625
6
Adjusting Frequency References
Adjusting Analog Frequency References
The analog reference values can be adjusted using the gain and bias functions for the analog inputs.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
H3-01
H3-02
H3-03
H3-08
H3-09
H3-10
H3-11
H3-12
H3-13
Name
Multi-function analog input terminal A1 signal level selection
Frequency reference terminal A1 input gain
Frequency reference terminal A1 input bias
Multi-function analog A2 signal level selection
Multi-function analog A2 function selection
Multi-function analog A2 input gain
Multi-function analog A2 input bias
Analog input filter time constant
Terminal A1/A2 switching
0
100.0%
0.0%
2
0
100.0%
0.0%
0.03 s
0
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
Adjusting Analog Frequency Reference Using Parameters
The frequency reference can be input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage or current signals
(analog input A2 only).
The input signal levels can be selected using
• H3-01 for the analog input A1
• H3-08 for the analog input A2
Adjustments to the signals can be made using:
• H3-02 (Gain) and H3-03 (Bias) if analog input A1 is selected to be the frequency reference input
• H3-10 (Gain) and H3-11 (Bias) if analog input A2 is selected to be the frequency reference input
Refer to
for adjusting the signal using the gain and bias functions.
Frequency reference Frequency reference
Terminal A1 input voltage
Terminal A1 input
Fig 6.29 Terminals A1 and A2 Inputs
Terminal A2 input
Terminal A2 input voltage (current)
626
Adjusting Frequency Gain Using an Analog Input
When H3-09 is set to 1 (frequency gain), the frequency gain can be adjusted using analog input A2.
Frequency gain
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 input level
Fig 6.30 Frequency Gain Adjustment (Terminal A2 Input)
The frequency gain for terminal A1 is the product of H3-02 and gain which is input at terminal A2. For example, when H3-02 is set to 100% and the terminal A2 input is 5 V, the frequency reference gain will be 50%.
Frequency reference
100 % H3-02
50 % H3-02 x 0.5
terminal A1 input voltage
0 10 V
Fig 6.31 Frequency Gain Setting Example
Adjusting Frequency Bias Using an Analog Input
When parameter H3-09 is set to 0 (Frequency Bias), the frequency equivalent to the terminal A2 input voltage is added to A1 as a bias.
Frequency bias
6
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 input level
Fig 6.32 Frequency Bias Adjustment (Terminal A2 Input)
For example, if H3-02 is 100%, H3-03 is 0%, and the terminal A2 input is 1 V, the frequency reference when
0 V is input to A1 will be 10% of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Frequency reference
H3-02
10 %
Bias
0 V 10 V
Terminal A1 input voltage
Fig 6.33 Frequency Bias Setting Example
627
6
Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function)
The jump frequency function allows the prohibition or “jumping” of certain frequencies within the Inverter’s output frequency range so that the machine can operate without oscillations caused by resonant frequencies of the machine.
It can also be used for deadband control.
During acceleration and deceleration the output frequency goes linear through the prohibited frequency ranges, i.e. no output frequency jumps are performed
During constant speed operation an operation within the jump frequency range is prohibited.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
d3-01 d3-02 d3-03 d3-04
Jump frequency 1
Jump frequency 2
Jump frequency 3
Jump frequency width
Name
Factory
Setting
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
1.0 Hz
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
The relationship between the output frequency and the jump frequency reference is shown in
.
Output frequency
Frequency reference descending
Jump frequency width d3-04
Frequency reference ascending
Jump frequency width d3-04
Jump frequency width d3-04
Jump frequency 3
(d3-03)
Jump frequency 2
(d3-02)
Jump frequency 1
(d3-01)
Fig 6.34 Jump Frequency
Jump frequency reference
628
Setting Jump Frequency Reference Using an Analog Input
When parameter H3-09 (analog input A2 function selection) is set to A (jump frequency), the jump frequency can be changed by the terminal A2 input value.
Jump frequency
Max. output frequency
E1-04
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 input level
Fig 6.35 Jump Frequency Setting Using an Analog Input
Setting Precautions
• Set the jump frequencies according to the following formula: d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03 > Analog input.
• When parameters d3-01 to d3-03 are set to 0 Hz, the jump frequency function is disabled.
Adjusting Pulse Train Input Reference Values
If b1-01 is set to 4 and H6-01 is set to 0, the pulse train input is selected as the frequency reference source. Set the pulse frequency that is equal to 100% reference in parameter H6-02, and then adjust the gain and bias accordingly using H6-03 and H6-04.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
H6-01
H6-02
H6-03
H6-04
H6-05
Name
Pulse train input function selection
Pulse train input scaling
Pulse train input gain
Pulse train input bias
Pulse train input filter time
Factory
Setting
0
1440 Hz
100.0%
0.0%
0.10 s
Change during
Operation
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
explains the functioning of the pulse train input.
V/f
A
A
A
A
A
Gain and bias
Filter
Cycle measurement
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
A
Open
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
Master speed frequency
PID feedback
PID target value
Scaling using H6-02
Fig 6.36 Frequency Reference Adjustments Using Pulse Train Inputs
The principle for setting the input gain and bias is the same as for the analog inputs (refer
). The only difference is that the input signal is not a voltage or a current but a pulse train.
6
629
6
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limits)
Limiting the Maximum Output Frequency
If the motor is not allowed to rotate above a certain frequency, use parameter d2-01 to set a frequency reference upper limit.
The limit value is set as a percentage, taking E1-04 (Maximum Output Frequency) to be 100%.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
d2-01
Name
Frequency reference upper limit
Factory
Setting
100.0%
Change during
Operation
No
V/f
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
Limiting the Minimum Output Frequency
If the motor is not allowed to rotate below a certain frequency, use parameters d2-02 or d2-03 to set a frequency reference lower limit.
There are two methods of limiting the minimum frequency, as follows:
• Set d2-02 to adjust the minimum level for all frequencies.
• Set d2-03 to adjust the minimum level for the master speed frequency (i.e., the lower level is not valid for the jog frequency, multi-step speed frequency, and auxiliary frequency).
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
d2-02 d2-03
Name
Frequency reference lower limit
Master speed reference lower limit
Factory
Setting
0.0%
0.0%
Change during
Operation
No
No
V/f
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
Adjusting Frequency Lower Limit Using an Analog Input
If parameter H3-09 (analog input A2 function selection) is set to 9 (output frequency lower level), the frequency lower level can be adjusted using the terminal A2 input level (see
).
Output frequency lower level
Max. output frequency
E1-04
0 V
(4 mA)
10 V
(20 mA)
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 input level
Fig 6.37 Analog Input A2 Characteristics for Frequency Reference Lower Limit
If parameter d2-02 and terminal A2 output frequency lower level have been set at the same time, the larger set value will become the frequency lower limit.
630
Frequency Detection
Speed Agreement Function
There are eight different types of frequency detection methods available. The digital multifunction outputs M1 to M6 can be programmed for this function and can be used to indicate a frequency detection or agreement to any external equipment.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L4-01
L4-02
L4-03
L4-04
Name
Speed agreement detection level
Speed agreement detection width
Speed agreement detection level (±)
Speed agreement detection width (±)
Factory
Setting
0.0 Hz
2.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
2.0 Hz
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
Multifunction Output Settings: H2-01 to H2-03
(M1 – M6 function selection)
The table below shows the necessary H2-01 to H2-03 parameter setting for each of the speed agreement functions. Refer to the timing charts on the following page for details.
Function f ref
= f out
Agree 1 f out
= f set
Agree 1
Frequency detection 1
Frequency detection 2 f ref
= f out
Agree 2 f out
= f set
Agree 2
Frequency detection 3
Frequency detection 4
Setting
2
3
4
5
13
14
15
16
Setting Precautions
•
•
With L4-01 an absolute speed agreement level is set, i.e. a speed agreement is detected in both directions
(FWD and REV).
With L4-03 a signed speed agreement level is set, i.e. a speed agreement is detected only in the set direction (positive level → FWD direction, negative level → REV direction).
6
631
6
Time Charts
The following table shows the time charts for each of the speed agreement functions.
Related parameter
f ref
= f out
Agree 1
L4-01: Speed Agree Level
L4-02: Speed Agree Width
L4-03: Speed Agree Level +/–
L4-04: Speed Agree Width
f ref
= f out
Agree 2 f ref
= f out
Agree
Frequency
Reference
Output
Frequency or
Motor Speed
Frequency
Reference
L4-02
Frequency
Reference
Output
Frequency or
Motor Speed
Frequency
Reference
L4-04
L4-02 L4-04 f ref
= f out
Agree OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 2) f ref
= f out
Agree 2 OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 13)
f out
= f set
Agree 2
(ON at the following conditions during frequency agree)
L4-04
L4-03
Output
Frequency or
Motor Speed f out
= f set
Agree
f out
= f set
Agree 1
(ON at the following conditions during frequency agree)
L4-02
L4-01
Output
Frequency or
Motor Speed
L4-01
L4-02 f out
= f set
Agree 1
ON OFF
(Multi-function output setting = 3)
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 1
(L4-01 > | Output frequency |)
L4-02
L4-01
Output
Frequency or
Motor Speed
L4-01
L4-02 f out
= f set
Agree 2
ON OFF
(Multi-function output setting = 14)
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 3
(L4-03 > Output frequency)
Output
Frequency or
Motor Speed
L4-04
L4-03
Freq. Detection 1 ON OFF
(Multi-function output setting = 4)
Frequency
Detection
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 2
(L4-01 < | Output frequency |)
L4-02
L4-01
Output
Frequency or
Motor Speed
L4-01
L4-02
Freq. Detection 3 ON OFF
(Multi-function output setting = 15)
Frequency Detection 4
(L4-03 < Output frequency)
L4-04
L4-03
Output
Frequency or
Motor Speed
Freq. Detection 2 OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 5)
Freq. Detection 4 OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 16)
632
Improving the Operation Performance
Reducing the Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function)
When the load is large, the motor slip also grows and the motor speed decreases. The slip compensation function keeps the motor speed constant, regardless of changes in load. When the motor is operating at the rated load, parameter E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip) × the slip compensation gain value in parameter C3-01 is added to the output frequency.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
C3-01
C3-02
C3-03
C3-04
C3-05
Slip compensation gain
Name
Slip compensation delay time
Slip compensation limit
Slip compensation during regeneration
Output voltage limit operation selection
Factory
Setting
1.0*
200 ms
*
200%
0
0
Change during
Operation
Yes
No
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
A
No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
No A
Closed
Loop
Vector
No
No
No
No
No
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open Loop Vector control factory settings are given.)
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
A
Adjusting Slip Compensation Gain (C3-01)
The set value of C3-01 depends on the control method. The factory settings are:
• V/f control without PG: 0.0
• Open Loop Vector control: 1.0
Set C3-01 to 1.0 to compensate the slip depending on the actual torque output status using the rated slip (E2-
02/E4-02) as reference.
Adjust the slip compensation gain using the following procedure.
1. With Open Loop Vector control Set E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip) and E2-03 (Motor No-load Current) correctly. The motor rated slip can be calculated using the values on the motor nameplate and the following formula:
Motor rated slip (Hz) = –
120
The motor data can be set automatically using the autotuning function.
2. With V/f control set C3-01 to 1.0.
3. Apply a load, and measure the speed to adjust the slip compensation gain. Adjust the slip compensation gain by 0.1 at a time only. If the speed is less than the target value, increase the slip compensation gain, and if the speed is higher than the target value, reduce the slip compensation gain.
4. Setting C3-01 to 0.0 disables the slip compensation function.
6
633
Adjusting Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant (C3-02)
The slip compensation delay time constant is set in ms.
The setting value of C3-02 depends on the control method. The factory settings are:
• V/f control without PG: 2000 ms
• Open loop vector control: 200 ms
Normally, there is no need to change these settings. When the slip compensation response is low, lower the set value. When the speed is unstable, increase the set value.
Adjusting Slip Compensation Limit (C3-03)
Using parameter C3-03 the upper limit for the slip compensation can be set as a percentage, taking the motor rated slip as 100%.
If the speed is lower than the target value but does not change even after adjusting the slip compensation gain, the slip compensation limit may have reached. Increase the limit, and check the speed again. Always make sure that the value of the slip compensation limit and reference frequency does not exceed the tolerance of the machine.
The following diagram shows the slip compensation limit for the constant torque range and fixed output range.
Slip compensation limit
6
Output frequency
E1-06: Base frequency
E1-04: Maximum output frequency
Fig 6.38 Slip Compensation Limit
Selecting Slip Compensation Function During Regeneration (C3-04)
Enables or disables the slip compensation function during regeneration.
If the slip compensation function operates during regeneration, you might have to use a braking option (braking resistor, braking resistor unit and braking unit).
Operation Selection when Output Voltage Saturated (C3-05)
Generally the Inverter cannot output a voltage that is higher than the input voltage. If the output voltage reference for the motor (monitor parameter U1-06) exceeds the input voltage in the high-speed range, the output voltage becomes saturated, and inverter cannot respond to speed or load changes. This function automatically reduces the output voltage to avoid voltage saturation.
Thereby the speed control accuracy can be maintained even at high speeds (around the rated speed of the motor). By the lowered voltage the current can be around 10% higher compared to the operation without voltage limiter.
634
Torque Compensation for Sufficient Torque at Start and Low-speed
Operation
The torque compensation function detects a rising motor load, and increases the output torque.
In V/f control the inverter calculates the motor primary loss voltage using the terminal resistance value (E2-
05) and adjusts the output voltage (V) to compensate insufficient torque at startup and during low-speed operation.
The compensation voltage is calculated by the calculated Motor primary voltage loss × parameter C4-01.
In Open Loop Vector control the motor excitation current and the torque producing current are calculated and controlled separately. The torque compensation affects the torque producing current only.
The torque producing current is calculated by the calculated torque reference × C4-01.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
C4-01
C4-02
C4-03
C4-04
C4-05
Torque compensation gain
Name
Torque compensation delay time constant
Starting torque compensation value (forward direction)
Starting torque compensation value (reverse direction)
Starting torque compensation time constant
Factory
Setting
1.00
200 ms
*
0.0
0.0
1 ms
Change during
Operation
Yes
No
No
No
No
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
V/f
No
No
No
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
No
A A No
No
No
No
A
A
A
No
No
No
Adjusting Torque Compensation Gain (C4-01)
Normally, there is no need to change this setting. If adjustments are necessary do the following:
Open Loop Vector control:
• If the torque response is slow increase the setting value.
• If vibrations occur decrease the setting value.
V/f control:
• If the cable is very long, increase the set value.
•
•
If the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity (max. applicable motor capacity), increase the set value.
If the motor is vibrating, reduce the set value.
Setting precautions:
•
•
Adjust this parameter so that the output current during low-speed rotation does not exceed the Inverter rated output current range.
Adjust the value in steps of 0.05 only.
6
635
6
Adjusting the Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant (C4-02)
The setting value of C4-02 depends on the control method. The factory settings are:
• V/f control without PG: 200 ms
•
•
V/f control with PG: 200 ms
Open loop vector control: 20 ms
Normally, there is no need to change this setting. If adjustments are necessary do the following:
• If the motor is vibrating, increase the set value.
• If the torque response is slow, decrease the set value.
Starting Torque Compensation Function (C4-03 to C4-05)
A starting torque compensation can be applied to speed up the torque establishment at start in Open Loop Vector control.
This function is effective for machinery with large friction loads and applications, where high starting torque is required. It works like shown in the following diagram.
Forward (Reverse) Run command
ON
OFF
Time constant: C4-02
Time constant: C4-05
C4-03 (forward)
C4-04 (reverse, negative polarity)
Torque compensation volume
C4-05 x 4
E1-09
Output frequency
The larger value of b2-01 and E1-09
Fig 6.39 Time Chart for Starting Torque Frequency
When this function is used, the following should be considered:
• When the machine runs in FWD and REV direction both values, C4-03 and C4-04 have to be set.
•
•
The compensation works for motoring operation only. It can not be used for regenerative operation.
If the starting torque compensation is used and a large shock is generated at the start, increase the starting torque compensation time constant (C4-05).
Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR)
In Closed Loop Vector control the automatic speed regulator (ASR) adjusts the torque reference in order to eliminate the deviation between the speed reference and the measured speed (PG feedback).
shows the ASR structure for Closed Loop Vector control.
Frequency
Reference
Motor
Speed
+
-
C5-01/03
P
I
C5-02/04
C5-08
I-Limit
+
+
Delay
Timer
C5-06
Torque
Limits
Torque
Reference
Fig 6.40 ASR Structure for Closed Loop Vector Control
636
In V/f control with PG the ASR adjusts the output frequency in order to eliminate the deviation between the
speed reference and the measured speed (PG feedback). Fig 6.41
shows the ASR structure for V/f control with
PG.
Frequency
Reference
+
+
Output
Frequency
Motor
Speed
-
+
C5-01/03
P
+
+
I
C5-02/04
C5-05
ASR Limit
Fig 6.41 ASR Structure for V/f control with PG
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
C5-01
C5-02
C5-03
C5-04
C5-05
C5-06
C5-07
C5-08
F1-07
ASR proportional (P) gain 1
ASR integral (I) time 1
ASR proportional (P) gain 2
ASR integral (I) time 2
ASR limit
ASR delay time
ASR switching frequency
ASR integral limit
Name
Integral value during accel/decel enable/disable
Factory
Setting
20.00 *
0.500 s *
20.00 *
0.500 s *
5.0%
0.004 s
0.0 Hz
400%
0
Change during
Operation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A No
A
A
A
A
No
No
No
A
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
No
* When the control method is changed, these values are reset to factory settings for the selected control mode. (The Closed Loop Vector control factory settings are given)
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
D
E
77
V/f control with/without PG selection
Speed control integral operation disable
ASR proportional gain switch over
Function
V/f
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Closed
Loop
Vector
No
Yes
Yes
V/f Control with/without PG Selection: “D”
• When one of the digital inputs is set to “D” this input can be used to switch over to normal V/f control and thereby to disable the ASR.
• The ASR is disabled when the multifunction input is ON.
Speed Control Integral Disable: “E”
• When one of the digital inputs is set to “E” this input can be used to switch the speed control between PI and P control.
• P control is active when the input is ON (Integral value is reset).
ASR Gain switching: “77”
• When one of the digital inputs is set to “77” this input can be used to switch between the ASR P gains set in C5-01 and C5-03.
• If the input is enabled C5-03 will be used. If the input is disabled C5-01 will be used.
6
637
6
ASR Gain and Integral Time Adjustments for Closed Loop Vector Control
General Procedure
1. Operate the motor at zero speed.
2. Increase C5-01 (ASR proportional gain 1) to a level where no oscillation in the motor speed occurs.
3. Decrease C5-04 (ASR integral time 2) to a level where no oscillation in the motor speed occurs.
4. Increase the speed and observe the motor speed. If oscillations occur at any speed the gain must be decreased and/or the integral time must be increased.
5. If the speed is stable at all speeds the adjustment is completed.
Fine Adjustments
When an even finer ASR adjustment is required, adjust the gain and integral time while observing the speed waveform using the analog output terminals FM and AM. The necessary parameter settings are shown in the following table.
Parameter
H4-01 Analog output selection (terminal FM)
H4-02 Analog output gain (terminal FM)
H4-03 Analog output bias (terminal FM)
H4-04 Analog output selection (terminal AM)
H4-05 Analog output gain (terminal AM)
H4-06 Analog output bias (terminal AM)
H4-07 Analog output 1 signal level selection
H4-08 Analog output 2 signal level selection
Setting
20
100%
0.0%
5
100%
0.0%
1
1
Explanation
Settings that allow multi-function analog output 1 to be used to monitor the frequency reference after soft starter.
Settings that allow multi-function analog output 2 to be used to monitor the motor speed.
This setting allows a 0 to ± 10 V signal range to be monitored.
The multi-function analog outputs have the following functions with these parameter settings.
•
•
Analog output 1 (terminal FM): Outputs frequency reference after the soft starter (Accel./decel. ramp and
S-curve) (0 to ±10 V).
Analog output 2 (terminal AM): Outputs actual motor speed (0 to ±10 V).
Adjusting ASR Proportional Gain 1 (C5-01)
This gain adjusts the responsiveness of the speed control (ASR). The responsiveness is increased when this setting is increased. Oscillation will occur if this setting is increased too much. See
for details.
Adjusting ASR Integral Time 1 (C5-02)
This parameter sets the speed control (ASR) integral time. Lengthening the integral time lowers the responsiveness and the speed accuracy when the load changes suddenly. Oscillation can occur if this setting value is too low. See
If overshooting occurs:
Decrease C5-01 and/or increase C5-02
Motor speed
If undershooting occurs:
Decrease C5-03 and/or increase C5-04
Fig 6.42 Influence of the ASR Gain and Bias
Time
638
Different Gain Settings for Low-speed and High-speed
Switch between low-speed and high-speed gain when oscillation occurs because of resonance with the mechanical system at low speed or high speed. The gain and integral time can be switched according to the motor speed, as shown in
P,I P=C5-01
I=C5-02
P=C5-03
I=C5-04
0
C5-07
Motor
Speed
Fig 6.43 Low-speed and High-speed Gain Settings
If C5-07 is set to 0, the gain in C5-01 and the integral time in C5-02 are used for the whole speed range.
Setting the Gain Switching Frequency (C5-07)
Set the switching frequency to about 80% of the motor operating frequency or the frequency at which oscillation occurs.
Low-speed Gain Adjustments (C5-03, C5-04)
Connect the actual load and adjust these parameters at zero-speed. Increase C5-03 (ASR gain 2) and decrease
C5-04 (ASR integral time 2) as long as no oscillation occurs.
High-speed Gain Adjustments (C5-01, C5-02)
Adjust these parameters at normal operating speed. Increase C5-01 (ASR gain 1) and decrease C5-02 (ASR integral time 1) as long as no oscillation occurs.
ASR Proportional Gain Switch Setting Using a Digital Input
When one of the digital inputs (H1-01 to H1-05) is set to 77, the input can be used to switch between C5-01
(ASR gain 1) and C5-03 (ASR gain 2). ASR gain 1 is used when the multi-function input is OFF, ASR gain 2 is used when the input is ON. This input has higher priority than the ASR switching frequency set in C5-07.
The gain is changed linearly using the integral time 1. See
for details.
ON ASR gain switch digital input
ASR gain
OFF
C5-01 value
C5-03 value
C5-02 C5-02
Fig 6.44 ASR Gain Switching by Digital Input
6
639
6
ASR Gain and Integral Time Adjustments for V/f control with PG
When using V/f control with PG, set the ASR gain and the integral time at E1-09 (minimum output frequency)
and E1-04 (maximum output frequency). See Fig 6.45
for details.
P,I
P=C5-01
I=C5-02
0
E1-09
Min. Output
Frequency
P=C5-03
I=C5-04
E1-04
Max. Output
Frequency
Motor Speed
Fig 6.45 Speed Control Gain Integral Time Adjustment for V/f Control with PG
Gain Adjustments at Minimum Output Frequency (C5-03 and C5-04)
Operate the motor at the minimum output frequency. Increase C5-03 (ASR proportional gain 2) and decrease
C5-04 (ASR integral time 2) as long as no oscillation occurs.
Monitor the Inverter's output current and verify that it is less than 50% of the Inverter rated current. If the output current exceeds 50% of the Inverter's rated current, decrease C5-03 and increase C5-04.
Gain Adjustments at Maximum Output Frequency (C5-01 and C5-02)
Operate the motor at the maximum output frequency. Increase C5-01 (ASR proportional gain 1) and decrease
C5-02 (ASR integral time 1) as long as no oscillation occurs.
Fine Adjustments
When an even finer ASR adjustment is required, adjust the gain while observing the motor speed. The adjustment procedure is the same as for vector control.
Using Integral Control during Acceleration and Deceleration (F1-07)
Enable integral operation during acceleration and deceleration (by setting F1-07 to 1) if the motor speed has to follow the frequency reference closely during acceleration and deceleration. Reduce the setting of C5-01 if overshooting occurs during acceleration, and reduce the setting of C5-03 and increase the setting of C5-04 if undershooting occurs when stopping. If overshooting and undershooting cannot be eliminated by adjusting only the gain and integral time, reduce the ASR limit value (C5-05).
640
Hunting-Prevention Function
The hunting-prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load. This function can be used in the V/f control modes only.
If high response has the priority to vibration suppression this function should be disabled (N1-01 = 0).
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
N1-01
N1-02
Name
Hunting-prevention function selection
Hunting-prevention gain
Factory
Setting
1
1.00
Change during
Operation
No
No
V/f
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A No
A No
Closed
Loop
Vector
No
No
Adjusting the Hunting-Prevention Gain (N1-02)
Normally it is not necessary to change this setting. Adjust the value under the following circumstances:
• If vibrations occur under light load condition increase the setting.
• If the motor stalls reduce the setting.
6
641
6
Stabilizing Speed (Automatic Frequency Regulator)
The speed feedback detection control (AFR) function controls the stability of the speed when a load is suddenly applied or removed. It calculates the amount of speed fluctuation using the torque current (Iq) feedback value and compensates the output frequency with the amount of fluctuation. f ref f out
I q
Fig 6.46 AFR Control Loop
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
N2-01
N2-02
N2-03
Name
Speed feedback detection control (AFR) gain
Speed feedback detection control (AFR) time constant
Speed feedback detection control (AFR) time constant 2
Factory
Setting
1.00
50 ms
750 ms
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
V/f
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
No A
No A
No A
Closed
Loop
Vector
No
No
No
Setting the AFR Gain (N2-01)
Normally there is no need to change this setting. If adjustments are necessary do the following:
If hunting occurs increase N2-01.
If the response is too low, decrease N2-01.
Adjust the setting by 0.05 at a time while checking the response.
Setting the AFR Time Constants 1 and 2 (N2-02, N2-03)
Normally the setting value of N2-02 is used as AFR time constant (T in Fig 6.46
). The setting value of N2-03 is used when:
L2-04 is set to 1 or 2 AND output frequency > 5 Hz AND a transient load change occurs (causing transient regeneration or overshoot at acceleration).
Generally there is no need to change the settings.
642
Machine Protection
Limiting Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function)
This function allows limitation of motor shaft torque independently for each of the four quadrants. The torque limit can be set as fixed value using parameters or as variable value using an analog input. The torque limit function can be used with Open Loop Vector and Closed Loop Vector control only.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name
L7-01
L7-02
L7-03
L7-04
L7-06
L7-07
Forward drive torque limit
Reverse drive torque limit
Forward regenerative torque limit
Reverse regenerative torque limit
Torque limit time constant
Torque limit operation during accel./decel.
* A setting value of 100% is equal to the motor rated torque.
Multi-function Output (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set
Value
30 During torque limit
Function
Factory
Setting
200%*
200%*
200%*
200%*
200 ms
0
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
No
No
No
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
No A
No A
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
No
No
V/f
No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
No Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Setting the Torque Limit Using Parameters
Using L7-01 to L7-04, four torque limits in the following directions can be set individually: Forward drive, reverse drive, forward regenerative and reverse regenerative (see
Output Torque
L7-01
L7-04
Reverse
Regenerative
Forward
Drive
Reverse
Drive
Output Speed
Forward
Regenerative
L7-03
L7-02
Fig 6.47 Torque Limit Parameters
Using a Digital Output to Signalize Operation at the Torque Limit
If a multifunction output is set for this function (H2-01 to H2-03 is set to “30”), the output is switched ON when the motor output torque reaches one of the torque limits.
6
643
6
Set the Torque Limit Value Using an Analog Input
The analog input A2 can be used to input several torque limits. The table below shows the possible analog input settings (H3-09) for the torque limit function.
Set
Value
10
11
12
15
Function
Positive torque limit
Negative torque limit
Regenerative torque limit
Positive/negative torque limit
100% of Contents
Motor rated torque
Motor rated torque
Motor rated torque
Motor rated torque
V/f
No
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
No Yes
No Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
The analog input terminal A2 signal level is factory-set as follows: 4 to 20 mA (i.e. if 20 mA are input the torque is limited to 100% of the motor rated torque).
shows the relationship between the torque lim-
its.
Output torque
Positive
Positive/negative torque limits
Forward torque limit
Regenerative torque limit
Reverse operation
Negative torque limit
No. of motor rotations
Forward operation
Regenerative torque limit
Positive/negative torque limits
Negative
Fig 6.48 Torque Limits using the Analog Input
Setting Torque Limits Using Parameters and an Analog Input Together
The following block diagram shows the relationship between torque limit using parameters (L7-01 to L7-04) and torque limit using the analog input A2.
Multi-function analog input Positive forward drive torque
Reverse positive regenerative torque
Terminal
A2
Forward negative regenerative torque
Forward torque limit
(set value = 10)
Negative torque limit
(set value = 11)
Regenerative torque limit (set value = 12)
Positive/negative torque limit (set value = 15)
Reverse drive reverse torque
Min: Minimum value priority circuit
Constants
Forward torque limit (L7-01)
Reverse torque limit (L7-02)
Forward regenerative torque limit (L7-03)
Reverse regenerative torque limit (L7-04)
175% of Inverter rated current
Fig 6.49 Torque Limit Using Parameters and an Analog Input Together
Forward torque limit
Reverse torque limit
Forward regenerative torque limit
Reverse regenerative torque limit
Enabling Integral Torque Limit Operation (L7-06 and L7-07)
In Open Loop Vector control an integral operation can be applied to the torque limit function (P-control is standard). This improves the torque limit responsiveness and smoothes the torque limit operation. To enable the integral operation set parameter L7-07 to 1. The integral time constant can be set in parameter L7-06.
644
Setting Precautions
•
•
•
•
When the output torque reaches the torque limit, control and compensation of the motor speed is disabled to prevent the output torque from exceeding the torque limit. The torque limit has the priority.
When using the torque limit for hoist applications, do not carelessly lower the torque limit value, as this may result in motor stalling.
When using an analog input for torque limit setting, an analog input value of 10 V/20 mA is equal to a torque limit of 100% of the motor rated torque. To raise the torque limit value at an analog input of 10 V/
20 mA for instance to 150% of the rated torque, set the input terminal gain to 150.0 (%). Adjust the gain for multi-function analog input terminal A2 using H3-10.
The torque limit accuracy is ±5% at an output frequency of 10 Hz or above. When output frequency is lower than 10 Hz, the accuracy is lowered.
Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation
Stall prevention during operation prevents the motor from stalling by automatically lowering the inverter output frequency when a transient overload occurs while the motor is operating at a constant speed.
Stall prevention during operation can be enabled in V/f control with/without PG only. If the Inverter output current continues to exceed the setting in parameter L3-06 for 100 ms or longer, the motor speed is reduced.
Enable or disable the stall prevention using parameter L3-05. Set the according deceleration times using C1-
02 (Deceleration time 1) or C1-04 (Deceleration Time 2).
If the Inverter output current reaches the set value in L3-06 – 2%, the motor will accelerate again to the set frequency.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L3-05
L3-06
Name
Stall prevention selection during running function selection
Stall prevention level during running
Factory
Setting
1
150% *
Change during
Operation
No
No
* The initial value when C6-01 is set to 0 is given. If C6-01 is set to 1 or 2, the initial value will be 120%.
V/f
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A No
A No
Closed
Loop
Vector
No
No
Changing Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input
If H3-09 (Analog Input A2 Function Selection) is set to 8 (stall prevention during operation level), the stall level during operation can be changed using the analog input A2.
In this case the function uses either the value from the multi-function analog input terminal A2 input level or the set value in parameter L3-06. The lower value of both will be used as stall prevention level.
Stall prevention level during operation
6
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 input level
Fig 6.50 Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input
If the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity or the motor stalls when operating at the factory settings, lower the stall prevention level during operation.
645
6
Motor Torque Detection
If an excessive load is applied to the machinery (overtorque) or the load drops suddenly (undertorque), an alarm signal can be output to one of the digital output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, or M5-M6.
To use the overtorque/undertorque detection function, set B, 17, 18, 19 (overtorque/undertorque detection
NO/NC) in one of the parameter H2-01 to H2-03 (digital output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and M5-M6 function selection).
Overtorque/undertorque is detected by:
• observing the output current in V/f control with or without PG (the inverter rated output current is equal to
100%).
• observing the torque reference value in Open Loop and Closed Loop Vector control (the motor rated torque is equal to 100%).
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L6-01
L6-02
L6-03
L6-04
L6-05
L6-06
Torque detection selection 1
Torque detection level 1
Torque detection time 1
Torque detection selection 2
Torque detection level 2
Torque detection time 2
Name
0
150%
0.1 s
0
150%
0.1 s
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
Multi-function Output (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set
Value
Function
18
19
B
17
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO
(NO contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is ON)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC
(NC contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is OFF)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO
(NO contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is ON)
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC
(NC contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is OFF)
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-09)
Set
Value
7
Function 100% of Contents
Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Level
Motor rated torque (vector control), Inverter rated current (V/f control)
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes Yes
646
L6-01 and L6-04 Set Values and Operator Display
The relationship between alarms displayed on the digital operator when overtorque or undertorque is detected, and the set values in L6-01 and L6-04, is shown in the following table.
Set
Value
6
7
4
5
8
2
3
0
1
Function
Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled.
Overtorque detection only with speed agree; operation continues (warning is output).
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues (warning is output).
Overtorque detection only with speed agree; output is stopped upon detection.
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; output is stopped upon detection.
Undertorque detection only with speed agree; operation continues (warning is output).
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues (warning is output).
Undertorque detection only with speed matching; output is stopped upon detection.
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output is stopped upon detection.
Operator Display
Overtorque/
Undertorque
Detection 1
Overtorque/
Undertorque
Detection 2
– –
OL3 flashes OL4 flashes
OL3 flashes
OL3 lights up
OL3 lights up
UL3 flashes
OL4 flashes
OL4 lights up
OL4 lights up
UL4 flashes
UL3 flashes
UL3 lights up
UL3 lights up
UL4 flashes
UL4 lights up
UL4 lights up
Timing Charts
show the timing charts for overtorque and undertorque detection.
Motor current (output torque)
L6-02 or L6-05
L6-03 or L6-06 L6-03 or L6-06
Overtorque detection 1 NO or overtorque detection 2 NO
*Overtorque detection switch off bandwidth is approximately 10% of the Inverter
rated output current (or motor rated torque).
Fig 6.51 Overtorque Detection
Motor current (output torque)
L6-02 or L6-05
6
L6-03 or
L6-06
L6-03 or
L6-06
Undertorque detection 1 NO or undertorque detection 2 NO
* Undertorque detection switch off bandwidth is approximately 10% of the Inverter
rated output current (or motor rated torque).
Fig 6.52 Undertorque Detection
647
Changing Overtorque and Undertorque Detection Levels Using an Analog Input
If parameter H3-09 (Analog Input A2 Function Selection) is set to 7 (overtorque/undertorque detection level),
).
Only the overtorque/undertorque detection level 1 can be changed using the analog input. Overtorque/undertorque detection level 2 cannot be changed by an analog input signal.
Detection level
6
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 input level
(4 mA)
Fig 6.53 Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Level Using an Analog Input
Motor Overload Protection
The motor can be protected from overload using the built-in electronic thermal overload relay function.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
No E2-01
E4-01
L1-01
L1-02
Motor rated current
Motor 2 rated current
Motor protection selection
Motor protection time constant
1.90 A
*
1.90 A
*
1
1.0 min
No
No
No
* Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter with 0.4 kW.)
V/f
Q
A
Q
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q Q Q
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
Q
A
Multi-Function Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set
Value
1F
Function
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Setting Motor Rated Current (E2-01 and E4-01)
Set the rated current value on the motor nameplate in parameters E2-01 (for motor 1) and E4-01 (for motor 2).
This set value is the base current for the internal thermal overload calculation.
648
Setting Motor Overload Protection Characteristics (L1-01)
Set the overload protection function in L1-01 according to the used motor.
The induction motor's cooling abilities vary with the motor type. Consequently, you must select the electronic thermal protection characteristics.
Set L1-01 to:
0: to disable the thermal motor protection function.
1: to enable the thermal motor protection for a fan cooled general purpose motor (self-cooled).
2: to enable the thermal motor protection for an inverter motor (externally cooled).
3: to enable the thermal motor protection for a special vector motor (externally cooled).
Setting Motor Protection Operation Time (L1-02)
The motor protection operation time is the time for that the motor can handle a 150% overload when it was running with the rated load before (i.e. operating temperature was reached before applying the 150% overload). Set the motor protection operation time in L1-02. The factory setting is 60 sec.
shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation time (L1-02 =
1.0 min., operation at 60 Hz, general-purpose motor characteristics, when L1-01 is set to 1)
Operating time (min.)
Cold start
Hot start
Motor current (%)
E2-01 is set to 100%
Fig 6.54 Motor Protection Operation Time
Setting Precautions
•
•
•
If multiple motors are connected to one inverter, set parameter L1-01 to 0 (disabled). To protect each of the motors, use a control circuit that switches off the inverter output when one of the motors overheats.
With applications where the power supply is often turned ON and OFF, there is a risk that the motor cannot be protected even if this parameter has been set to 1 (enabled), because the thermal value will be reset after inverter power supply switch off.
For safe overload tripping, set the value in parameter L1-02 to a low setting.
• When using a general-purpose motor (standard motor), the cooling ability will be lowered by f 1/4 (frequency). Consequently, a low output frequency may cause motor overload protection (OL1) to occur, even when the output current is below the rated current. If the motor is operated at the rated current at a low frequency, use a special motor which is externally cooled.
Setting a Motor Overload Pre-Alarm
If the motor overload protection function is enabled (i.e., L1-01 is set to a value different from 0) and you set
H2-01 to H2-03 (output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and M5-M6 function selection) to 1F (motor overload
OL1 pre-alarm), the motor overload pre-alarm will be output at. If the electronic thermal value reaches minimum 90% of the overload detection level, the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON.
6
649
6
Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs
This function provides a motor overheating protection using a thermistor (PTC characteristic – Positive Temperature Coefficient) which is built into the windings of each motor phase. The thermistor must be connected to an analog input.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L1-03
L1-04
L1-05
Name
Alarm operation selection during motor overheating
Motor overheating operation selection
Motor temperature input filter time constant
Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-09)
Set
Value
E
Function
Motor temperature input -
Factory
Setting
3
1
0.20 s
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
100% of Contents
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
PTC Thermistor Characteristics
shows the characteristics of the PTC thermistor temperature to the resistance value.
Resistance (Ohms)*
Class F Class H
Tr: Temperature threshold value
Temperature
* The shown resistance value is for one motor phase. Normally the 3 resistors are connected in series.
Fig 6.55 PTC Thermistor Temperature-Resistance Value Characteristics
Operation during Motor Overheating
The operation when the motor overheats can be selected using the parameters L1-03 and L1-04. A motor overheat detection filter time can be set in parameter in L1-05 to prevent wrong over heat faults.
If the motor temperature rises to the motor overheat pre-alarm level, an OH3 alarm is shown at the display and the operation is continued like set in L1-03.
If the operation is continued and the motor temperature rises further to the motor overheat detection level, an
OH4 fault is shown at the display and the operation is stopped.
650
Terminal Connection
The terminal connection for the motor overheat function is shown in
. The following points have to be
considered:
• Pin 2 of the DIP-switch S1 on the control terminal board has to be turned to OFF for A2 voltage input. The factory setting is ON (A2 current input).
•
•
Parameter H3-09 has to be set to “E”
Parameter H3-08 (analog input terminal A2 signal level) has to be set to 0 (0-10V input).
+V (15V, 20mA)
MA
MB
MC
Branch resistance
18kOhm*
PTC thermistor
A2 , 0-10V
AC
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
*1
The resistance value of 18 k Ω is only valid when a 3-phase PTC with the characteristic shown on the previous page is used.
Fig 6.56 Terminal Connections for Motor Overheating Protection
Limiting Motor Rotation Direction and Output Phase Rotation
If the motor reverse rotation is prohibited, a reverse run command will not be accepted, even if it is input. Use this setting for applications in which reverse motor rotation can cause problems (e.g., fans, pumps, etc.)
In V/F mode it is also possible to change the output phase order by changing a parameter. This is much easier and faster than changing the wiring if the motor rotational direction is wrong. If this function is used a prohibition of reverse direction is not possible.
Related Parameters
Parameter
Number
Name b1-04
Prohibition of reverse operation
Description
0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled
2: Output Phase Rotation
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
0 or 2 0 No
A
A
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
No No No
6
651
Automatic Restart
This section explains functions for continuing or automatically restarting inverter operation after a momentary power loss.
Restarting Automatically After Momentary Power Loss
If a temporary power loss occurs, the inverter can be restarted automatically to continue motor operation.
To restart the Inverter after the power has returned, set L2-01 to 1 or 2.
If L2-01 is set to 1, the inverter will restart as long as the power is recovered within the time set in L2-02. If the power loss time exceeds the time set in L2-02, an UV1 alarm (DC bus undervoltage) will be detected.
If L2-01 is set to 2, the inverter will restart, when the main power supply is recovered as long as the control power supply (i.e., power supply to the control circuit) is maintained. Consequently, alarm UV1 (DC bus undervoltage) will not be detected.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L2-01
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
L2-05
Min. baseblock (BB) time
Voltage recovery time
Name
Momentary power loss detection
Momentary power loss ride through time
Undervoltage (UV) detection level
Factory
Setting
0
0.1 s
*1
0.1 s
0.3 s *1
190 V
*2
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
No
* 1. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
* 2. These values are for a 200 V Class Inverter. For a 400 V Class Inverter, double the values.
V/f
A
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A A A
Setting Precautions
•
•
•
Error output signals are not output during momentary power loss recovery.
To continue Inverter operation after the power has been restored, make the settings so that RUN commands from the control main circuit terminal are stored even while power is suspended.
If the momentary power loss operation selection is set to 0 (Disabled), an alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will be detected when the momentary power loss exceeds 15 ms during operation.
6
652
Speed Search
The speed search function detect the actual speed of a motor that is coasting without control and restart it smoothly from that speed. It is also activated after momentary power loss detection when L2-01 is set to enabled.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
b3-01 b3-02 b3-03 b3-05 b3-10 b3-14
L2-03
L2-04
Speed search selection (current detection or speed calculation)
Speed search operating current (current detection)
Speed search deceleration time (current detection)
Speed search wait time (current detection or speed calculation)
Speed search compensation gain
Speed search rotation selection direction
Min. baseblock time
Voltage recovery time
Name
2 *1
120%
2.0 s
0.2 s
1.10
1
0.1 s *1
0.3 s *2
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
* 1. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open loop vector control factory settings are given.)
* 2. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
No
No
A
No
A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
No
No
No
A
No
No
A
A
Multi-function Digital Inputs
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Set
Value
Function
61
62
64
External search command 1
OFF: Speed search disabled (Start from lowest output frequency)
ON: Speed calculation: Calculates the motor speed, and starts search from calculated speed
Current detection: Starts speed search from maximum output frequency
External search command 2
OFF: Speed search disabled (Start from lowest output frequency)
ON: Speed calculation: Calculates the motor speed, and starts search from calculated speed,
same operation as external search command 1
Current detection: Starts speed search from set frequency (reference frequency when search
command was input).
External search command 3
OFF: Inverter is base blocked
ON: Inverter starts operation using speed search (same operation as speed search 2)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
6
653
6
Setting Precautions
•
•
•
•
•
•
When both external search commands 1 and 2 are set for the multi-function contact terminals, an OPE03
(invalid multi-function input selection) operation error will occur. Set either external search command 1 or external search command 2.
If speed search during startup is selected when using V/f control with PG or Closed Loop Vector control the unit will start from the frequency detected by PG.
If performing speed search using external search commands, design the control circuit so that the run command and external search command are both ON. These two commands must be kept on, at least for the time set in parameter L2-03.
If the Inverter output is equipped with a contactor, set the contactor operation delay time in the Speed
Search Wait Time (b3-05). The factory setting is 0.2 s. When not using a contactor, you can reduce the search time to 0.0 s. After waiting for the speed search wait time, the Inverter starts the speed search.
Parameter b3-02 (current detection level for search completion) is effective only when current detection speed search is selected. When the current falls below the detection level, the speed search is supposed to be as completed, and the motor accelerates or decelerates to the set frequency.
If an overcurrent (OC) is detected when using speed search after power recovery, lengthen the Minimum
Baseblock Time (L2-03).
Application Precautions for Speed Searches Using Estimated Speed
•
•
•
When using V/f control with or without a PG, always perform stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance before using speed searches based on calculated speeds.
When using Open Loop or Closed Loop Vector control, always perform rotational autotuning before using speed searches based on calculated speeds.
If the cable length between the motor and Inverter is changed after autotuning has been performed, perform stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance again.
Speed Search Selection
The speed search method can be selected using b3-01. If b3-01 is set to 0 the search method is speed calculation. It has to be activated by a multi-function input (H1 set to 61 or 62).
If b3-01 is set to 1, the search method is speed calculation too, but speed search is performed at every RUN command and has not to be activated by a multifunction input.
The same is valid for setting b3-01 to 2 or 3, only the search method is current detection instead of speed calculation.
Refer to the table below to see the differences of both search methods.
Search Name
Search Method
External Speed Search Command
Application Precautions
Speed Calculation
Calculates the motor speed when the search starts, and accelerates or decelerates from the calculated speed to the set frequency. The direction of motor rotation is also detected.
External search command 1 and external search command 2 become the same operation calculation of the motor speed and starting the search from the calculated speed.
Current Detection
Starts speed search from the frequency when the temporary power loss was detected, or from the highest frequency, and performs speed detection by watching the current level during the search.
External speed search command 1:
Starts speed search from the maximum output frequency.
External speed search command 2:
Starts speed search from the frequency reference set before the search command.
Cannot be used with multi-motor drives, with motors two or more sizes smaller than the Inverter capacity, and high-speed motors (higher than 130 Hz)
In control method without PG, the motor may accelerate suddenly with light loads.
654
Speed Calculation
Search at Startup
The time chart for when speed search at startup and speed search to multi-function input terminals is shown below.
OFF ON
Run command
Deceleration time set in b3-03
Set frequency reference
Starts using calculated speed
Output frequency b3-02
Output current
0.7 to 1.0 s *Lower limit set using Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05)
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.7*
Note:If the stopping method is set to coast to stop, and the run command turns ON in a short time, the operation may be the same as the search in case 2.
Fig 6.57 Speed Search at Startup (Calculated Speed)
Speed Search after Power Loss
• Loss Time shorter than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
AC power supply
Output frequency
ON OFF
Start using speed detected
Set frequency reference
6
Output current
10 ms
After AC power supply recovery, the inverter waits for the minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.75
Fig 6.58 Speed Search after Power Loss with Loss Time < L2-03
• Loss Time longer than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
AC power supply
Output frequency
ON OFF Start using speed detected
Set frequency reference
Output current
10 ms
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
Speed Search Wait Time
(b3-05)
Note: If the frequency immediately before the baseblock is low or the power supply break time is long, operation may be the same as the search in case 1.
Fig 6.59 Speed Search after Power Loss with Loss Time > L2-03
655
6
Current Detection
Speed Search at Startup
The time chart when speed search at startup or external speed search command is selected is shown below.
Run command
OFF ON
Maximum output frequency or set frequency
Output frequency
Deceleration time set in b3-03
Set frequency reference b3-02
Output current
Minimum baseblock time*
(L2-03)
* Lower limit is set using Speed Search Time (b3-05).
Fig 6.60 Speed Search at Startup (Current Detection)
Speed Search after Power Loss
• Loss time shorter than minimum baseblock time
AC power supply
Output frequency
ON OFF
Output frequency before power loss
Deceleration time set in b3-03
Set frequency reference b3-02 speed search operating current
Output current
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) *1
*1Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency immediately before baseblock.
*2After AC power supply recovery, the inverter waits for the minimum
Speed Search Wait Time (b2-03).
*2
Fig 6.61 Speed Search after Power Loss Time < L2-03
• Loss time longer than minimum baseblock time
AC power supply
ON OFF
Output frequency before power loss
Deceleration speed set in b3-03
Set frequency reference
Output frequency b3-02
Speed search operating time
Output current
Speed search wait time (b3-05)
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
Fig 6.62 Speed Search after Power Loss with Loss Time > L2-03
656
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed when the Frequency Reference is Lost
The frequency reference loss detection function detects a loss of the frequency reference value. If an analog frequency reference source is selected, a frequency reference loss is detected, when the reference value drops over 90% in 400 ms or less.
The operation after a reference loss can be set in parameter L5-01 as follows:
• L5-01=0 The inverter operation is stopped.
• L5-01=1The operation is continued at reduced speed using the set value in parameter L4-06 as frequency reference value.
When an error signal during frequency reference loss shall be output externally, set H2-01 to H2-03 (multifunction contact output terminal M1-M2, M3-M4, and M5-M6 function selection) to C (frequency reference lost).
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L4-05
L4-06
Name
Operation when frequency reference is missing
Output frequency adjustment after freq. reference loss
Multi-function Contact Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set Value
C Frequency reference loss
Function
Factory
Setting
0
80%
Change during
Operation
No
No
V/f
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
6
657
6
Restarting Operation After Transient Error (Auto Restart Function)
If an Inverter error occurs during operation, the Inverter will perform self-diagnosis. If no error is detected, the
Inverter will automatically restart. This is called the auto restart function.
Set the number of auto restarts in parameter L5-01.
The auto restart function can be applied to the following errors.
• OC (Overcurrent)
• GF (Ground fault)
• PUF (DC bus fuse blown)
• OV (Main circuit overvoltage)
• UV1 (Main Circuit Undervoltage, Main Circuit MC Operation Failure)
*
• PF (Main circuit voltage fault)
• LF (Output phase failure)
• RH (Braking resistor overheated)
• RR (Braking transistor error)
• OL1 (Motor overload)
• OL2 (Inverter overload)
• OH1 (Motor overheat)
• OL3 (Overtorque 1)
• OL4 (Overtorque 2)
* When L2-01 is set to 1 or 2 (continue operation during momentary power loss)
If an error that is not listed above occurs, the protection function will operate and the auto restart function will not work.
Auto Restart External Outputs
To output auto restart signals externally, set H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function contact output terminals M1-M2,
M3-M4, and M5-M6 function selection) to 1E (auto restart).
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L5-01
L5-02
Number of auto restart attempts
Auto restart operation selection
Name
Multi-function Contact Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Function Set Value
1E Automatic restart enabled
Factory
Setting
0
0
Change during
Operation
No
No
V/f
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Application Precautions
The number of auto restarts counter is reset under the following conditions:
• After auto restart, normal operation has continued for 10 minutes.
•
•
After the protection operation has been performed and an error reset has been input.
After the power supply is turned OFF, and then ON again.
658
Inverter Protection
Overheating Protection for an Inverter-Mounted Braking Resistor
This function provides overheat protection for inverter-mounted braking resistors (Model: ERF-150WJ ).
When overheating of a mounted braking resistor is detected, an fault RH (mounted braking resistor overheating) is displayed on the Digital Operator, and the motor coasts to stop.
The fault can be output using one of the multi-function contact outputs as well. Therefore one of the parameters H2-01 to H2-03 has to be set to D.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L8-01
Name
Protection selection for internal DB resistor (Type ERF)
Multi-function Contact Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set Value
D
Function
Braking resistor fault (ON: Resistor overheats or brake transistor fault)
Factory
Setting
0
Change during
Operation
No
V/f
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Yes
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
INFO
The most likely causes of RH (Mounted braking resistor overheating) faults are that the deceleration time is too short or that the motor regeneration energy is too large. In these cases, lengthen the deceleration time or replace the Braking Resistor with one with a higher braking capacity.
IMPORTANT
This function is not applicable for protecting external braking resistors. When external braking resistors are used together with the internal braking chopper, L8-01 should be set to 0 to disable the internal braking resistor protection.
6
659
6
Inverter Overheat Protection
The Inverter is protected against overheating using a thermistor that detects the heatsink temperature.
When the overheat temperature level is reached the inverter output is switched off.
To prevent a suddenly and unexpected stop of the inverter due to an over temperature, an overheating prealarm can be output. The temperature level for that pre-alarm can be set in parameter L8-02. Using parameter
L8-03 the inverter operation when an over temperature occurs can be selected.
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when the heatsink temperature exceeds the overheat pre-alarm level set in L8-02.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L8-02
L8-03
Name
Overheat pre-alarm level
Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm operation selection
Multifunction Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Function Set Value
20 Inverter overheat (OH)
Factory
Setting
95
3
°C
Change during
Operation
No
No
V/f
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Input Open Phase Protection
For the Input Phase Loss Detection the drive monitors the DC bus ripple. The drive integrates this ∆V value over 10 scans (approximately 10 seconds). If the integrated ∆V value of any consecutive ten scan range is greater than the voltage determined by multiplying L8-06 times the drives rated OV Trip point (400Vdc/
800Vdc), a PF fault will occur and the Drive will coast to stop
Phase Loss Fault
Signal
DC Bus
Voltage
L8-06
10 seconds t
Fig 6.63 Input Phase Loss Detection
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name
L8-05 Input open-phase protection selection
Generally it is not recommended to disable this function.
Factory
Setting
1
Change during
Operation
No
V/f
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
660
Output Open Phase Protection
This function detects an open output phase by comparing the output current value of each phase with an internal set output open phase detection level (5% of inverter rated current). The detection will not work when the output frequency is below 2% of the base frequency (E1-13).
Three settings are available:
• L8-07=0, no output open phase detection
•
•
L8-07=1, the loss of one phase is detected only
L8-07=2, the loss of 2 or 3 phases is detected as well
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L8-07
Name
Output open-phase protection selection
Factory
Setting
0
Change during
Operation
No
V/f
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
The function should be disabled if the motor capacity is very low compared to the inverter capacity. Otherwise wrong output open phase errors might be detected.
Ground Fault Protection
This function detects the earth leakage current by calculating the sum of the three output currents. Normally it should be 0. If the earth leakage current gets too high, the inverter output will be switched off and a GF fault is shown on the display. The fault contact is activated.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name
L8-09 Ground protection selection
It is not recommended to disable this function.
Factory
Setting
1
Change during
Operation
No
V/f
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
Cooling Fan Control
This function controls the fan which is mounted to the inverters heatsink.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L8-10
L8-11
Cooling fan control selection
Cooling fan control delay time
Name
Factory
Setting
0
60 s
Change during
Operation
No
No
V/f
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
6
661
6
Selecting the Cooling Fan Control
Using parameter L8-10 two modes can be selected:
0:The fan is ON only when the inverter output is ON, i.e. a voltage is output. This is the factory setting.
1:The fan is ON whenever the inverter power supply is switched ON.
If L8-10 is set to 0, the turn OFF delay time for the fan can be set in parameter L8-11. After a stop command the inverter waits for this time before switching OFF the cooling fan. The factory setting is 60 sec.
Setting the Ambient Temperature
At high ambient temperatures an output current derating has to be considered. The derating depends on the ambient temperature and the protective structure of the inverter. The ambient temperature derating curve is shown in
. To ensure a safe inverter protection at high ambient temperatures, always set parameter
L8-15 to the actual ambient temperature.
100
80
60
40
20
0
0
IP00
IP20
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
L8-12 Ambient temperature
10 20 30
Temperature (°C)
40 50
Fig 6.64 Ambient Temperature Derating Curve
60
Name
Factory
Setting
45 °C
Change during
Operation
No
V/f
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
IMPORTANT
Since the inverter has no IP00/IP20 detection, at IP20 units the ambient temperature value in L8-12 has to be set 5° higher than the actual ambient temperature.
662
OL2 Characteristics at Low Speed
At output frequencies below 6 Hz the overload capability of the inverter is lower than at higher speeds, i.e. an
OL2 fault (inverter overload) may occur even if the current is below the normal OL2 current level (see Fig.
6.61
).
OL2 Detection Level*
150% (120%)* for 1 min.
75% (60%)* for 1 min.
Output
Speed
-6 Hz 0 Hz 6 Hz
* Note that the OL2 level depends on the setting of C6-01. The values are given for
Heavy Duty. The values in parentheses are for Normal Duty 1 or 2.
Fig 6.65 OL2 Alarm Level at Low Frequencies
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name
L8-15 OL2 characteristics selection at low speeds
Generally it is not recommended to disable this function.
Factory
Setting
1
Change during
Operation
No
V/f
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
6
663
6
Input Terminal Functions
Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and
Control Circuit Terminals
The Inverter run command inputs and frequency reference inputs can be switched over between Local and
Remote.
•
•
Local:The digital operator is used as frequency reference and run command source.
Remote:The frequency reference and run command source can be set in the parameters b1-01 and b1-02.
If any input from H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) has been set to 1 (local/ remote selection), this input can be used to switch over between local and remote.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
b1-01 b1-02
Name
Reference selection
RUN command source selection
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set Value
1
Function
Local/Remote selection (ON: Operator, OFF: b1-01/02)
Factory
Setting
1
1
Change during
Operation
No
No
V/f
Q
Q
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Q Q
Q Q
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q
Q
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Yes
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
INFO
Local/Remote switching can also be performed using the LOCAL/REMOTE key on the Digital Operator. When the Local/Remote function has been set for one external terminal, the LOCAL/REMOTE key function on the Digital Operator will be disabled.
Blocking the Inverter Output (Baseblock Commands)
Using a baseblock command the inverter output can be stopped immediately. In this case the motor will start coasting. If the baseblock command is cleared, the inverter output operation is resumed.
If speed search is enabled, the inverter detects the motor speed and the operation is resumed from the detected speed.
If speed search is disabled, the operation is resumed from the frequency reference which was active before the baseblock command.
To use the baseblock function one of the digital inputs must be set for baseblock, i.e. one of the parameters
H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) must be set to 8 or 9 (Baseblock command
NO/NC).
664
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
8
9
Function
External baseblock NO (Normally Open contact: Baseblock when ON)
External baseblock NC (Normally Closed contact: Baseblock when OFF)
V/f
Yes
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Yes
Timing Chart
The timing chart when using a baseblock command is shown in
Forward operation/Stop
Baseblock command
Input Cleared
Frequency reference
Speed search or operation with the previous frequency reference
Output frequency
Coast to a stop
Fig 6.66 Baseblock Commands
IMPORTANT
When a contactor between inverter and motor is used, always perform a base block command before opening the contactor.
OH2 (Overheat) Alarm Signal Input
Set
Value
B OH2 Alarm input (ON: OH2 is displayed)
Function
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
If a digital input is programmed for this function (H1=B) an OH2 alarm message can be displayed on the display by turning this input to ON. The fault contact will not be operated.
Multifunction Analog Input A2 Disable/Enable
Set
Value
C
Function
Analog Input A2 enable/disable (ON: Enable)
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
If a digital input is programmed for this function (H1=C) the analog input A2 can be enabled or disabled by switching the digital input ON/OFF (ON – Analog Input A2 enabled).
6
665
6
Drive Enable/Disable
Set
Value
6A Enable/Disable drive (ON: drive enabled)
Function
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
If a digital input is programmed for this function (H1switching the digital input ON/OFF (ON – Drive enabled).
=6A) the drive can be enabled or disabled by
If the input is switched OFF while a RUN command is active the inverter will stop using the stopping method set in b1-03.
Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration
Ramp Hold)
•
•
•
•
•
A multi-function input can be used to pause the acceleration or deceleration and maintain (hold) the output frequency. To program one digital input for this function one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 has to be set to 6A.
The acceleration/deceleration is hold when the input is turned ON.
The acceleration/deceleration is restarted when the acceleration/deceleration ramp hold input is turned
OFF.
The motor will be stopped if a stop command is input while the acceleration/deceleration ramp hold input is ON.
When parameter d4-01 (the frequency reference hold function selection) is set to 1, the held frequency will be stored in memory. This stored frequency will be retained as frequency reference even after a power loss and the motor will be restarted at this frequency when a run command is input again.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
d4-01
Name
Frequency reference hold function selection
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set Value
A
Function
Acceleration/deceleration ramp hold (ON: hold is active)
Factory
Setting
0
Change during
Operation
No
V/f
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
666
Timing Chart
The timing chart when using Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold commands is shown in
Power supply
Forward/Stop OFF ON
Acceleration/Deceleration
Ramp Hold
Frequency reference
OFF ON OFF ON
OFF
OFF ON
Output frequency
Hold Hold
Fig 6.67 Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold
Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals (UP/
DOWN)
Using the UP and DOWN commands the frequency references can be raised or lowered by switching a pair of digital inputs.
To use this function, set two of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to 10 (UP command) and 11 (DOWN command). Be sure to allocate two terminals so that the UP and
DOWN commands are used as a pair. Otherwise an OPE03 alarm will be displayed.
The table below shows the possible combinations of the UP and DOWN commands and the corresponding operation.
Hold Operation
Up command
Down command
Acceleration
ON
OFF
Deceleration
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
The change of the output frequency depends on the acceleration and deceleration times. Be sure to set b1-02
(Run command selection) to 1 (Control circuit terminal).
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set Value
10
11
Up command
Down command
Function
V/f
Yes
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Yes
Precautions
Setting Precautions
If multi-function input terminals S3 to S7 are set as follows, operation error OPE03 (Invalid multi-function input selection) will occur:
•
•
Only either the UP command or DOWN command has been set.
UP/DOWN commands and Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold have been allocated at the same time.
6
667
6
Application Precautions
• Frequency references which use the UP/DOWN commands are limited by the frequency reference upper and lower limits set in parameters d2-01 to d2-03. In this case the value from the input A1 becomes the frequency reference lower limit. If using a combination of the frequency reference from terminal A1 and the frequency reference lower limit set in either parameter d2-02 or d2-03, the larger limit value will become the frequency reference lower limit.
•
•
•
If the UP/DOWN commands are used as frequency reference and the run command is input the inverter accelerates to the frequency reference lower limit which is set in d2-02.
When using UP/DOWN commands, multi-step operations are disabled.
When d4-01 (Frequency Reference Hold Function Selection) is set to 1, the frequency reference value using the UP/DOWN functions is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF. When the power supply is turned ON and the run command is input, the motor accelerates to the frequency reference that has been stored. To reset (i.e., to 0 Hz) the stored frequency reference, turn ON the UP or DOWN command while the run command is OFF.
Connection Example and Timing Chart
The time chart and settings example when the UP command is allocated to the digital input terminal S3, and the DOWN command is allocated to terminal S4, are shown below.
Name Parameter
H1-01
H1-02
Multi-function input (terminal S3)
Multi-function input (terminal S4)
Set Value
10
11
0 to 10 V analog signal
Inverter
S1
Forward operation/
Stop
S2
Reverse operation/
Stop
S3 Up command
S4 Down command
SN
Digital input neutral
A1 Frequency reference lower limit
AC
Fig 6.68 Connection Example when UP/DOWN Commands Are Allocated
668
Output frequency
Upper limit (d2-01)
Accelerates to lower limit
Lower limit (d2-02)
Same frequency
Forward operation/stop
UP command
DOWN command
Reference frequency reset
Speed agree*
Power supply
* The speed agree signal turns ON when the motor is not accelerating/decelerating while the run command is ON.
Fig 6.69 UP/DOWN Commands Timing Chart
Adding/Subtracting a Fixed Speed to an Analog Reference (Trim Control)
The trim control function adds or subtracts the value of parameter d4-02 to/from an analog frequency reference.
To use this function, set two of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact terminal inputs S3 to
S7 function selection) to 1C (Trim Control Increase command) and 1D (Trim Control Decrease command). Be sure to allocate two terminals so that the Trim Control Increase command and Trim Control Decrease command are used as a pair. Otherwise an OPE03 alarm will be displayed.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
d4-02 Trim control speed limits
Name
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Function Set Value
1C
1D
Trim control increase
Trim control decrease
Factory
Setting
10%
Change during
Operation
No
V/f
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
V/f
Yes
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Yes
6
669
6
Trim Control Increase/Decrease Command and Frequency Reference
The frequency references using Trim Control Increase/Decrease command ON/OFF operations are shown below.
Frequency Reference
Set Frequency
Reference
+ d4-02
Set Frequency
Reference
- d4-02
HOLD
Trim Control Increase Command
Terminal
Trim Control Decrease Command Terminal
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Application Precautions
•
•
•
Trim Control Increase/Decrease command is enabled when speed reference > 0 and the speed reference source is an analog input (A1 or A2).
When the (analog frequency reference value - d4-02) < 0, the frequency reference is set to 0.
If only one of the Trim Control Increase command or Trim Control Decrease command has been set for a digital input terminal, operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selected) will occur.
670
Hold Analog Frequency Using User-set Timing
When one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) is set to 1E
(sample/hold analog frequency command), the analog frequency reference will be held from 100 ms after the terminal is turned ON, and operation will continue at that frequency.
The analog value 100 ms after the command is turned ON is used as the frequency reference.
Sample/hold command
Analog input
Frequency reference
Fig 6.70 Sample/Hold Analog Frequency
Related Parameters
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set Value
1E
Function
Analog frequency reference sample / hold
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Precautions
When setting and executing sample and hold for analog frequency references, observe the following precautions.
Setting Precautions
When using sample/hold of analog frequency reference, you cannot use the following commands at the same time. Otherwise operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selection) will occur.
•
•
•
Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command
UP/DOWN command
Trim Control Increase/Decrease command
Application Precautions
• When performing sample/hold of analog frequency reference, be sure to close the digital input for 100 ms or more. If the sample/hold time is less than 100 ms, the frequency reference will not be held.
• The frequency reference value that is held will be deleted when the power supply is turned OFF.
6
671
6
672
Switching Operation Source to Communication Option Card
The source of frequency reference and RUN command can be switched between a Communication option card and the sources selected in b1-01 and b1-02. Set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital inputs S3 to S7 function selection) to 2 to enable operation source switch over.
If a RUN command is active, the switch over will not be accepted.
Related Parameters
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set Value
2
Function
V/f
Operation source selection: Option Card/ Inverter (ON: Inverter settings in b1-01 and b1-
02, OFF: Option Card)
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes Yes
Setting Precautions
To use the operation source switching function make the following settings:
• Set b1-01 (frequency reference source) to a value different from 3 (option card).
•
•
Set b1-02 (RUN command source) to a value different from 3 (option card).
Set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-02 to 2.
Jog Frequency with Direction Commands (FJOG/RJOG)
The FJOG/RJOG function operates the inverter at the jog frequency. It can be activated by using the terminal
ON/OFF operation. When using the FJOG/RJOG commands, there is no need to input the RUN command.
To use this function, set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to 12 (FJOG command) or 13 (RJOG command).
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
d1-17 Jog frequency reference
Name
Multi-Function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set Value
12
13
Function
FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17)
RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17)
Factory
Setting
6.00 Hz
Change during
Operation
Yes
V/f
Q
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Q Q
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q
V/f
Yes
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Yes
Application Precautions
•
•
Jog frequencies using FJOG and RJOG commands have the priority over other frequency references.
When both FJOG command and RJOG commands are ON for 500 ms or longer at the same time, the
Inverter stops according to the setting in b1-03 (stopping method selection).
Stopping the Inverter on External Device Errors (External Error Function)
The external error function activates the error contact output and stops the Inverter operation. Using this function the inverter operation can be stopped on peripheral devices break down or other errors. The digital operator will display EFx (External error [input terminal Sx]). The x in EFx shows the number of the terminal at which the external error signal is input. For example, if an external error signal is input to terminal S3, EF3 will be displayed.
To use the external error function, set one of the values 20 to 2F in one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection).
Select the value to be set in H1-01 to H1-05 from a combination of any of the following three conditions.
• Signal input level from peripheral devices
•
•
External error detection method
Operation after external error detection
The following table shows the relationship between the combinations of conditions and the set value in H1-
.
Set
Value
2C
2D
2E
2F
28
29
2A
2B
24
25
26
27
20
21
22
23
Input Level
(See Note *1)
NO Contact
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NC Contact
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Error Detection Method (See
Note *2)
Constant
Detection
Detection
During
Operation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Decelerate to
Stop (Error)
Coast to Stop
(Error)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Operation During Error Detection
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Emergency
Stop (Error)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Continue
Operation
(Warning)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
* 1. Sets the input level at which errors are detected. (NO contact: External error when ON; NC contact: External error when OFF).
* 2. Set the detection method to detect errors using either constant detection or detection during operation.
Constant detection: Detects while power is supplied to the Inverter.
Detection during operation: Detects only during Inverter operation.
6
673
6
Output Terminal Functions
The digital multifunction outputs can be set for several functions using the H2-01 to H2-03 parameters (terminal M1 to M6 function selection). These functions are described in the following section.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
H2-01
H2-02
H2-03
Name
Terminal M1-M2 function selection
Terminal M3-M4 function selection
Terminal M5-M6 function selection
Factory
Setting
0
1
2
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A A
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
During Run (Setting: 0) and During Run 2 (Setting: 37)
During Run (Setting: 0)
OFF
ON
The Run command is OFF and there is not output voltage.
The Run command is ON or a voltage is being output.
During Run 2 (Setting: 37)
OFF
ON
The inverter is not outputting a frequency. (Baseblock, DC injection braking or stopped)
The inverter is outputting a frequency.
These outputs can be used to indicate the inverter’s operating status.
Run command
Baseblock command
OFF ON
OFF ON
Output frequency
During run 1 output
During run 2 output
OFF ON
OFF ON
Fig 6.71 Timing Chart for “During RUN” Output
Zero Speed (Setting: 1)
OFF
ON
The output frequency is higher than the zero speed level (b2-01).
The output frequency is lower than the zero speed level (b2-01).
Output frequency Zero speed level (b2-01)
Zero-speed output
OFF ON
Fig 6.72 Timing Chart for Zero-speed
674
Inverter Operation Ready (Setting: 6)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output will be switched ON when the initialisation of the inverter at startup has finished without any faults.
During DC Bus Undervoltage (Setting: 7)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON as long as a DC bus undervoltage is detected.
During Baseblock (Setting: 8)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON as long as the inverter output is base blocked.
Frequency Reference Source Selection (Setting: 9)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is ON when the digital operator is selected as frequency reference source. If any other frequency reference is selected the output is switched OFF.
Run Command Selection Status (Setting: A)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when the digital operator is selected as RUN command source. If any other RUN command source is selected output is switched OFF.
Fault Output (Setting: E)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when any fault different from CPF00 and CPF01 occurs. The output is also not switched at minor faults. (Refer to
fault list.)
Minor Fault Output (Setting: 10)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when a minor fault occurs
(refer to page 7-9 pp. for an alarm list).
Fault Reset Command Active (Setting: 11)
If a multifunction output is set for this function the output is switched ON as long as a fault reset command is input at one of the digital inputs.
During Reverse Run (Setting: 1A)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON whenever a RUN command in reverse direction is active. The contact will also be ON during DC injection, Braking and Base Block.
It will not work when a forward RUN command is input.
During Base Block 2 (Setting: 1B)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched OFF as long as a Baseblock command is input at a multifunction input.
6
675
6
Motor 2 Selection (Setting: 1C)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when motor 2 is selected.
During Regenerative Operation (Setting: 1D)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when the motor works regenerative, i.e. when energy is fed back to the inverter.
During Run 2 (Setting: 37)
When a multifunction output is set to this function the output is switched ON when a frequency is output. It will be switched OFF during Baseblock, DC injection braking or Stop.
Drive Enabled (Setting: 38)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when the drive is enabled.
The drive can be enabled or disabled using a digital multifunction input.
676
Monitor Parameters
Using the Analog Monitor Outputs
This section explains the usage of the internal analog monitor outputs.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
H4-01
H4-02
H4-03
H4-04
H4-05
H4-06
H4-07
H4-08
Name
Monitor selection (terminal FM)
Gain (terminal FM)
Bias (terminal FM)
Monitor selection (terminal AM)
Gain (terminal AM)
Bias (terminal AM)
Analog output 1 signal level selection (FM)
Analog output signal 2 level selection (AM)
2
100%
0.0%
3
50%
0.0%
0
0
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
V/f
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
Q
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
Q Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
Q
A
A
Selecting Analog Monitor Items
Some of the digital operator monitor items (U1 [status monitor]) can be output at the multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC. Refer to
page 5-64, Status Monitor Parameters: U1 and set the
parameter number of U1 group ( part of U1) for the parameters H4-01 or H4-04.
Adjusting the Analog Monitor Items
Adjust the output current/voltage for multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC using the gain and bias in H4-02, H4-03, H4-05, and H4-06.
The gain sets the analog output voltage/current value which is equal to 100% of the monitor item.
The bias sets the analog output voltage/current value which is equal to 0% of the monitor item.
Note that the maximum output voltage/current is 10V/20mA. A voltage/current higher than these values can not be output.
6
677
6
Adjustment Examples
The influence of the settings of gain and bias on the analog output channel is shown on three examples in
Fig 6.69
.
Output voltage/ current
Gain: 170%
Bias: 30%
10V
Gain: 100%
Bias: 0%
3V/8.8mA
0V
Gain: 0%
Bias: 100%
100%
Monitor item
(e.g. Output Frequency)
Fig 6.73 Monitor Output Adjustment
Switching Analog Monitor Signal Levels
The values of some monitor items can be both, positive or negative. If these items shall be output at an analog output, the signal level should be set to –10V to +10V (H4-07/08 = 1). Negative values will be output as negative voltage (–10V to 0) and positive values will be output as positive voltage (0 to +10V).
Both analog outputs can create a 4-20 mA current signal as well. Therefore the parameters H4-07 and H4-08 have to be set to 2. Additionally the jumper CN15 has to be set to current output for each channel. Refer to
page 2-23, Jumper CN15 and DIP Switch S1
for details about the jumper setting.
Using the Pulse Train Monitor Output
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
H6-06
H6-07
Pulse train monitor selection
Pulse train monitor scaling
Name
Factory
Setting
2
1440 Hz
Change during
Operation
Yes
Yes
V/f
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
Selecting Pulse Monitor Items
Some of the digital operator monitor items (U1 [status monitor]) can be output at pulse monitor terminal
MP-AC. Refer to
page 5-64, Status Monitor Parameters: U1 and set the
part of U1 (Status monitor) for H6-06.
Adjusting the Pulse Monitor Items
To adjust the pulse frequency output scaling, set the pulse output frequency which is equal to 100% of the monitor item in parameter H6-07.
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0, to output the frequency synchronous with the Inverter's U-phase output frequency.
678
Application Precautions
When using the pulse monitor output, connect a peripheral device according to the following load conditions.
If the load conditions are different, there is a risk of characteristic insufficiency or damage to the inverter.
Output Voltage (Isolated)
VRL (V)
+5 V min.
+8 V min.
+10 V min.
Load Impedance
1.5 k Ω min.
3.5 k Ω min.
10 k Ω min.
Load Impedance
External Power Supply
(V)
Max. Current
12 VDC±10%,
15 VDC±10%
16 mA
External power supply
Load impedance
Sinking current
6
679
Individual Functions
Using MEMOBUS Communications
Serial communications with a Programmable Logic Controls (PLCs) or similar devices can be performed using the MEMOBUS protocol.
MEMOBUS Communications Configuration
MEMOBUS communications are configured using 1 master (PLC) and a maximum of 31 slaves. Serial communications between master and slave are normally started by the master and the slaves respond.
The master performs serial communications with only one slave at a time. Consequently, you must set the address of each slave before, so that the master can perform serial communications using that address. A slave that receives a command from the master performs the specified function and sends a response to the master.
PLC
Inverter Inverter Inverter
6
Fig 6.74 Example of Connections between PLC and Inverter
Communications Specifications
The MEMOBUS communications specifications are shown in the following table.
Item
Interface
Communications Cycle
Communications Parameters
Communications Protocol
Number of Connectable Units
Specifications
RS-422, RS-485
Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization)
Baud rate: Select from 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600 and 19,200 bps.
Data length:
Parity:
Stop bits:
MEMOBUS
31 units max.
8 bits fixed
Select from even, odd, or none.
1 bit fixed
680
Communications Connection Terminal
The MEMOBUS communications use the following terminals: S+, S-, R+, and R-. Enable the terminating resistance by turning ON pin 1 of switch S1 for the last Inverter (seen from the PLC) only.
RS-422A or RS-485
O
F
F
S1
1
2
S1
Terminating resistance (1/2W, 110 Ohms)
Fig 6.75 Communications Terminal Connection
Terminating resistance
IMPORTANT
1. Separate the communications cables from the main circuit cables and other wiring and power cables.
2. Use shielded cables for the communications cables, and use proper shield clamps
3. When using RS-485 communications, connect S+ to R+, and S- to R-, on the Inverter exterior. See picture below.
Procedure for Communicating with the PLC
Use the following procedure to perform communications with the PLC.
1. Turn OFF the power supply and connect the communications cable between the PLC and the Inverter.
2. Turn ON the power supply.
3. Set the required communications parameters (H5-01 to H5-07) using the Digital Operator.
4. Turn OFF the power supply, and check that the Digital Operator display has completely disappeared.
5. Turn ON the power supply once again.
6. Perform communications with the PLC.
6
681
6
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name b1-01 b1-02
H5-01
H5-02
H5-03
H5-04
H5-05
H5-06
H5-07
Reference source selection
RUN command Source Selection
Station address
Baud rate selection
Communications parity selection
Communications error detection selection
Communications error detection selection
Send wait time
RTS control ON/OFF
* Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications.
3
1
3
0
1
1
1F *
5 ms
1
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
A
A
A
Q
Q
A
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Q Q
Q
A
Q
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q
Q
A
A
A
MEMOBUS communications can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1-01 and b1-02.
•
•
Monitoring operation status of the inverter
Setting and reading parameters
•
•
Resetting errors
Inputting multi-function commands. (An OR operation is performed between the multi-function commands input from the PLC and commands input from digital input terminals S3 to S7.)
Message Format
In MEMOBUS communications, the master sends commands to the slave, and the slave responds. The message format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below, and the length of data packets depends on the command (function) content.
Slave address
Function code
Data
Error check
The space between messages must meet the following conditions:
PLC to Inverter
Command message
Inverter to PLC
Response message
PLC to Inverter
Command message
Time (Seconds)
24 bits long
H5-06 setting 24 bits long
Fig 6.76 Message Spacing
5 ms min.
Slave Address
Set the Inverter address from 0 to 31. If you set 0, commands from the master will be received by all slaves.
(Refer to “Broadcast Data” on the following pages.)
682
Function Code
The function code specifies commands. The three function codes shown in the table below are available.
Command Message Response Message
Function Code
(Hexadecimal)
Function
Min. (Bytes) Max. (Bytes) Min. (Bytes) Max. (Bytes)
03H
08H
10H
Read memory register contents
Loop back test
Write multiple memory registers
8
8
11
8
8
41
7
8
8
37
8
8
Data
Configure consecutive data by combining the memory register address (test code for a loop back address) and the data the register contains. The data length changes depending on the command details.
Error Check
Errors during communications are detected using CRC-16 (cyclic redundancy check, checksum method).
The result of the checksum calculation is stored in a data-word (16 bit), which starting value is FFFH. The value of this word is manipulated using Exclusive OR- and SHIFT operations together with the data package that should be sent (slave address, function code, data) and the fixed value A001H. At the end of the calculation the data-word contains the checksum value.
The checksum is calculated in the following way:
1. The starting value of the 16 Bit data-word, that is used for the calculation, has to be set to FFFFH.
2. An Exclusive OR operation has to be performed with the starting value and the slave address.
3. The result has to be shifted to the right until the overflow bit becomes 1.
4. When this bit becomes 1, an Exclusive OR operation with the result of step 3 and the fix value A001H has to be performed.
5. After 8 shift operations (every time when the overflow bit becomes 1, an Exclusive OR like in step 4 has to be done), perform an Exclusive OR operation with the result of the former operations and the next data package (8 bit function code). Again the result of this operation has to be shifted 8 times and if needed it has to be interconnected with the fix value A001H using an Exclusive OR operation.
6. The same steps have to be performed with the data, first with the higher byte and then with the lower byte until all data are proceeded.
7. The result of these operations is the checksum. It consists of a high and a low byte.
6
683
6
The following example clarifies the calculation method. It shows the calculation of a CRC-16 code with the slave address 02H (0000 0010) and the function code 03H (0000 0011). The resulting CRC-16 code is D1H for the lower and 40H for the higher byte. The example calculation in this example is not done completely
(normally data would follow the function code).
Overflow Calculations
1111 1111 1111 1111
0000 0010
1111 1111 1111 1101
0111 1111 1111 1110
1010 0000 0000 0001
1101 1111 1111 1111
0110 1111 1111 1111
1010 0000 0000 0001
1100 1111 1111 1110
0110 0111 1111 1111
0011 0011 1111 1111
1010 0000 0000 0001
1001 0011 1111 1110
0100 1001 1111 1111
0010 0100 1111 1111
1010 0000 0000 0001
1000 0100 1111 1110
0100 0010 0111 1111
0010 0001 0011 1111
1010 0000 0000 0001
1000 0001 0011 1110
0000 0011
1000 0001 0011 1101
0100 0000 1001 1110
1010 0000 0000 0001
1110 0000 1001 1111
0111 0000 0100 1111
1010 0000 0000 0001
1101 0000 0100 1110
0110 1000 0010 0111
0011 0100 0001 0011
1010 0000 0000 0001
1001 0100 0001 0010
0100 1010 0000 1001
0010 0101 0000 0100
1010 0000 0000 0001
1000 0101 0000 0101
0100 0010 1000 0010
1010 0000 0000 0001
1110 0010 1000 0011
0111 0001 0100 0001
1010 0000 0000 0001
1101 0001 0100 0000
D1H 40H
Higher Lower
Byte Byte
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
Description
Initial value
Address
ExOr Result
Shift 1
ExOr Result
Shift 2
ExOr Result
Shift 3
Shift 4
ExOr Result
Shift 5
Shift 6
ExOr Result
Shift 7
Shift 8
ExOr Result
Function Code
ExOr Result
Shift 1
ExOr Result
Shift 2
ExOr Result
Shift 3
Shift 4
ExOr Result
Shift 5
Shift 6
ExOr Result
Shift 7
ExOr Result
Shift 8
ExOr Result
CRC-16 Result
684
MEMOBUS Message Example
An example of MEMOBUS command/response messages is given below.
Reading Inverter Memory Register Contents
The content of maximum 16 inverter memory registers can be readout at a time.
Among other things the command message must contain the start address of the first register that is to be read out and the quantity of registers that should be read out. The response message will contain the content of the first and the consecutive number of registers that has been set for the quantity.
The contents of the memory register are separated into higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits.
The following tables show message examples when reading status signals, error details, data link status, and frequency references from the slave 2 Inverter.
Slave Address
Function Code
Start Address
Quantity
CRC-16
Command Message
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
02H
03H
00H
20H
00H
04H
45H
F0H
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave Address 02H
Function Code
Data quantity
1st storage register
Higher
Lower
03H
08H
00H
65H
Next storage register
Next storage register
Next storage register
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
01H
F4H
AFH
82H
00H
00H
00H
00H
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address
Function Code
Error code
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
02H
83H
03H
F1H
31H
Loop back Test
The loop back test returns command messages directly as response messages without changing the contents to check the communications between the master and slave. You can set user-defined test code and data values.
The following table shows a message example when performing a loop back test with the slave no. 1.
Slave address
Function code
Test Code
Data
CRC-16
Command Message
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
A5H
37H
DAH
8DH
01H
08H
00H
00H
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave address
Function code
01H
08H
Test Code
Data
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
00H
00H
A5H
37H
DAH
8DH
Slave address
Function code
Response Message
(During Error)
Error Code
Higher
CRC-16
Lower
01H
89H
01H
86H
50H
6
685
6
Writing to Multiple Inverter Memory Registers
The writing of inverter memory registers works similar to the reading process, i.e. the address of the first register that is to be written and the quantity of to be written registers must be set in the command message.
The to be written data must be consecutive, starting from the specified address in the command message. The data order must be higher 8 bits, then lower 8 bits. The data must be in memory register address order.
The following table shows an example of a message where a forward operation has been set with a frequency reference of 60.0 Hz for the inverter with the slave address 01H.
Command Message
Slave Address
Function Code
Higher
Start Address
Lower
Higher
Quantity
No. of data
Lower
Lead data
Next data
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
Higher
Lower
00H
01H
02H
58H
63H
39H
01H
10H
00H
01H
00H
02H
04H
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave Address 01H
Function Code
Start Address
10H
00H
01H
00H
Quantity
Higher
Lower
Higher
CRC-16
Lower
Higher
Lower
02H
10H
08H
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address
Function Code
Error code
CRC-16
Higher
Lower
* No. of data = 2 x (quantity)
01H
90H
02H
CDH
C1H
IMPORTANT
For the number of data value in the command message the double value of the data quantity must be taken.
686
Data Tables
The data tables are shown below. The types of data are as follows: Reference data, monitor data, and broadcast data.
Reference Data
The reference data table is shown below. These data can be read and written. They cannot be used for monitoring functions.
Register Address
0000H
0001H
0002H
0003H to 0005H
0006H
0007H
0008H
0009H
000AH to 000EH
000FH
Contents
Reserved
Run operation and input commands
Bit 0
Bit 1
Forward run
Reverse run
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
External error
Reset command
ComNet
ComCtrl
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Multi-function input command 3
Multi-function input command 4
Multi-function input command 5
Multi-function input command 6
Bit A
Bits B to F
Multi-function input command 7
Not used
Frequency reference (Set units using parameter o1-03)
Not used
PID target value
Analog output 1 setting (-11 V/-726 to 11 V/726) → 10V = 660
Analog output 2 setting (-11 V/-726 to 11 V/726) → 10V = 660
Multi-function contact output setting
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bits 3 to 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bits 8 to F
Not used
Contact output 1 (Terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Contact output 2 (Terminal M3-M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Contact output 3 (Terminal M5-M6) 1: ON 0: OFF
Not used
Enables/Disables error contact (terminal MA-MC) setting using bit 7 1: ON 0: OFF
Error contact (terminal MA-MC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Not used
Reference selection settings
Bit 0 Not used
Bit 1
Bits 3 to B
Input PID target value 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Not used
E
F
C
D
Broadcast data terminal S5 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Broadcast data terminal S6 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Broadcast data terminal S7 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Not used
Note:Write 0 to all unused bits. Also, do not write data to reserved registers.
6
687
6
Monitor Data
The following table shows the monitor data. Monitor data can only be read.
Register Address.
0010H
0011H
0012H
0013H
0014H
0015H
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Fault Content 2
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
Bit B
Bit C
Bit D
Contents
Inverter status signal
Bit 0 During run
Bit 1
Bit 2
Zero speed
During reverse operation
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Reset signal active
During speed agree
Inverter ready
Minor fault
Major fault
Not used
Bit 7
Bits 8 to F
Operator status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3, 4
Bit 5 to F
During OPE alarm
During fault
Operator in programming mode
00: JVOP-160 attached, 01: JVOP-161 attached, 11: PC connected
Not used
OPE Fault Number
Not used
Fault Content 1
Bit 0 PUF, DC bus fuse blown
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
UV1
UV2
UV3
Not used
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
Bit B
Bit C
GF, Ground fault
OC, Over current
OV, DC bus over voltage
OH, Inverter heatsink overheat pre-alarm
OH1, Inverter heatsink overheat
OL1, Motor overload
OL2, Inverter overload
OL3, Overtorque detection 1
OL4, Overtorque detection 2
RR, Internal braking transistor fault
RH, Inverter mounted braking resistor overheat
EF3, External fault set on terminal S3
EF4, External fault set on terminal S4
EF5, External fault set on terminal S5
EF6, External fault set on terminal S6
EF7, External fault set on terminal S7
Not used
Not used
OS, Overspeed detected
DEV, Speed deviation detected
PGO, PG disconnected
PF, Input phase loss
LF, Output open phase
OH3, Motor overheat pre-alarm (PTC analog input)
OPR, Digital operator disconnected
688
Register Address.
0015H
0016H
0017H
0018H
0019H
001AH
Alarm Content 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
Bit B
Bit C
Bit D/E
Bit F
Bit E
Bit F
Fault Content 3
Bit 0
ERR,
Contents
OH4, Motor overheat (PTC analog input)
Bit 1
Bit 2/3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
Bit B to F
CE, Memobus communications error
BUS, Bus option communications error
Not used
CF, Control fault
Not used
EF0, External fault from optional input card
FBL, PID feedback loss
UL3, Undertorque detection 1
UL4, Undertorque detection 2
OL7, High Slip Braking overload
Not used
CPF Fault Content 1
Bit 0/1 Not used
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
CPF02
CPF03
Not used
CPF05
Bit 6
Bit 7 to F
CPF06
Not used
CPF Fault Content 2
Bit 0 CPF20
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4 to F
CPF21
CPF22
CPF23
Not used
Alarm Content 2
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
UV, DC bus undervoltage
OV, DC bus overvoltage
OH, Inverter heatsink overheat pre-alarm
OH2, Inverter overheat alarm input by a digital input
OL3, Overtorque detection 1
OL4, Overtorque detection 2
EF, Forward/Reverse input set at the same time
BB, Baseblock active
EF3, External alarm set on terminal S3
EF4, External alarm set on terminal S4
EF5, External alarm set on terminal S5
EF6, External alarm set on terminal S6
EF7, External alarm set on terminal S7
Not used
OS, Overspeed alarm
Not used
DEV, Speed deviation
PGO, PG disconnected
OPR, Digital operator disconnected
CE, Memobus communications error
CALL, Communications on standby
OL1, Motor overload
OL2, Inverter overload
6
689
6
690
Register Address.
001AH
001BH
0020H
0021H
0022H
0023H
0024H
0025H
0026H
0027H
0028H
0029H
002AH
Contents
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bits 8 to F
Error details
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
Bit B
Bit 8 to A
Bit B
Bit C
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Alarm Content 3
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2 to F
Inverter status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Not used
FBL, PID feedback loss
CALL, Communications on standby
UL3, Undertorque detection 1
UL4, Undertorque detection 2
Not used
Not used
OH3, Motor overheat pre-alarm
Not used
Forward operation
Reverse operation
Inverter startup complete 1: Completed 2: Not completed
Error
Data setting error
Multi-function contact output 1 (terminal M1 - M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function contact output 2 (terminal M3 - M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function contact output 3 (terminal M5 - M6) 1: ON 0: OFF
Not used
Bit C
Overcurrent (OC), Ground fault (GF)
Main circuit overvoltage (OV)
Inverter overload (OL2)
Inverter overheat (OH1, OH2)
Braking transistor/resistance overheat (rr, rH)
Fuse blown (PUF)
PID feedback lost (FbL)
External error (EF, EFO)
Control board error (CPF)
Motor overload (OL1) or overtorque 1 (OL3) detected
PG broken wire detected (PGO), Overspeed (OS), Speed deviation (DEV)
Main circuit undervoltage (UV) detected
Main circuit undervoltage (UV1), control power supply error (UV2), inrush prevention circuit error (UV3), power loss
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Data link status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Missing output phase (LF)
MEMOBUS communications error (CE)
Operator disconnected (OPR)
Writing data
Not used
Not used
Upper and lower limit errors
Bit 4
Bits 5 to F
Data integrity error
Not used
Frequency reference
Monitors U1-01
Output frequency Monitors U1-02
Output voltage (U1-06)
Output current U1-03
Output power U1-08
Torque reference U1-09
Not used
Not used
Register Address.
002BH
002CH
002DH
002EH - 0030H
0031H
0032H - 0037H
0038H
0039H
003AH
003BH
003CH
003DH
Contents
Control terminals input status
Bit 0 Input terminal S1 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1
Bit 2
Input terminal S2 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function input terminal S3 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Multi-function input terminal S4 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function input terminal S5 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function input terminal S6 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function input terminal S7 1: ON 0: OFF
Not used Bits 7 to F
Inverter status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Operation 1: Operating
Zero speed 1: Zero speed
Frequency agree 1: Agreement
User-defined speed agree 1: Agreement
Frequency detection 1 1: Output frequency ≤ L4-01
Frequency detection 2 1: Output frequency ≥ L4-01
Bit A
Bit B
Bit C
Bit D
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Inverter startup completed 1: Startup completed
Undervoltage detection 1: Detected
Baseblock 1: Inverter output baseblock
Frequency reference mode 1: Not communication 0: Communication option
Run command mode 1: Not communication 0: Communication option
Overtorque detection 1: Detected
Frequency reference lost 1: Lost
Restart enabled1: Restarting
Bit E
Bit F
Error (including MEMOBUS communications time-out) 1:Error occurred
MEMOBUS communications time-out 1: Timed out
Multi-function contact output status
Bit 0 Multi-function contact output 1 (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bits 3 to F
Not used
Multi-function contact output 2 (terminal M3-M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function contact output 3 (terminal M5-M6) 1: ON 0: OFF
Not used
Main circuit DC voltage
Not used
PID feedback (max. output frequency = 100%; resolution 0.1%; without sign)
PID input (max. output frequency = 100%; resolution 0.1%; with sign)
PID output (max. output frequency = 100%; resolution 0.1%; with sign)
CPU software number
Flash software number
Communications error details
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bits 7 to F kVA setting
Control method
CRC error
Invalid data length
Not used
Parity error
Overrun error
Framing error
Time-out
Not used
003EH
003FH
Note: Communications error details are stored until an error reset is input (you can also reset while the Unit is operating).
6
691
6
Broadcast Data
Using broadcast data a command can be given to all slaves at the same time. The slave address in the command message must be set to 00H. All slaves will receive the message. They will not respond.
The following table shows the broadcast data. You can also write this data.
Register Address
0001H
0002H
Contents
Operation signal
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bits 2 and 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bits 6 to B
Bit C *1
Bit D *1
Bit E *1
Bit F
Frequency reference
Forward run
Reverse run
Not used
External error 1
Error reset 1
Not used
Multi-function digital input terminal S5 input
Multi-function digital input terminal S6 input
Multi-function digital input terminal S7 input
Not used.
Note:Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use the local inverter input/output signals.
* A change of these bits to 1 will be accepted only, if the bits C,D and/or E in register 000FH (reference data) are set to 1 at the inverter, at which the inputs
S5, S6 and S7 shall be enabled.
Inverter Error Codes
The content of a current fault and faults that have occurred earlier can be read out by Memobus using the Fault
Trace (U2) and the Fault History (U3) parameters. The fault codes are shown in the table below.
Fault Code Fault Description Fault Code Fault Description Fault Code Fault Description
01H
02H
03H
04H
PUF
UV1
UV2
UV3
13H
14H
15H
18H
EF5
EF6
EF7
OS
28H
29H
2AH
2BH
FBL
UL3
UL4
OL7
06H
07H
08H
09H
0AH
0BH
0CH
0DH
0EH
0FH
10H
11H
12H
GF
OC
OV
OH
OH1
OL1
OL2
OL3
OL4
RR
RH
EF3
EF4
19H
1AH
1BH
1CH
1DH
1EH
1FH
20H
21H
22H
25H
26H
27H
DEV
PGO
PF
LF
OH3
OPR
ERR
OH4
CE
BUS
CF
SVE
EF0
83H
84H
85H
86H
87H
88H
89H
8AH
8BH
91H
92H
93H
94H
CPF02
CPF03
CPF04
CPF05
CPF06
CPF07
CPF08
CPF09
CPF10
CPF20
CPF21
CPF22
CPF23
Refer to
page 7-2, Fault Detection for detailed fault descriptions and for corrective actions.
692
ENTER Command
When writing parameters to the Inverter from the PLC using MEMOBUS communications, the parameters are temporarily stored in the parameter data area of the Inverter. To enable these parameters in the parameter data area the ENTER command must be used.
There are two types of ENTER commands:
• ENTER commands that enable parameter data in RAM only (changes will be lost after power loss)
• ENTER commands that write data into the EEPROM (non-volatile memory) of the Inverter and enable the data in RAM at the same time.
The following table shows the ENTER command data. ENTER command data can only be written.
The ENTER command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0910H.
Register Address.
0900H
0910H
Contents
Write parameter data to EEPROM, RAM is refreshed
Parameter data are not written to EEPROM, but refreshed in RAM only.
INFO
• The maximum number of times you can write to EEPROM is 100,000. Do not frequently execute ENTER commands (0900H) that write into EEPROM.
• The ENTER command registers are write-only. Consequently, if these registers should be read out, the register address will become invalid (Error code: 02H).
• An ENTER command is not required if reference or broadcast data are sent to the inverter.
Error Codes
The following table shows MEMOBUS communications error codes.
Error Code
01H
Contents
Function code error
A function code other than 03H, 08H, or 10H has been set by the PLC.
02H
Invalid register number error
• The register address you are attempting to access is not recorded anywhere.
• With broadcast sending, a start address other than 0001H, or 0002H has been set.
03H
21H
22H
23H
24H
Invalid quantity error
• The number of data packets (register content) being read or written is outside the range of 1 to 16.
• In write mode, the number of data bytes in the message is not No. of packets x 2.
Data setting error
• A simple upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing parameters.
• When writing parameters, the parameter setting is invalid.
Write mode error
• Attempting to write parameters to the inverter during operation.
• Attempting to write via ENTER commands during operation.
• Attempting to write parameters other than A1-00 to A1-05, E1-03, or 02-04 when warning alarm CPF03
(defective EEPROM) has occurred.
• Attempting to write read-only data.
Writing during DC bus undervoltage (UV) error
• Writing parameters to the inverter during UV (DC bus undervoltage) alarm.
• Writing via ENTER commands during UV (DC bus undervoltage) alarm.
Writing error during parameters processing
Attempting to write parameters while processing parameters in the Inverter.
6
693
6
Slave Not Responding
In the following cases, the slave will ignore the write function.
• When a communications error (overrun, framing, parity, or CRC-16) is detected in the command message.
•
•
•
When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Inverter do not agree.
When the gap between two blocks (8 bit) of a message exceeds 24 bits.
When the command message data length is invalid.
INFO
If the slave address specified in the command message is 0, all slaves execute the write function, but do not return response messages to the master.
Self-Diagnosis
The Inverter has a built-in function for self-diagnosing the serial communication interface circuits. This function is called the self-diagnosis function. It uses the connected communications parts of the send and receive terminals to receive data sent by the Inverter and thereby to check if communication is performed normally.
To perform the self-diagnosis function use the following procedure.
1. Turn ON the inverter power supply, and set 67 (communications test mode) in parameter H1-05 (Terminal
S7 Function Selection).
2. Turn OFF the inverter power supply.
3. Perform the wiring according to
4. Turn ON the terminating resistance. (Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1.)
5. Turn ON the inverter power supply.
Fig 6.77 Communication Terminals Wiring for Self-Diagnosis
During normal operation, the Digital Operator displays “PASS” on the display.
If an error occurs, a “CE” (MEMOBUS communications error) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator, the error contact output will be turned ON, and the Inverter operation ready signal will be turned OFF.
694
Using the Timer Function
The multi-function digital input terminals S3 to S7 can be used as timer function input terminals, and multifunction output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and M5-M6 can be used as timer function output terminals. By setting the delay time, you can prevent chattering of the sensors and switches.
•
•
Set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7) to 18 (timer function input).
Set H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and M5-M6 function selection) to
12 (timer function output).
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
b4-01 b4-02
Timer function ON-delay time
Timer function OFF-delay time
Name
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
18 Timer function input
Function
Multifunction Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set
Value
12 Timer function output
Function
Factory
Setting
0.0 s
0.0 s
Change during
Operation
No
No
V/f
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Setting Example
When the timer function input ON time is longer than the value set in b4-01, the timer output function is turned ON. When the timer function input OFF time is longer than the value set in b4-02, the timer output function is turned OFF. An example of timer function operation is given in the following diagram.
Timer function input
Timer function output
6
Fig 6.78 Timer Function Operation Example
695
6
Using PID Control
PID control is a method of making the feedback value (detection value) matching the set target value. By combining proportional control (P), integral control (I), and differential control (D), you can even control system with load fluctuation.
The characteristics of the PID control operations are given below.
P element
I element
D element
The output of a P-element is proportional to the input (deviation). With using a P-element alone it is not possible to eliminate the deviation completely.
The output of an I-element is the time-integral of the input (deviation). With using a P-element and an I-element together the deviation can be eliminated completely.
The output of a D-element is the derivative of the input (deviation). By adding a D-element the response can be improved rapidly but the system can also become unstable.
PID Control Operation
To understand the differences between the PID control operations P, I, and D, the output share of each operation is shown in the following diagram when the deviation (i.e., the difference between the target value and feedback value) is fixed.
Deviation
Time
PID control
I control
Output of P-, Iand D-element
D control
P control
Time
Fig 6.79 PID Control Operation
PID Control Applications
The following table shows examples of PID control applications using the Inverter.
Application
Speed Control
Control Details
• Machinery speed is fed back and adjusted to meet the target value.
• Speed informations from other machinery can be input as the target value and synchronous control using the actual speed feedback can be performed.
Example of Sensor
Used
Tachometer generator
Pressure Control
Flow Rate
Control
Temperature
Control
Pressure information is fed back and constant pressure control is performed.
Flow rate information is fed back and the flow rate is controlled with high accuracy.
Temperature information is fed back and a temperature adjustment control using a fan can be performed.
Pressure sensor
Flow rate sensor
• Thermocoupler
• Thermistor
696
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
b5-08 b5-09 b5-10 b5-11 b5-12 b5-13 b5-14 b5-15 b5-01 b5-02 b5-03 b5-04 b5-05 b5-06 b5-07 b5-16 b5-17 b5-18 b5-19 b5-28 b5-29 b5-31 b5-32 b5-33
Name
PID control mode selection
Proportional gain (P)
Integral (I) time
Integral (I) limit
Differential (D) time
PID limit
PID offset adjustment
PID delay time constant
PID output characteristics selection
PID output gain
PID reverse output selection
Selection of PID feedback loss detection
PID feedback loss detection level
PID feedback loss detection time
PID sleep function operation level
PID sleep operation delay time
Accel/decel time for PID reference
PID Setpoint Selection
PID set point
PID square root feedback selection
Square root feedback gain
PID monitor feedback selection
PID monitor feedback gain
PID monitor feedback bias
Monitor Items (U1)
Parameter
Number
U1-24
U1-36
U1-37
U1-38
PID feedback value
PID input volume
PID output volume
PID set point
Name
Factory
Setting
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Change during
Operation
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
0.00 s
0
1.0
0
0
0%
1.0 s
0.0 Hz
0
1.00
1.0 s
100.0%
0.00 s
100.0%
0.0%
0.0 s
0.0 s
0
0
0
1.00
0
100.0%
0.0%
V/f
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Output Signal Level During
Multi-Function Analog Output
10 V: 100% feedback
10 V: 100% PID input
10 V: 100% PID output
10 V: 100% PID target
Min.
Unit
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
V/f
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
6
697
6
Multi-Function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
19
30
31
34
35
Set
Value
Function
V/f
PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled) Yes
PID control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when stopped during PID control) Yes
PID control integral hold (ON: Integral hold) Yes
PID soft starter
PID input characteristics switch
Yes
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-09)
Set
Value
B
C
PID feedback
PID target value
Function
V/f
Yes
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Yes
Open loop
Vector
Yes
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Yes
Pulse Train Input (H6-01)
Set
Value
0
1
2
Frequency reference
PID feedback value
PID target value
Function
V/f
Yes
Yes
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Yes
Yes
PID Control Methods (b5-01)
There are four PID control methods. Select the method by setting parameter b5-01.
Set Value
1
2
3
4
Control Method
PID output becomes the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the deviation (difference between PID target value and feedback value.)
PID output becomes the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the PID feedback value.
PID output is added as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the deviation (difference between PID target value and feedback value).
PID output is added as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the PID feedback value.
698
PID Input Methods
PID Target Value Input Sources
Normally, the frequency reference source selected in b1-01 is the PID target value source. Alternatively the
PID target value can be set as shown in the following table.
PID Target Input Method Setting Conditions
Multi-Function Analog Terminal A2
Input
MEMOBUS register 0006H
Pulse train input
Parameter setting
Set H3-09 to C (PID target value). Either the pulse train input or the analog input A1 can be selected as PID feedback value.
Set MEMOBUS bit 1 in register address 000FH to 1 (enable/disable PID target value from communications) to be able to use register number 0006H as the PID target value.
Set H6-01 to 2 (PID target value).
If b5-18 is set to 1 the value in b5-19 becomes the PID target value.
INFO
If the PID function is used, the frequency reference value becomes the target value, which is set and shown in Hz on the operator. Nevertheless, internally the PID target value is used in percent. I.e. the following formula is used:
PID target value [%] = frequency reference [Hz] max. output frequency [Hz]
• 100%
PID Feedback Input Methods
Select one of the following PID control feedback input methods
Input Method
Multi-function analog input
Pulse train input
Monitor Parameter
Setting Conditions
Set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Selection) to B (PID feedback).
Set H6-01 to 1 (PID feedback).
Set the number of the monitor parameter U1, which shall be the PID feedback, in parameter b5-31
INFO
Adjust PID target value and PID feedback value using the following items.
• Analog input: Adjust using the analog input terminal gain and bias.
• Pulse train input: Adjust using pulse train scaling, pulse train input gain, and pulse train input bias.
6
699
6
6100
PID Adjustment Examples
Suppressing Overshoot
If overshoot occurs, reduce Proportional gain (P), and increase integral time (I).
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Set a Rapidly Stabilizing Control Condition
To rapidly stabilize the control even if overshoot occurs, reduce integral time (I), and lengthen differential time (D).
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Suppressing Long-cycle Vibration
If vibration occurs with a longer cycle than the integral time (I) set value, lengthen the integral time (I) to suppress the vibration.
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Suppressing Short Cycle Vibration
If vibration occurs when the vibration cycle duration is short, and the cycle duration is almost identical to the differential time (D) set value, the differential operation is too strong. Shorten the differential time (D) to suppress the vibration.
If vibration continues even when the differential time (D) is set to 0.00 (D control disabled), reduce the proportional gain (P), or increase the PID primary delay time constant.
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Setting Precautions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
In PID control, the b5-04 parameter is used to prevent the calculated integral control value from exceeding a specified amount. When the load varies rapidly, the Inverter response is delayed, and the machine might get be damaged or the motor may stall. In this case, reduce the set value to speed up Inverter response.
The b5-06 parameter is used to prevent the output value of the PID control calculation from exceeding a specified amount. The value is set taking the maximum output frequency as 100%.
The b5-07 parameter is used to adjust PID control offset. The value is set in increments of 0.1%, taking the maximum output frequency to be 100%.
Set the filter time constant for the PID control output in b5-08. Enable this parameter to prevent machinery resonance when machinery friction is high, or rigidity is poor. In this case, set the parameter to be higher than the resonance frequency cycle duration. Increase this time constant to reduce Inverter responsiveness.
Using b5-09, the PID output polarity can be inverted. If now the PID feedback value increases the output frequency will be increased. This function is usable e.g. for vacuum pumps.
Using b5-10, you can apply a gain to the PID control output. Enable this parameter to adjust the amount of compensation if adding PID control output to the frequency reference as compensation (b5-01 = 3/4).
When PID control output is negative, you can use parameter b5-11 to determine what happens to the inverter output. When b1-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 (enabled), however, the PID output is limited to 0.
Using the b5-17 parameter the PID target value can be raised or lowered with an accel./decel. ramp function (PID soft starter).
The normally used accel./decel. function (C1 parameters) is allocated after PID control so that, depending on the settings, resonance with the PID control and hunting in the machinery may occur. Using b5-17 this behavior can be prevented.
The PID soft starter function can also be disabled or enabled using a multifunction digital input (H1has to be set to 34).
6
6101
PID Control Block
The following diagram shows the PID control block in the Inverter.
6
6102
Fig 6.80 PID Control Block Diagram
PID Feedback Loss Detection
When performing PID control, be sure to use the PID feedback loss detection function. Otherwise if the PID feedback gets lost, the Inverter output frequency may accelerate to the maximum output frequency.
Low Feedback (b5-12 = 1 or 2)
When b5-12 is set to 1 and the PID feedback value falls below the PID feedback loss detection level (b5-13) for a time longer than the PID feedback loss detection time (b5-14), a “FBL - Feedback Loss” alarm will be displayed at the operator and inverter operation is continued.
When the same happens and b5-12 is set to 2 a “FBL - Feedback Loss” fault will be displayed on the digital operator and the inverter operation will be stopped. The motor coasts to stop and the fault contact is operated.
The time chart for PID feedback loss detection is shown below.
PID feedback value
Loss detection level
(b5-13)
Loss detection time
(b5-14)
No Fbl detection
Loss detection time’
(b5-14)
Fbl detection
Time
Fig 6.81 Low PID Feedback Loss Detection Time Chart
High Feedback (b5-12 = 3 or 4)
When b5-12 is set to 3 and the PID feedback value exceeds the PID feedback loss detection level (b5-13) for a time longer than the PID feedback loss detection time (b5-14), a “FBL - Feedback Loss” alarm will be displayed at the operator and inverter operation is continued.
When the same happens and b5-12 is set to 4 a “FBL - Feedback Loss” fault will be displayed on the digital operator and the inverter operation will be stopped. The motor coasts to stop and the fault contact is operated.
The time chart for PID feedback loss detection is shown below.
PID feedback value
6
Loss detection level
(b5-13)
Loss detection time
(b5-14)
No Fbl detection
Loss detection time
(b5-14)
Fbl detection
Time
Fig 6.82 High PID Feedback Loss Detection Time Chart
6103
6
PID Sleep
The PID sleep function stops the Inverter when the PID output value falls below the sleep operation level (b5-
15) for the sleep operation time set in parameter b5-16. The inverter operation will resume, if the PID output value exceeds the sleep operation level for the time set in parameter b5-16 or longer.
The PID sleep function works as well when the PID control is disabled. In this case the frequency reference value is observed by the sleep function instead of the PID output value.
The PID sleep time chart is shown below.
PID output value
Sleep operation level b5-15
Sleep operation delay time
Sleep operation delay time
Internal run command
External run command
Operating
Operation Stopped
Run command has been input
Operation status output
Fig 6.83 PID Sleep Time Chart
Square Root Feedback Operation
If parameter b5-28 is set to 1, the feedback value is converted into a value that equals the square root of the actual feedback. This can be used to control the flow rate when a pressure sensor is used to generate a feedback value. Using parameter b5-29 the square root feedback can be multiplied with a factor. Following formula applies:
Flow rate = Gain (b5-29) × Pressure (head)
So linear connection between the PID target value and the feedback can be realized.
PID Monitor Feedback Function
Using this function an internal monitor (U1) can be set as PID feedback value. The monitor item can be selected in parameter b5-31. The following set values are possible:
Set Value
7
8
9
15
16
18
0
3
5
6
Disabled
Output current
Motor Speed
Output voltage
DC bus voltage
Output power
Torque reference
Terminal A1 input level
Terminal A2 input level
Motor secondary current
Function
V/f
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6104
Multifunction Digital Input Settings: H1-01 to H1-05 (Terminal S3 to S7)
PID Control Disable: “19”
• If a multifunction input is set for this function it can be used to disable the PID function by switching the input to ON.
• The PID target value becomes the frequency reference value.
PID Control Integral Reset: “30”
• Using this function the integral share value of the PID control can be reset by setting a multifunction input to ON.
PID Control Integral Hold: “31”
• Using this function the integral share value of the PID control can be hold by setting a multifunction input to ON. The value will be hold as long as the input is ON.
PID Softstarter Disable: “34”
• Using this function the PID softstarter can be disabled or enabled. It is disabled if the input is activated.
PID Input Characteristic Switch: “35”
• Using this function the PID input characteristic can be inverted by setting a multifunction input to ON.
6
6105
6
Energy-saving
To use the energy saving function, set b8-01 (Energy Saving Mode Selection) to 1. Energy-saving control can be performed in all control methods. The parameters to be adjusted are different for each. In the V/f control modes adjust b8-04 to b8-05. In Open Loop and Closed Loop Vector control adjust b8-02 and b8-03.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name
Factory
Setting b8-01 b8-02 b8-03 b8-04 b8-05 b8-06
E2-02
E2-11
Energy-saving mode selection
Energy-saving gain
Energy-saving filter time constant
Energy-saving coefficient
Power detection filter time constant
Search operation voltage limiter
Motor rated slip
Motor rated output power
0
0.7
*1
0.50 s *2
*3
20 ms
0%
2.90 Hz
*3
0.40 *3
* 1. The value for Open Loop Vector control is given. The factory setting is 1.0 in Closed Loop Vector control.
* 2. The factory setting is 2.00 s for Inverters larger than 55 kW.
* 3. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.
Yes
No
No
No
No
Change during
Operation
No
Yes
No
V/f
A
No
No
A
A
A
A
Q
No
A
A
A
A
Q
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
No A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
No
No
No
A
Q
A
No
No
No
A
Q
Adjusting Energy-saving Control
The method of adjusting the energy-saving control function depends on the control method. Refer to the following when making adjustments.
V/f Control Modes
In the V/f control modes the voltage for optimum motor efficiency is calculated and becomes the output voltage reference.
• b8-04 (Energy-saving Coefficient) is preset assuming that motor and inverter capacity are the same. If the inverter capacity differs from the motor capacity, set the motor capacity in E2-11 (Motor Rated Output
Power). Also, adjust b8-04 in steps of 5 % until the output power reaches its minimum. The higher the energy-saving coefficient, the higher is the output voltage.
•
•
To improve the responsiveness when the load fluctuates, reduce the power detection filter time parameter b8-05. If b8-05 is set too small, however, the motor rotations may become unstable under light load conditions.
Motor efficiency varies due to temperature fluctuations and differences in motor characteristics. Consequently the motor efficiency has to be controlled. To have optimized efficiency, the search operation varies the output voltage. Parameter b8-06 (Search Operation Voltage Limiter) limits the range for the voltage search operation. For 200 V Class Inverters, a range of 100% is equal to 200 V and for 400 V Class Inverters a range of 100% is equal to 400 V. Set b8-06 to 0 to disable the search operation voltage limiter.
6106
Open Loop and Closed Loop Vector Control
In Open Loop and Closed Loop Vector control, the slip frequency is controlled so that motor efficiency is maximized.
•
•
•
Taking the motor rated slip for the base frequency as optimum slip, the inverter calculates the slip for the optimal motor efficiency depending on the output frequency.
Before using energy saving always perform autotuning.
If hunting occurs reduce the set value in b8-02 (Energy-saving Gain), or increase the set value in b8-03
(Energy-saving Filter Time Constant).
Field Weakening
The field weakening function is used to lower the output voltage when the motor load changes to a low level
(no load). Thereby energy can be saved and motor audible noise is reduced.
Note that this function is designed for the usage with one low load condition that does not change. If the low load condition changes, the field weakening function can not be optimized. In this case the energy saving function should be preferred.
The function can be activated using a multifunction input. Therefore set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 to 63.
Field weakening can be used in the V/f control modes only.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
d6-01 d6-02
Name
Field weakening level
Field weakening frequency limit
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Function Set Value
63 Field Weakening
Factory
Setting
80%
0.0 Hz
Change during
Operation
No
No
V/f
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A No
A No
Closed
Loop
Vector
No
No
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes No
Closed
Loop
Vector
No
Setting the Field Weakening Level (d6-01)
To set the field weakening level run the motor under low load condition and activate the field weakening function using a multifunction input. Monitor the output current and raise or lower the field weakening level until the output current reaches it’s minimum value.
Observe the following:
• Parameter d6-01 can not be changed during operation (i.e. a RUN command is input).
• If the field weakening level is set too low, the motor may stall.
Activating Field Weakening
If one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 is set to “63”, the field weakening function can be activated switching the regarding terminal input to ON.
6
6107
6
Field Forcing
The field forcing function controls the motor flux and compensates the flux establishment delay of the motor.
Thereby it improves the motor responsiveness on changes in the speed reference or the load.
Field forcing is applied during all operation conditions except DC Injection.
Using parameter d6-04 a field forcing limit can be applied. A setting of 100% is equal to the no-load current set in parameter E2-03.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
d6-03 d6-04
Field forcing selection
Field forcing limit
Name
Factory
Setting
0
400%
Change during
Operation
No
No
V/f
No
No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
No No
No A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
Setting Motor 1 Parameters
In vector control method, the motor parameters are set automatically during autotuning. If autotuning does not complete normally, set them manually.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
E2-01
E2-02
E2-03
E2-04
E2-05
E2-06
E2-07
E2-08
E2-10
E2-11
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor leak inductance
Motor rated output power
Name
Number of motor poles (Number of poles)
Motor iron saturation coefficient 1
Motor iron saturation coefficient 2
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
Factory
Setting
1.90 A *
2.90 Hz *
1.20 A *
4 poles
9.842 Ω *
18.2%
0.50
0.75
14 W *
0.40 *
No
No
No
No
No
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
No
Note:All factory-set parameters are for a standard 4-pole motor.
* The factory settings depend on Inverter capacity (the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW).
V/f
No
A
No
No
Q
A
A
No
A
Q
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Q Q
A
A
A
A
Q
A
No
No
A
A
Q
A
No
A
Q
A
No
Q
A
A
Q
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q
A
A
A
No
Q
6108
Manual Setting of the Motor Parameters
Motor Rated Current Setting (E2-01)
Set E2-01 to the rated current value on the motor nameplate.
Motor Rated Slip Setting (E2-02)
Set E2-02 to the motor rated slip calculated from the number of rated rotations on the motor nameplate.
Motor Rated Slip = –
120
Motor No-Load Current Setting (E2-03)
Set E2-03 to the motor no-load current at the rated voltage and rated frequency. Normally, the motor no-load current is not written on the motor nameplate. Consult the motor manufacturer.
Factory setting is the no-load current value for a standard 4-pole motor.
Number of Motor Poles Setting (E2-04)
E2-04 is displayed in V/f control with PG, Open Loop and Closed Loop Vector mode only. Set the number of motor poles as written on the motor nameplate.
Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Setting (E2-05)
E2-05 is set automatically when performing motor line-to-line resistance autotuning. When you cannot perform tuning, consult the motor manufacturer for the line-to-line resistance value. Calculate the resistance from the line-to-line resistance value in the motor test report using the following formula, and then make the setting accordingly.
•
•
•
E-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance ( Ω) at 75°C of test report] × 0.92 (Ω)
B-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance ( Ω) at 75°C of test repor]t × 0.92 (Ω)
F-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance ( Ω) at 115°C of test report] × 0.87 (Ω)
Motor Leak Inductance Setting (E2-06)
Set the amount of voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance in E2-06 as percentage of the motor rated voltage. Make this setting when using high-speed motors because the standard value will be too high. (Normally, high speed motors have a low inductance compared to standard motors.) If the inductance is not written on the motor nameplate, consult the motor manufacturer.
Motor Iron Saturation Coefficients 1 and 2 Settings (E2-07)
E2-07 and E2-08 are set automatically during rotating autotuning.
Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Setting (E2-10)
E2-10 is displayed only in V/f control method and can be set to increase the torque compensation accuracy.
The motor iron loss has to be set in kW.
6
6109
6
Setting the V/f Pattern 1
Using the E1 parameters the Inverter input voltage and the V/f pattern can be set as needed. It is not recommended to change the settings when the motor is used in Open Loop or Closed Loop vector control mode.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
E1-01
E1-03
E1-04
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
E1-11
E1-12
E1-13
Input voltage setting
V/f pattern selection
Max. voltage (VMAX)
Base frequency (FA)
Mid. output frequency (FB)
Min. output frequency (FMIN)
Mid. output frequency 2
Base voltage (VBASE)
Name
Max. output frequency (FMAX)
Mid. output frequency voltage (VB)
Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)
Mid. output frequency voltage 2
Factory
Setting
200 V
*1
F
50.0 Hz
200.0 V *1
50.0 Hz
3.0 Hz
*2
13.2 V
*1*2
0.5 Hz
*2
2.4 V
*1*2
0.0 Hz *3
0.0 V
*3
0.0 V *4
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
A
A
Q
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Q Q
Q
Q
Q
No
Q
Q
Q
A
Q
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q
No
Q
Q
Q
No
A
Q
A
A
A
A
* 1. These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open Loop Vector control factory settings are given.)
* 3. The contents of parameters E1-11 and E1-12 are ignored when set to 0.00.
* 4. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
A
Q
A
A
A
Q
No
A
No
A
A
Q
Setting Inverter Input Voltage (E1-01)
Set the Inverter input voltage correctly in E1-01 so that it matches the power supply voltage. This set value will be the reference value for the protection functions and similar functions (overvoltage level, stall level).
6110
Setting V/f Pattern (E1-02)
The V/f pattern can be selected using parameter E1-03. There are two methods of setting the V/f pattern:
Select one of the 15 preset pattern types (set value: 0 to E), or set a user-defined V/f pattern (set value: F).
The factory setting for E1-03 is F.
To select one of the existing patterns, refer to the following table.
Characteristic Application
Constant Torque Characteristic
These patterns are used in general applications where the load torque is fixed, regardless of rotation speed, e.g. for linear transport systems.
Variable torque characteristic
These patterns are used for loads with torque proportional to the square or cube of the rotation speed, such as fans and pumps.
Set Value
0 (F)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
50 Hz specifications
Specifications
60 Hz specifications
60 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at 50 Hz
72 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at 60 Hz
50 Hz specifications, cubical torque characteristic
50 Hz specifications, quadratic torque characteristic
60 Hz specifications, cubical torque characteristic
60 Hz specifications, quadratic torque characteristic
8 50 Hz specifications, medium startup torque
High Startup Torque
(See Note)
*
Select a high startup torque V/f pattern only in the following cases.
• The wiring distance between Inverter and motor is large (Pyrex. 150 m min.)
• A large torque is required at startup
• An AC reactor is inserted in the Inverter input or output.
9
A
50 Hz specifications, large startup torque
60 Hz specifications, medium startup torque
B 60 Hz specifications, large startup torque
Fixed Output Operation
This pattern is used for frequencies of 60 Hz or higher.
A fixed voltage is applied.
C
D
E
90 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at 60 Hz
120 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at 60 Hz
180 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at 60 Hz
* The high start up torque is provided by the automatic torque compensation function, so normally there is no need to use this pattern.
When you select these patterns, the values of parameters E1-04 to E1-10 are changed automatically. There are three types of values for E1-04 to E1-10, depending on the Inverter capacity.
•
•
•
0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f pattern
2.2 to 45 kW V/f pattern
55 to 300 kW V/f pattern
The characteristics diagrams for each are shown in the following pages.
6
6111
0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages by 2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
Set Value 0 50 Hz Set Value 1 60 Hz Set Value 2 60 Hz Set Value 3 72 Hz
1.3 2.5
1.5
1.5 3
• Variable Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
Set Value 4 50 Hz Set Value 5 50 Hz Set Value 6 60 Hz
1.5 3
Set Value 7 60 Hz
6
1.3
1.3
• High startup torque (Set value 8: to b)
Set Value 8 50 Hz Set Value 9 50 Hz
1.5
1.5
Set Value A 60 Hz Set Value B 60 Hz
6112
1.3 2.5
1.3 2.5
• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)
Set Value C 90 Hz Set Value D
1.5
120 Hz
1.5
Set Value E 180 Hz
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.2 to 45 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages by 2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
Set Value 0 50 Hz Set Value 1 60 Hz Set Value 2 60 Hz Set Value 3 72 Hz
• Variable Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
Set Value 4 50 Hz Set Value 5 50 Hz Set Value 6 60 Hz Set Value 7 60 Hz
• High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to b)
Set Value 8 50 Hz Set Value 9 50 Hz Set Value A 60 Hz Set Value B 60 Hz
6
• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)
Set Value C 90 Hz Set Value D 120 Hz Set Value E 180 Hz
6113
55 to 300 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages by 2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
Set Value 0 50 Hz Set Value 1 60 Hz Set Value 2 60 Hz Set Value 3 72 Hz
• Variable Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
Set Value 4 50 Hz Set Value 5 50 Hz Set Value 6 60 Hz Set Value 7 60 Hz
6
• High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to b)
Set Value 8 50 Hz Set Value 9 50 Hz Set Value A 60 Hz Set Value B 60 Hz
• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)
Set Value C 90 Hz Set Value D 120 Hz Set Value E 180 Hz
6114
Setting an Individual V/f Pattern
If E1-03 is set to F the V/f pattern can be set individually
using the parameters E1-04 to E1-10. See Fig 6.84
for details.
Output voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
INFO
Fig 6.84 Individual V/f pattern setting
• If E1-03 is set to anything other than F, you can only read parameters E1-04 to E1-10.
• To set the V/f characteristics linear, set E1-07 and E1-09 to the same value. In this case, E1-08 will be ignored.
Setting Precautions
When the setting is to user-defined V/f pattern, beware of the following points:
•
•
When changing control method, parameters E1-07 to E1-10 will change to the factory settings for that control method.
Be sure to set the four frequencies as follows:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
6
6115
6
Setting Motor 2 Parameters
The E4 parameters are for setting the motor data for motor 2. In the Vector Control modes the motor data are set automatically by autotuning. If the autotuning does not complete normally, set them manually (refer to
page 6-109, Manual Setting of the Motor Parameters
).
To switch over between motor 1 and 2 a digital input must be set for the motor switch over command (one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 must be set to 16). Motor 2 is selected when the input is switched ON. In this case the V/f pattern settings in the parameters E3 are used.
Note:Autotuning for motor 2 can only be performed if one multifunction input H1 is set to 16 (Motor 2 selection). Otherwise motor 2 cannot be selected during autotuning (T1-00 will not be shown).
Related parameters
Parameter
No.
E4-01
E4-02
E4-03
E4-04
E4-05
E4-06
E4-07
Motor 2 rated current
Motor 2 rated slip
Motor 2 no-load current
Motor 2 line-to-line resistance
Motor 2 leak inductance
Motor 2 rated capacity
Name
Motor 2 number of poles (number of poles)
Factory
Setting
1.90 A *
2.90 Hz *
1.20 A *
4 poles
9.842 Ω *
18.2%
0.40 *
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
* The factory setting depends upon the inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
V/f
A
No
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
No
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set Value
16 Motor 1/2 switch over
Function
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes Yes
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
6116
Setting the V/f Pattern 2
Using the E3 parameters the V/f pattern for motor 2 can be set as needed.
It is not recommended to change the settings when the motor is used in open loop vector mode.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
E3-01
E3-02
E3-03
E3-04
E3-05
E3-06
E3-07
E3-08
Name
Motor 2 control method selection
Motor 2 max. output frequency (FMAX)
Motor 2 max. output voltage (VMAX)
Motor 2 max. voltage frequency (FA)
Motor 2 mid. output frequency 1 (FB)
Motor 2 mid. output frequency voltage 1 (VB)
Motor 2 min. output frequency (FMIN)
Motor 2 min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)
Factory
Setting
0
50.0 Hz
200.0 V *1
50.0 Hz
3.0 Hz *2
13.2 V
*1*2
0.5 Hz
*2
2.4 V *1*2
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
No
A A No
A
A
* 1. These are values for a 200 V class inverter. Values for a 400 V class inverter are double
* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open Loop Vector control factory settings are given.)
A
A
A
No
Selecting the Motor 2 Control Method (E3-01)
Using parameter E3-01 the control method for motor 2 can be selected.
• The setting of this parameter affects the autotuning function. If V/f or V/f with PG is selected the only possible autotuning method will be stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance.
Setting the V/f Pattern Characteristic
The principle of setting the V/f pattern 2 is the same as for V/f pattern 1. Please refer to
page 6-111, Setting V/ f Pattern (E1-02) for details.
Note: The V/f pattern 2 settings are only used for motor 2, i.e. motor 2 has to be selected using a multifunction input (setting 16).
6
6117
6
Torque Control
With Closed Loop Vector control the motor's output torque can be controlled by a torque reference from an analog input. Torque control can be enabled by setting parameter d5-01 to 1.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
d5-01 d5-02 d5-03 d5-04 d5-05 d5-06
Name
Torque control selection
Torque reference delay time
Speed limit selection
Speed limit
Speed limit bias
Speed/torque control switching timer
0
0 ms
1
0%
10%
0 ms
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
No
No
No
No
No
No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
No No
No No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
71
78
Function
Speed/torque control change (ON: Torque control)
Polarity reverse command for external torque reference
V/f
No
No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
No No
No No
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Yes
Multifunction Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set
Value
31
32
Function
During speed limit
Activated if the speed control circuit (ASR) is operating for torque control. The ASR output becomes the torque reference. The motor is rotating at the speed limit.
V/f
No
No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
No No
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
No No Yes
Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-09)
Set
Value
0
13
14
Add to terminal A1
Torque reference/torque limit at speed control
Torque compensation
Function
V/f
Yes
No
No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open loop
Vector
Yes Yes
No No
No No
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Yes
Yes
Monitors
Parameter
Number
Name
U1-09
Torque reference
Description
Output Signal Level at Analog
Output
Monitor in internal torque reference value for vector control.
10 V: Motor rated torque
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
Min.
Unit
0.1%
V/f
No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
No Yes Yes
6118
Torque Control Operation
In torque control a torque value can be given as reference for the motor output. If the torque command and the load are not balanced, the motor accelerates or decelerates.
The speed limit circuit prevents the motor speed from rising above certain value set by an analog input or parameter d5-04. The speed limit function mainly consists of two parts, the priority circuit and the speed limiter circuit.
The priority circuit selects between the torque reference value from the analog input or from the speed controller (ASR) output. If the output speed is below the speed limit, the analog input value is taken as torque reference. Otherwise the ASR output value is taken as torque reference.
The speed limit circuit adds a speed suppressing torque to the torque output if the speed exceeds the speed limit. Together with the priority circuit it prevents the output speed from exceeding the speed limit.
The torque control block diagram is shown in
Torque compensation from analog input*
Torque reference from analog input A1
Speed limit from analog input A2
Speed limit in parameter d5-04
1 d5-03
2
Torque reference filter time d5-02
+
-
Speed Controller
(ASR)
Speed feedback
Speed Limiter
Priority
Circuit +
+
+
Torque limits
(L7)
Internal torque
Reference
Speed limit bias d5-05
Fig 6.85 Torque Control Block Diagram
Inputting Torque References and Torque Reference Directions
The torque reference can be input using an analog voltage or current signals. The torque reference input methods are listed in the table below.
Torque Reference Input
Method
Reference Location
Selection
Method
Remarks
Voltage input (0 to 10 V)
Voltage input (-10 to +10 V)
Current input (4 to 20 mA)
Analog input A2
(Turn OFF pin 2 of
SW1.)
Analog input A2
(Turn OFF pin 2 of
SW1.)
Analog input A2
(Turn ON pin 2 of
SW1.)
H3-08 = 0
H3-09 = 13
H3-08 = 1
H3-09 = 13
H3-08 = 2
H3-09 = 13
To switch the torque reference between positive and negative torque, use a digital input (H1 = 78).
The torque reference direction is switched with the analog input voltage direction.
To switch the torque reference between positive and negative torque, use a digital input (H1 = 78).
Option Card (AI-14B)
(0 to ± 10 V)
Channel 2 b1-01=1
F2-01 = 0
H3-08 = 1
H3-09 = 13
Channel 1 of the AI-14B card replaces analog input A1
6
6119
6
The direction of the torque output from the motor will be determined by the sign of the analog signal input or a digital input command. It does not depend on the direction of the run command. The direction of torque will be as follows:
•
•
Positive analog reference: Torque reference for forward motor rotation (counterclockwise as viewed from the motor output axis).
Negative analog reference: Torque reference for reverse motor rotation (clockwise as viewed from the motor output axis).
Inputting the Speed Limit
• The inputs methods for a speed limit are listed in the following table.
Speed Limit Input Method
Parameter setting
Voltage input (0 to +10 V)
Voltage input (-10 to +10 V)
Current input (4 to 20 mA)
Option Card (AI-14B)
(0 to ±10 V)
Location of Reference
Set in d5-04
Analog input A1
Analog input A1
Analog input A2
Channel 1
Channel 1 to 3
Parameter
Settings d5-03 = 2 b1-01 = 1
H3-01 = 0 b1-01 = 1
H3-01 = 1 b1-01 = 1
H3-08 = 2
H3-09 = 13
H3-13 = 1 b1-01 = 1
F2-01 = 0 b1-01 = 3
F2-01 = 1
Remarks
-
Use this setting if the speed limit has always to be positive.
Use this setting when a speed limit for both directions has to be applied.
Terminal A1 becomes the torque reference value.
Turn ON (I side) pin 2 of DIP switch S1 on the terminal board.
Channel 1 of the AI-14B card replaces analog input A1
The sum of the channels 1 to 3 is taken as speed limit.
The direction in which speed is controlled is determined by the sign of the speed limit signal and the direction of the run command.
•
•
Positive voltage applied: The speed in the forward direction will be limited for forward operation.
Negative voltage applied: The speed in the reverse direction will be limited for reverse operation.
If the direction of the motor rotation and the speed limit direction are not the same, the speed will be limited to 0.
Digital Output Functions (H2-01 to H2-03)
During Speed Limit (“31”)
If a digital output is set for this function the output is activated, if the output speed is at the speed limit.
ASR active for Torque Control (“32”)
Using this output function a digital output can be used to monitor the status of the speed limit function. The output is switched:
•
•
ON, if the torque reference is taken from the ASR output and the motor is operating at the speed limit
OFF, if the torque reference is taken from the analog input
6120
Speed Limit Bias Setting
The speed limit bias can be set to limit both the forward and reverse speed to the same value. This differs from the operation of the speed limit setting. To use the speed limit bias, set d5-04 to 0 and set the bias in d5-05 as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
To set 50% forward and reverse speed limits, set the speed limit setting to 0 (d5-03 = 2, d5-04 = 0, and d5-05
= 50). The range of torque control will be from -50% to 50% of the maximum output speed.
When using both, the speed limit and the speed limit bias, the speed range of torque control will be the positive and negative speed limits with the speed limit bias added to each.
Example
The speed range of torque control when the forward speed limit is 50% and the speed limit bias is 10% is shown in
. This figure does not take the priority circuit into account.
Positive torque
Speed limit bias d5-05
Reverse operation
Forward operation
Forward speed limit
50%
Negative torque
Fig 6.86 Speed Limit Bias Setting 6
Torque Control Operation Examples
Operation examples will be described separately for winding operation, in which the speed and motor torque are in the same directions, and rewinding operation, in which the speed and motor torque are in opposite directions.
Winding Operation
In a winding operation, the line (speed) and torque generated by the motor are in the same direction. For the winding operation, both the speed limit and the torque reference input are positive. The motor will accelerate when the torque reference input is larger than the load and will decelerate when it is smaller than the load. If the motor turns faster than the speed limit, a negative compensation value is output from the speed limiter circuit. When the speed then drops below the speed limit, a positive compensation value is output. The torque compensation is proportional to the ASR proportional gain. When the sum of the torque reference and the torque compensation output by the speed limiter is the same as the actual load, the motor will stop accelerating and run at a constant speed.
Rewinding Operation
In a rewinding operation, the line (speed) and torque generated by the motor are in the opposite directions. (In this example, it is assumed that the line speed is positive and the torque reference input is negative.) For the rewinding operation, the speed limit is positive and the torque reference input is negative. If the motor turns faster than the speed limit, a negative compensation value is output from the speed limiter circuit. If the motor is rotating in reverse, a positive compensation value is output. If the speed is 0 or is below the speed limit, a 0 compensation value is output. In this way, the output from the speed limiter is used to maintain the motor speed between 0 and the speed limit. When the sum of the torque reference and the torque compensation out-
6121
6
6122 put by the speed limiter is the same as the actual load, the motor will stop accelerating and run at a constant speed.
Winding Operation Rewinding Operation n T
T
Line Direction n
Line Direction
Configuration
M
Reverse Forward
M
Normal Rotation Direction
Torque Reference Polarity (TREF)
Speed Limit Polarity
(SLIM)
Forward Reverse
Generated Torque
Torque limit
TREF
Torque n
-(d5-05)
0
Speed nLIM nLIM
Torque limit
Torque limit
Torque n
0
(d5-05)
Speed
TREF
Torque limit
Torque limit
-(d5-05)
Torque
Torque limit n
Torque
TREF
0 nLIM
Speed
TREF
Torque limit n nLIM
0
(d5-05)
Speed
Torque limit
Torque Reference Signal Adjustments
Torque Reference Delay Time (d5-02)
The filter time constant in the torque reference section can be adjusted using parameter d5-02. This parameter is used to eliminate noise in the torque reference signal and adjust the responsiveness to the host controller.
Increase the setting if oscillations occur during torque control.
Setting the Torque Compensation
An analog input can be used to apply a torque compensation (H3-09 = 14). When the amount of torque loss for mechanical loss or other influences at the load is input to one of this terminal, it is added to the torque reference to compensate the loss. The direction of torque will be as follows:
•
•
Positive voltage (current): Torque compensation reference for forward motor rotation (counterclockwise as viewed from the motor output axis).
Negative voltage: Torque compensation reference for reverse motor rotation (clockwise as viewed from the motor output axis).
Since the polarity of the voltage input determines the direction, only forward torque compensation can be input when the 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA signal level has been selected. If a reverse torque compensation shall be input, be sure to select the 0 to ±10 V signal level.
Speed/Torque Control Switching Function
It is possible to switch between speed control and torque control using one of the digital inputs (H1 = 71,
Speed/Torque Control Change). Speed control is performed when the input is OFF and torque control is performed when the input is ON. The parameter d5-01 has to be set to 0.
Setting the Speed/Torque Control Switching Timer (d5-06)
The delay between a change in the speed/torque control switching function input (ON to OFF or OFF to ON) and the corresponding change in the control mode can be set in parameter d5-06. During the timer delay, the value of the 2 analog inputs will retain the values they had when the ON/OFF status of speed/torque control switching signal was changed. Use this delay to complete any changes required in external signals.
shows an example of speed/torque control switching.
CLOSED CLOSED
OPEN OPEN
Speed/torque change signal
Run
Run command Stop Stop
Control mode
Terminal A1 input
Terminal A2 input
Speed
Speed reference
Torque limit
Torque
Speed limit
Speed
Speed reference
Torque limit
Torque reference
Torque
Speed limit
Speed (decel to stop)
Torque reference
1 2 3 4
Fig 6.87 Speed/Torque Control Switching Time Chart
Application Precautions
• The function of the torque reference input (A1 or A2) changes when the control mode is switched between torque control and speed control.
During speed control: The analog input terminal is used as the torque limit input.
During torque control: The analog input terminal is used as the torque reference input.
• When the run command is turned OFF, the control method will be speed control. Even from the torque control mode, the system will automatically change to speed control and decelerate to a stop when the run command turns OFF.
6
6123
Droop Control Function
Droop control is a function that allows to achieve a load sharing between two motors that drive a single load.
The Droop Control function must be enabled at one inverter only. If by this inverter the torque rises, the speed is reduced and the other inverter takes over more load. Thereby the load is shared automatically to both motors.
Related Constants
Parameter
No.
b7-01 b7-02
Droop Control gain
Droop Control delay time
Name
Factory
Setting
0.0
0.05 s
Change during
Operation
Yes
No
V/f
No
No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
No No
No No
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
Setting the Droop Control Gain
Set the Droop Control gain in parameter b7-01 to the amount of speed reduction when the maximum output frequency is input and the rated torque is generated (see
). b7-01 is set as percentage of the maximum
output voltage.
Torque b7-01
100%
6
0
Speed reference
Fig 6.88 Droop Control Gain
Speed
Droop Control can be disabled by setting the parameter b5-07 to 0.
Setting the Droop Control Delay Time
The Droop Control delay time in parameter b7-02 is used to adjust the responsiveness of droop control.
Increase this setting if oscillations or hunting occur.
6124
Zero-Servo Function
The Zero-Servo function holds the motor when the motor is stopped in a so called Zero-Servo status. This means, that if the frequency reference falls below the Zero-Speed level (parameter b2-01) a position loop is activated and the motor is kept at the position, even if a load is applied.
The zero-servo function must be enabled using a digital input, which is programmed for is set to Zero-Servo command (H1 = 72).
The actual deviation of the rotor position from the zero position can be monitored using parameter U1-35. The shown value must be divided by to the get the displacement in encoder pulses.
A digital output (H2 = 33) can be used to signalize the completion of a Zero-Servo command. The contact is closed as long as the actual rotor position is within the zero position E Zero-Servo completion width.
Related Constants
Parameter
No.
b2-01 b9-01 b9-02
Name
Zero speed level (DC injection braking starting frequency)
Zero-servo gain
Zero-Servo completion width
Factory
Setting
0.5 Hz
5
10
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
V/f
A
No
No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
No No
No No
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set Value
72 Zero-servo command (ON: Zero-servo)
Function
V/f
No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
No No
Closed
Loop
Vector
Yes
Multifunction Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set Value
33
Function
Zero-servo end
ON: Current position is within zero-servo start position ± the zero-servo end width.
Monitors
Parameter
Number
Name
U1-35
Zero-servo movement pulses
V/f
No
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
No No Yes
Description
Output Signal Level at Analog
Output
Shows the number of PG pulses times 4 for the movement range when stopped at zero.
(Cannot be output.)
Min.
Unit
1
V/f
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
No No No A
6
6125
6
Timing Chart
An example timing chart for the Zero-Servo function showing the input and output signals is given in the figure below.
Run command ON OFF
Zero Servo Command ON
OFF
Frequency (speed) reference
Excitation level b2-01
Motor speed
Zero Servo End signal
Zero-servo status
Fig 6.89 Time Chart for the Zero-Servo Function
Application Precautions
•
•
•
•
Be sure to leave the run command input activated. If the run command is turned OFF, the output will be interrupted and the zero-servo function will become inactive.
The holding force of the Zero-Servo position loop can be adjusted in parameter b9-01. The holding force will increase if the set value is increased. Oscillation and hunting may occur, if the setting is too large.
Adjust b9-01 after adjusting the speed controller (ASR).
The Zero-Servo detection width is set as the allowable displacement from the Zero-Servo start position.
Set the b9-02 taking the number of displacement pulses from the PG multiplied by 4.
The Zero-Servo completion signal will be turned OFF when the zero servo command is turned OFF.
IMPORTANT
Do not use the Zero-Servo for extended periods of time with 100% of torque. Inverter errors may result. If the Zero Servo function shall be used continuously, make sure that the output current during the servolock is 50% of the motor current or less.
6126
Kinetic Energy Buffering
The kinetic energy buffering function can be used to decelerate to stop after a sudden power loss using the kinetic energy of the rotating machine to maintain the DC bus voltage. Thereby an uncontrolled coasting of a machine can be prevented. The function can be activated using a multifunction input that i.e. can be operated by a DC bus undervoltage alarm output or by a voltage drop relay. A wiring example is shown in Fig. 6.80
.
L1
L2
L3
Varispeed F7
Terminal S3 to S7
H1-
SN
=66
Voltage drop relay
Fig 6.90 Wiring Example for KEB function usage to
Motor
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
C1-09
L2-01
L2-05
L2-08
Fast stop time
Undervoltage detection level
Name
Momentary power loss detection
Frequency reduction gain at Kinetic Energy Buffering start.
Factory
Setting
10.0s
0
190 V *
100
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
* The factory setting depends upon the inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
V/f
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
Setting the Momentary Power Loss Detection (L2-01)
•
•
L2-01 = 0
The inverter trips with undervoltage fault (UV1).
L2-01 =1
No UV1 is detected within the time which is set in parameter L2-02. If this time is exceeded and the power has not returned, an UV1 fault is output.
• No UV1 is detected. The inverter continues operation as long as the CPU is working.
To use the Kinetic Energy Buffering function in connection with the UV alarm output of the inverter, parameter L2-01 must be set to 1 or 2.
Setting the Undervoltage Level (L2-05)
This parameter sets the voltage level for the DC bus at which a DC bus undervoltage (UV, UV1) is detected.
Normally there is no need to change this setting. If the UV detection is used for activating the Kinetic Energy
Buffering function, the UV detection level should be increased to the maximum to detect the UV as fast as possible.
6
6127
6
Adjusting the Kinetic Energy Buffering Deceleration Time (C1-09)
The fast stop time set in parameter C1-09 is used to decelerate to stop when a Kinetic Energy Buffering command is input.
To set up this parameter do the following:
• Increase C1-09 until a UV1 fault is detected during deceleration. (If L2-01 is set to 2, no UV1 will be detected, but the motor will start to coast when the DC bus voltage drops too much.) The highest setting value of C1-09, at which no UV1 is detected will be the maximum deceleration time.
•
•
Decrease C1-09 until a DC bus overvoltage (OV) is detected. The lowest setting value of C1-09, at which no OV is detected, will be the minimal deceleration time.
Set a value for C1-09, that is somewhere in the middle between the maximum and the minimum deceleration time.
Adjusting the Frequency Reduction Gain at Kinetic Energy Buffering Start (L2-08)
When the Kinetic Energy Buffering function is enabled, the output frequency is reduced for a certain frequency amount in order to prevent an UV1 fault. The amount of this frequency step can be set using parameter
L2-08. It is set in percent of the slip frequency before the Kinetic Energy Buffering signal was input. Normally there is no need to change this setting.
•
•
Increase the setting if an undervoltage fault occurs right after Kinetic Energy Buffering start.
Decrease the setting if an overvoltage fault occurs right after Kinetic Energy Buffering start.
Multifunction Input Settings: H1-01 to H1-05 (Terminal S3-S7)
Kinetic Energy Buffering Command NC: “65”
• Storing this setting for one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05, the Kinetic Energy Buffering function can be activated using a NC contact.
Kinetic Energy Buffering Command NO: “66”
• Using this setting for one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05, the Kinetic Energy Buffering function can be activated using a NO contact.
High Slip Braking (HSB)
If the load inertia is large the high slip braking function can be used to shorten the deceleration time compared to the normal deceleration time without using a braking option (braking resistor, braking resistor unit).
The function must be activated by a multifunction input. It is not comparable with the normal deceleration function. It does not use a ramp function.
HSB should not be used at normal operation instead of a deceleration ramp.
6128
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
N3-01
N3-02
N3-03
N3-04
Name
High-slip braking deceleration frequency width
High-slip braking current limit
High-slip braking stop dwell time
High-slip braking OL time
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
Function
68 High Slip Braking command (ON: HSB activated)
Factory
Setting
5%
150%
1.0 s
40 s
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A No
A
A
A
No
No
No
Closed
Loop
Vector
No
No
No
No
V/f
Yes
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Yes No
Closed
Loop
Vector
No
Adjusting the HSB Deceleration Frequency Width (N3-01)
This parameter sets the step value that is used for lowering the output frequency to achieve a large negative slip and thereby to brake the motor.
Normally no adjustments is necessary. Increase the value if a DC bus overvoltage faults occur.
Adjusting the HSB Current Limit (N3-02)
The setting of parameter N3-02 limits the output current while high slip braking is active. The current limit affects the achievable deceleration time.
The lower the current limit the longer is the deceleration time.
Setting the HSB Dwell Time at Stop (N3-03)
At the end of a high slip braking the output frequency is held at the minimum output frequency for the time set in N3-03. Increase the time if the motor coasts after HSB.
Setting the HSB Overload Time (N3-04)
N3-04 sets the HSB overload time. If the output frequency does not change for any reason although an HSB command is given, an OL7 fault will be displayed and the fault contact will operate.
Activating High Slip Braking
If one of the multifunction inputs is set to “68” it can be used to activate the HSB function. The inverter will brake the motor immediately after the HSB command was given. HSB cannot be stopped, i.e. normal inverter operation cannot be resumed.
The HSB function is activated by a pulse signal, a continuous activating of the digital input is not necessary.
6
6129
6
Digital Operator Functions
Setting Digital Operator Functions
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Name o1-01 o1-02 o1-03 o1-04 o1-05 o2-01 o2-02 o2-03 o2-04 o2-05 o2-06 o2-07 o2-08 o2-09 o2-10 o2-12 o2-13
* Depends on the inverter capacity
Monitor selection
Monitor selection after power up
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor
Setting unit for frequency reference related parameters
LCD Display contrast
LOCAL/REMOTE key enable/disable
STOP key during control circuit terminal operation
Inverter kVA selection
User parameter initial value
Frequency reference setting method selection
Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected
Cumulative operation time setting
Cumulative operation time selection
Initialize Mode
Fan operation time setting
Fault trace initialize kWh monitor initialize
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
1
0 *
3
1
0
0
6
1
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
V/f
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A A
A
No
A
A
A
A A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Monitor Selection (o1-01)
Using parameter o1-01 the third monitor item that is displayed in drive mode can be selected. This function has no effect on the optional LCD-operator (JVOP-160).
Monitor Display when the Power Supply is Turned ON (o1-02)
Using parameter o1-02 the monitor item (U1power supply is turned ON can be selected.
) that is to be displayed on the Digital Operator when the
Changing Frequency Reference and Display Units (o1-03)
Set the Digital Operator frequency reference and display units using parameter o1-03. The setting in o1-03 will affect the display units of the following monitor items:
•
•
U1-01 (Frequency Reference)
U1-02 (Output Frequency)
•
•
•
U1-05 (Motor Speed)
U1-20 (Output Frequency after Soft Start) d1-01 to d1-17 (Frequency references)
6130
Changing the Units for Frequency Parameters Related to V/f settings (o1-04)
Using parameter o1-04 the unit for frequency parameters related to the V/f setting can be changed. If o1-04 is set to 0 it will be Hz. If o1-04 is set to 1 it will be rpm.
Changing the Display Contrast (o1-05)
Using o1-05 the contrast of the LCD display on the digital operator can be raised or lowered. Lowering the o1-
05 value will decrease the contrast and vice versa.
Disabling the LOCAL/REMOTE Key (o2-01)
Set o2-01 to 0 to disable the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator.
If the key is disabled, it cannot be used anymore to switch over the frequency reference source or the RUN command source between LOCAL and REMOTE.
Disabling the STOP Key (o2-02)
This parameter is used to set whether the STOP key on the operator is active during remote control (b1-02 ≠ 0) or not.
If o2-02 is set to 1, a STOP command from the operators STOP key will be accepted. If o2-02 is set to 0 it will be disregarded.
Initializing Changed Parameter Values (o2-03)
You can save the current Inverter parameter setting values as user-set parameter initial values. Therefore parameter o2-03 has to be set to 1.
To initialize the Inverter parameters using the user-set initial values in memory set parameter A1-03 to 1110.
To clear the user-set initial values in memory, set o2-03 to 2.
Changing the Inverter Capacity Setting (o2-04)
The inverter capacity setting can be set using parameter o2-04. Refer to
page 5-72, Factory Settings that
Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)
to see parameters that depend on this setting.
Normally it not necessary to change this setting, unless the control card has been changed.
Setting the Frequency Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the
Enter Key (o2-05)
This function is active when frequency references are input from the Digital Operator. When o2-05 is set to 1, you can increment and decrement the frequency reference using the UP and DOWN keys without using the
Enter key.
Operation Selection when the Digital Operator is Disconnected (o2-06)
This function selects the operation when the digital operator gets disconnected when a RUN command is active.
If o2-06 is set to 0 the operation is continued.
If o2-06 is set to 1 the output is switched off and the motor coasts to stop. The fault contact is operated. When the operator is reconnected an OPR (Operator disconnected) is shown.
6
6131
6
Cumulative Operation Time (o2-07 and o2-08)
The inverter has a function that counts the operation time of the inverter cumulatively.
Using parameter o2-07 the cumulative operation time can be changed, e.g. after a replacement of the control board. If parameter o2-08 is set to 0 the inverter counts the time whenever the power supply is switched ON. If o2-08 is set to 1 the time when a RUN command is active is counted only. The factory setting is 0.
Cooling Fan Operation Time (o2-10)
This function counts the operating time of the inverter mounted fan cumulatively.
Using parameter o2-10 the counter can be reset, e.g. when the fan was replaced.
Fault Trace Initialize (o2-12)
This function can be used to initialize the fault trace by setting parameter o2-12 to 1.
kWh Monitor Initialize (o2-14)
Using this parameter the kWh monitor (U1-29 and U1-30) can be initialized.
Copying Parameters
The Digital Operator can perform the following three functions using a built-in EEPROM (non-volatile memory).
•
•
•
Store Inverter parameter set values in the Digital Operator by setting o3-01 to 1 (READ)
Write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter by setting o3-01 to 2 (COPY)
Compare parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator with Inverter parameters settings by setting o3-01 to 3 (VERIFY)
The data saved in the operator can be protected from overwriting by setting parameter o3-02 to 0. In the case a
READ command can not be executed. If it is nevertheless still done, “PrE” will be displayed at the operator.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
o3-01 o3-02
Copy function selection
Read permitted selection
Name
Factory
Setting
0
0
Change during
Operation
No
No
V/f
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
6132
Storing Inverter set values in the Digital Operator (READ)
To store Inverter set values in the Digital Operator use the following method.
Step
No.
Explanation
1 Press the Menu Key and select advanced programming mode.
Digital Operator Display
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
2
3
4
5
6
Press the DATA/ENTER Key.
Press the Increment and Decrement Key until parameter o3-01 is displayed
(Copy Function Selection).
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 - 00=1
Select Language
-ADV-
COPY Function o3 - 01=0
Copy Funtion Sel
Press the DATA/ENTER Key and select the constants setting display.
Change the set value to 1 using the Increment Key.
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3-01= 0
COPY SELECT
*0*
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3-01= 1
*0*
INV OP READ
Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The READ function will start.
-ADV-
READ
INV OP READING
7
If the READ function ends normally, “End” is displayed on the Digital Operator.
-ADV-
READ
READ COMPLETE
8 The display returns to o3-01 when a key is pressed.
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3 01 =0
COPY SELECT
*0*
If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the o3-01 display. Refer to
page 7-15, Digital Operator Copy Function Faults for corrective actions.
6
6133
6
Writing Parameter Set Values Stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
To write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter, use the following method.
Step
No.
Explanation Digital Operator Display
1 Press the MENU Key and select advanced programming mode.
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
2
3
4
5
6
Press the DATA/ENTER Key.
Press the Increment and Decrement Key until parameter o3-01 is displayed
(Copy Function Selection).
Press the DATA/ENTER Key and select the constants setting display.
Change the set value to 2 using the Increment Key.
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 - 00 = 1
Select Language
-ADV-
COPY Function o3 - 01 = 0
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3-01= 0
*0*
COPY SELECT
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3-01= 2
*0*
OP INV WRITE
Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The COPY function will start.
-ADV-
COPY
OP INV COPYING
7
If the COPY function ends normally, “End” is displayed on the Digital Operator.
-ADV-
COPY
COPY COMPLETE
8 The display returns to o3-01 when a key is pressed.
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3 01 =0
COPY SELECT
*0*
for corrective actions.
6134
Comparing Inverter Parameters and Digital Operator Parameter Set Values (VERIFY)
To compare Inverter parameters and Digital Operator parameter set values, use the following method.
Step
No.
Explanation Digital Operator Display
1 Press the MENU Key. and select advanced programming mode.
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
2
3
4
5
6
Press the DATA/ENTER Key.
Press the Increment and Decrement Key until the parameter o3-01 is displayed (Copy Function Selection).
Press the DATA/ENTER Key and select the function setting display.
Change the set value to 3 using the Increment Key.
Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The VERIFY function will start.
-ADV-
Initialization
A1 - 00 = 1
Select Language
-ADV-
COPY Function o3 - 01=0
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3-01= 0
*0*
COPY SELECT
-ADV-
Copy Funtion Sel o3-01= 3
*0*
OP INV VERIFY
-ADV-
VERIFY
DATA VERIFYING
7
If the VERIFY function ends normally, “End” is displayed on the Digital
Operator.
-ADV-
VERIFY
VERIFY COMPLETE
8
INFO
The display returns to o3-01 when a key is pressed.
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel o3 01 = 0
COPY SELECT
*0*
If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the o3-01 display. Refer to
page 7-15, Digital Operator Copy Function Faults for corrective actions.
When using the copy function, check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter data and the Digital Operator data.
• Inverter product and type
• Software number
• Inverter capacity and voltage class
• Control method
6
6135
6
Prohibiting Overwriting of Parameters
If A1-01 is set to 0, all parameters except A1-01 and A1-04 are write protected, U1, U2 and U3-
will be displayed. If A1-01 is set to 1, only the parameters A1-01, A1-04 and A2written, U1, U2 and U3-
can be read or
will be displayed. All other parameters will not be displayed.
If you set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to 1B
(write parameters permitted), parameters can be written from the digital operator when the terminal that has been set is ON. When the set terminal is OFF, writing parameters other than the frequency reference is prohibited. However, the parameters can be read.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
A1-01 Parameter access level
Name
Factory
Setting
2
Change during
Operation
Yes
V/f
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
Setting a Password
When a password is set in A1-05 and if the set values in A1-04 and A1-05 do not match, only the settings of parameters A1-01 to A1-03, or A2-01 to A2-32 can be modified.
The setting of all parameters except A1-00 can be prohibited using the password function in combination with setting parameter A1-01 to 0 (Monitor only).
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
A1-01
A1-04
A1-05
Parameter access level
Password
Password setting
Name
Factory
Setting
2
0
0
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
V/f
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A A
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
A
Setting a Password
The password can be set in parameter A1-05. Normally A1-05 is not displayed. To display and modify A1-05 the MENU and Reset key must be pressed together in the A1-04 display.
6136
Displaying User-set Parameters Only
The A2 parameters (user-set parameters) and A1-01 (parameter access level) can be used to establish a parameter set that contains only the most important parameters.
Set the number of the parameter to which you want to refer in A2-01 to A2-32, and then set A1-01 to 1. Using the advanced programming mode you can read and modify A1-01 to A1-03 and the parameters set in A2-01 to
A2-32 only.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
A2-01 to
A2-32
User setting parameters
Name
Factory
Setting
Change during
Operation
No
V/f
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Closed
Loop
Vector
A A A
6
6137
6
Option Cards
Using PG Feedback Option Cards
To get a more precise speed control the inverter can be equipped with a PG option card to connect a pulse generator. Two different PG cards can be used, the PG-B2 and the PG-X2. Refer to
page 2-28, Option Card Models and Specifications
to see details.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
F1-09
F1-10
F1-11
F1-12
F1-13
F1-14
F1-01
F1-02
F1-03
F1-04
F1-05
F1-06
F1-07
F1-08
Name
PG constant
Operation selection at PG open circuit (PGO)
Operation selection at overspeed (OS)
Operation selection at deviation (DEV)
PG rotation
PG division rate (PG pulse monitor)
Integral value during accel/decel enable/disable
Overspeed (OS) detection level
Overspeed detection delay time (OS)
Excessive speed deviation (DEV) detection level
Excessive speed deviation detection delay time (DEV)
Number of PG gear teeth 1
Number of PG gear teeth 2
PG open-circuit detection delay time
1.0 s
10%
0.5 s
0
0
2.0 s
1024
1
1
3
0
1
0
115%
Factory
Setting
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Change during
Operation
No
No
No
No
No
No
V/f
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Q Q
A No
No
No
A
A
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q
A
Using PG Speed Control Card
There are two types of PG Speed Control Card that can be used in V/f control with PG and Closed Loop Vector control:
•
•
PG-B2: A/B-phase pulse input, compatible with complementary outputs.
PG-X2: A/B/Z-phase pulse input, compatible with line drivers (RS-422).
For the mounting instructions, specifications and connection diagrams refer to
page 2-28, Installing and Wiring Option Cards .
IMPORTANT
If Open Loop Vector control is used and a PG card is installed, the speed detected by the PG card is displayed in the monitor parameter U1-05. Therefore the PG constant has to be set in parameter F1-01. The direction of the speed detection can be changed by parameter F1-05.
To change the U1-05 value to the internally calculated value remove the PG card.
Setting Number of PG Pulses (F1-01)
Set the number of PG (Pulse Generator/Encoder) pulses in pulses per revolution.
6138
Suit the PG Rotation Direction and Motor Rotation Direction (F1-05)
Parameter F1-05 suits the PG rotation direction to the motor rotation direction. If the motor is rotating forwards, set whether it is A-phase leads or B-phase leads.
Inverter
Motor PG (encoder)
Forward command
A-phase leads when set value = 0
A-phase
B-phase
Pulse output
B-phase leads when set value = 1
A-phase
B-phase
Example: Forward rotation of standard motor (PG)
Forward command
Motor output axis rotates counter-clockwise during Inverter forward command.
Rotation
(CCW)
A-phase
B-phase
With the used PG the A-phase leads (CCW) when motor rotation is forward.
Generally, the A-phase leads when the rotation direction is counter-clockwise (CCW) seen from the shaft side
(FWD command is input).
Setting Number of Gear Teeth Between PG and Motor (F1-12 and F1-13)
If there are gears between the motor and PG, the gear ratio can be set using F1-12 and F1-13.
When the number of gear teeth has been set, the number of motor rotations within the Inverter is calculated using the following formula.
No. of motor rotations (r/min.) = No. of input pulses from PG × 60 / F1-01 × F1-13 (No. of gear teeth on PG side) / F1-12 (No. of gear teeth on motor side)
Integral Operation During Acceleration and Deceleration (F1-07)
You can select whether to enable or disable integral operation during acceleration and deceleration.
To make the motor speed matching the frequency reference as closely as possible even during acceleration and deceleration, set F1-07 to 1. Refer also to
page 6-36, Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR).
IMPORTANT
If F1-07 is set to 1, overshoot or undershoot may occur easily immediately after acceleration and deceleration. To minimize the possibility of overshoot or undershoot occurring, set F1-07 to 0.
6
6139
6
Setting PG Pulse Monitor Output Dividing Ratio (F1-06)
This function is enabled only when using PG speed control card PG-B2. Set the dividing ratio for the PG pulse monitor output. The set value is expressed as n for the higher place digit, and m for the two lower place digits.
The dividing ratio is calculated as follows:
Dividing ratio = (1 + n)/m (Setting range) n: 0 or 1, m: 1 to 32
F1-06 = n m
The dividing ratio can be set within the following range: 1/32 ≤ F1-06 ≤ 1. For example, if the dividing ratio is
1/2 (set value 2), half of the number of pulses from the PG are output at the pulse monitor.
Detecting PG Open Circuit (F1-02 and F1-14)
Parameter F1-02 selects the stopping method when a PG disconnection is detected.
PG open (PGO) is only detected when the inverter is running at least with a frequency reference higher than
1% of the maximum output frequency or above the minimum frequency (E1-09) and the PG feedback signal is missing for the time set in F1-14 or longer.
Detecting Motor Overspeed (F1-03, F1-08 and F1-09)
An overspeed (OS) is detected when the motor speed continues to exceed the set frequency value in F1-08 for a time longer than set in F1-09. After detecting an overspeed (OS), the Inverter stops according to the setting in F1-03.
Detecting Speed Difference between the Motor and Speed Reference (F1-04, F1-10 and F1-11)
Speed deviation is detected when the speed deviation (i.e., the difference between the speed reference and the actual motor speed) is too large. Speed deviation (DEV) is detected only after a speed agreement (speed reference and actual motor speed are within the setting range of L4-02) and if a speed deviation higher than the set value in F1-10 continues for longer than the time set in F1-11. After a speed deviation is detected, the Inverter stops according to the setting in F1-04.
6140
Analog Reference Cards
When using a AI-14B or A1-14U analog reference card, set parameter b1-01 (Reference selection) to 3
(Option Card).
The AI-14B provides 3 bi-polar input channels with 14-bit (plus sign) A/D conversion.
If b1-01 is set to 1 and F2-01 is set to 0, the channel 1 and 2 replace the analog inputs A1 and A2. A1 becomes the frequency reference input and the function of A2 can be selected using parameter H3-09. In this case no digital input can be set for the Option/Inverter selection function (H1 = 2).
If b1-02 is set to 3 and F2-01 is set to 1, the sum of three input channels becomes the frequency reference value.
The AI-14U provides 2 unipolar inputs channels with 14-bit A/D conversion. Channel 1 is a voltage input and channel 2 is a current input. The sum of the channels 1 and 2 is the frequency reference. F2-01 does not need to be set for the AI-14U option card.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
b1-01
F2-01
Name
Frequency reference source selection
Bi-polar or uni-polar input selection
Factory
Setting
1
0
Change during
Operation
No
No
V/f
Q
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
Q Q
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
Q
A
Digital Reference Cards
When using a DI-08 or DI-16H2 Digital Reference Card, set b1-01 (Reference selection) to 3 (Option Card).
The DI-16H2 can be used to set a frequency using a 16-bit digital reference.
The DI-08 can be used to set a frequency using a 8-bit digital reference.
Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
F3-01 o1-03
Name
Digital input selection
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor
Factory
Setting
0
0
Change during
Operation
No
No
V/f
A
A
Control Methods
V/f with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
A A
A A
Closed
Loop
Vector
A
A
6
6141
6
Selecting Input Terminal Functions for the DI-16H2 Digital Reference Card
The frequency reference from the DI-16H2 Card is determined by the setting of F3-01 and the 12/16-bit switch on the Option card. The possible settings are listed in the table below.
Terminal
TC1
TC2
TC3
Pin No.
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
12-bit Binary with Sign
F3-01 = 7
S1: 12 bit
Bit 0 (2
0
)
Bit 1 (2
1
)
Bit 2 (2
2
)
Bit 3 (2
3
)
Bit 4 (2
4
)
Bit 5 (2
5
)
Bit 6 (2
6
)
Bit 7 (2
7
)
Bit 8 (2
8
)
Bit 9 (2
9
)
Bit A (2
10
)
Bit B (2
11
)
16-bit Binary with Sign
F3-01 = 7
S1: 16 bit
Bit 0 (2
Bit 1 (2
Bit 2 (2
0
1
2
Bit 3 (2
3
)
Bit 4 (2
4
)
Bit 5 (2
5
)
Bit 6 (2
6
)
)
)
)
2
4
8
1
2
4
Bit 7 (2
7
)
Bit 8 (2
8
)
8
1
Bit 9 (2
9
) 2
Bit A (2
10
) 4
Bit B (2
11
) 8
-
Bit C (2
12
)
Bit D (2
13
)
Bit E (2
14
)
Bit F (2
15
)
Sign signal (0: Forward, 1: Reverse)
SET (read) signal (1: Read)
Input signal common (0 V)
Shield wire connection terminal
3-digit BCD with
Sign
F3-01 = 0 to 5
S1: 12 bit
1
BDC digit 1
(0 to 9)
BDC digit 2
(0 to 9)
BDC digit 3
(0 to 9)
-
-
-
-
2
4
8
1
8
2
4
8
1
2
4
8
1
2
4
4-digit BCD with
Sign
F3-01 = 0 to 5
S1: 16 bit
1
BDC digit 1
(0 to 9)
BDC digit 2
(0 to 9)
BDC digit 3
(0 to 9)
BDC digit 4
(0 to 9)
4
8
1
2
4
8
1
2
5-digit BCD without Sign
F3-01 = 6
S1: 16 bit
2
4
BDC digit 1
(2 to 9)
8
BDC digit 2
(0 to 9)
BDC digit 3
(0 to 9)
4
8
1
2 BDC digit 4
(0 to 9)
1 BDC digit 5
2 (0 to 3)
Application Precautions
•
•
The maximum frequency (100% speed) reference will be used when the binary input is set (setting: 6 or 7) and all bits are 1.
Setting F3-01 to 6 is valid only when the D1-16H2 is used. Using this setting a frequency from 0.00 to
399.8 Hz can be set in BCD. The sign bit is used as a data bit, i.e. only positive data can be set. Also, the digit starts from 0, i.e. the minimum setting is 0.02 Hz.
6142
Selecting the Input Terminal Function for a DI-08 Digital Reference Card
The frequency reference from a DI-08 Card is determined by the setting of F3-01, as shown in the following table.
Terminal
TC
Pin No.
1
6
7
8
9
10
11
4
5
2
3
8-bit Binary with Sign
F3-01 = 7
Bit 0 (2
0
)
Bit 1 (2
1
)
Bit 2 (2
2
)
Bit 3 (2
3
)
Bit 4 (2
4
)
Bit 5 (2
5
)
Bit 6 (2
6
)
Bit 7 (2
7
)
Sign signal
SET (read) signal
Reference common signal (0 V)
2-digit BCD with Sign
F3-01 = 0 to 5
1
2
4
8
8
1
2
4
BDC digit 1
(0 to 9)
BDC digit 2
(0 to 15)
Application Precautions
The DI-08 will not function if F3-01 is set to 6.
6
6143
6
Selecting the Digital Reference
The setting range of the digital references is determined by the combination of the settings of o1-03 and F3-01.
The information monitored in U1-01 (Frequency reference) will also change.
DI-16H2 Reference Setting Ranges
With the DI-16H2 option card setting ranges can be set like shown in table below.
o1-03 F3-01
0 or 1
2 to 39
40 to
39999
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
-
-
-
Switch
S1
Reference Input Mode
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 1%
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 1%
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 0.1%
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 0.1%
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 0.01%
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 0.01%
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 1 Hz
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 1 Hz
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 0.1 Hz
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 0.1 Hz
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 0.01 Hz
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 0.01 Hz
16 bits 5-digit BCD without sign, 0.01 Hz
12 bits 12-bit binary with sign, 100%/4095
16 bits 16-bit binary with sign, 100%/30000
12 bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 1 rpm
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 1 rpm
12 bits
16 bits
3-digit BCD with sign, 100%/(1- to 4-digit setting of o1-03)
4-digit BCD with sign, 100%/(1- to 4-digit setting of o1-03)
Reference Setting
Range
-110 to 110%
-110 to 110%
-110.0 to 110.0%
-110.0 to 110.0%
-15.99 to 15.99%
-110.0 to 110.0%
-400 to 400 Hz
-400 to 400 Hz
-159.9 to 159.9 Hz
-400.0 to 400.0 Hz
-15.99 to 15.99 Hz
-159.99 to 159.99 Hz
000.00 to 399.98 Hz
-4095 to 4095
-33000 to 33000
-1599 to 1599 rpm
-15999 to 15999 rpm
-4095 to 4095
-10999 to 10999
(when o1-03 = 9999)
10000 x = 1 to 3
16 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 100%/10000 -11000 to 11000
U1-01 Monitor Unit o1-03 = 0 o1-03 = 1
0.01 Hz
1 rpm
1 rpm
0.01%
5th digit of o1-03 setting:
X = 0, unit: 1
X = 1, unit: 0.1
X = 2, unit: 0.01
X = 3, unit: 0.001
DI-08 Reference Setting Ranges
With the DI-16H2 option card setting ranges can be set like shown in the table below.
F3-01 Reference Input Mode Reference Setting Range
U1-01 Monitor Unit o1-03 = 0 o1-03 = 1
4
5
6
2
3
0
1
7
2-digit BCD with sign, 1%
2-digit BCD with sign, 0.1%
2-digit BCD with sign, 0.01%
2-digit BCD with sign, 1 Hz
2-digit BCD with sign, 0.1 Hz
2-digit BCD with sign, 0.01 Hz
-
12-bit binary with sign, 100%/
4095
-110 to 110%
-15.9 to 15.9%
-1.59 to 1.59%
-159 to 159 Hz
-15.9 to 15.9 Hz
-1.59 to 1.59 Hz
-255 to 255
0.01 Hz 0.01%
6144
7
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasures for Inverter and motor problems.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions......................................7-2
Troubleshooting ...................................................................7-17
7
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
This section describes the fault and alarm functions of the Inverter. These functions include fault detection, alarm detection, operator programming error detection and auto-tuning error detection.
Fault Detection
When the Inverter detects a fault, the fault contact output operates and the Inverter output is switched OFF causing the motor to coast to stop. (The stopping method can be selected for some faults.) A fault code is displayed on the Digital Operator.
When a fault has occurred refer to the following table to identify the fault and to correct the causes.
Use one of the following methods to reset the fault before restarting the Inverter:
• Set a multi-function contact input (H1-01 to H1-05) to 14 (Fault Reset) and turn ON the error reset signal.
•
•
Press the RESET key on the Digital Operator.
Turn the main circuit power supply OFF and then ON again.
To reset a fault it is necessary to remove the cause of the fault and the RUN signal. Only then a Reset signal is accepted.
Table 7.1 Fault Detection
Display
GF
Ground Fault
OC
Over Current
PUF
DC Bus Fuse Open
OV
DC Bus Overvolt
Overcurrent
The Inverter’s output current exceeded the overcurrent detection level.
Meaning
Ground Fault
The ground current at the Inverter output exceeded 50% of the
Inverter rated output current and
L8-09=1 (Enabled).
Probable Causes
One Inverter output was shorted to ground and/or a DCCT is defective.
Shorted Inverter output phase-tophase, shorted motor, locked rotor, load too heavy, accel/decel time too short, contactor on the
Inverter output has opened or closed, a special motor or a motor with a rated current larger than the
Inverter’s output current is used.
Corrective Actions
Remove the motor and run the
Inverter without the motor.
Check the motor for a phase to ground short.
Check the output current with a clampmeter to verify the
DCCT reading.
Remove the motor and run the
Inverter without the motor.
Check the motor for a phaseto-phase short.
Verify the accel/decel times
(C1).
Check the Inverter for a phase-to-phase short at the output.
Check the motor and the motor cables for short circuits or insulation failures (phaseto-phase).
DC Bus Fuse
The fuse in the main circuit is open.
Warning:
Never run the Inverter after replacing the DC bus fuse without checking for shorted components.
Shorted output or terminals or damaged IGBT’s.
DC Bus Overvoltage
The DC bus voltage has exceeded the overvoltage detection level.
Default detection levels are:
200 V class: 410 VDC
400 V class: 820 VDC
The deceleration time is set too short and the regenerative energy from the motor is too large.
The power supply voltage is too high.
Replace the inverter after correcting the fault.
Increase the deceleration time
(C1-02/04/06/08) or connect a braking option.
Check the power supply and decrease the voltage to meet the inverter’s specifications.
72
Display
UV1
DC Bus Undervolt
UV2
CTL PS Undervolt
UV3
MC Answerback
PF
Input Phase Loss
LF
Output Phase Loss
Meaning
DC Bus Undervoltage
200V class: 190 VDC
400 V class: 380 VDC
Table 7.1 Fault Detection
The DC bus voltage is below the
Undervoltage Detection Level
(L2-05). The default settings are:
Probable Causes
The voltage fluctuations of the power supply are too high.
A momentary power loss occurred.
The terminal screws of the input power supply are loose.
An open-phase error occurred at the input terminals.
Main Circuit Voltage Fault
An unusual big ripple on the DC bus voltage has been detected.
Only detected when L8-05=1
(enabled)
Output Open-phase
An open-phase occurred at the
Inverter output.
The fault is detected when the output current falls below 5% of the inverter rated current and L8-
07=1 (enabled)
The acceleration time is set too short.
Main Circuit MC
Operation Failure
The MC stopped responding during Inverter operation. (Applicable Inverter Capacities
200 V class: 37 to 110 kW
400 V class: 75 to 300 kW)
Control Power Supply
Undervoltage
Undervoltage of the control circuit while the Inverter was running.
Inrush Current Prevention Circuit
Fault
An overheating of the charging resistor for the DC bus capacitors occurred.
An error occurred in the inrush current prevention circuit while the Inverter was running.
External load was pulling down the Inverter’s power supplies or there was an internal short in the power/gate drive board.
The contactor of the inrush current prevention circuit is defective.
The MC of the charging circuit did not respond 10 sec. after the
MC ON signal has been output.
(Applicable Inverter Capacities
200 V class: 37 to 110 kW
400 V class: 75 to 300 kW)
The wiring terminals for the input power supply are loose.
A phase loss occurred in the input power supply.
A momentary power loss occurred
The voltage fluctuations in the input power supply are too high.
The voltage balance between the input phases is bad.
There is a broken wire in the output cable.
There is a broken wire in the motor winding.
The output terminals are loose.
The motor being used has a capacity less than 5% of the
Inverter's maximum motor capacity.
Corrective Actions
Check the input voltage.
Check the wiring of the input terminals.
Check the input voltage and the wiring of the input terminals.
Extend the settings in
C1-01/03/05/07
Replace the Inverter.
Remove all connection to the control terminals and cycle the power to the Inverter.
Replace the Inverter.
Cycle the power to the
Inverter.
Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to occur.
Tighten the input terminal screws
Check the power supply voltage
Reset the fault after correcting its cause.
Check the motor and Inverter capacity.
7
73
7
Display
OH
Heatsink Overtemp
OH1
Heatsink Max
Temp
OH3
Motor Overheat 1
OH4
Motor Overheat 2
RH
DynBrk Transistr
RR
DynBrk Transistr
Table 7.1 Fault Detection
Meaning
Inverter's Cooling Fan Stopped
Probable Causes
The ambient temperature is too high.
Heatsink Overheat
The temperature of the Inverter's cooling fin exceeded the setting in
L8-02 and L8-03 = 0 to 2.
There is a heat source nearby.
The Inverter's cooling fan(s) stopped.
The Inverter's internal cooling fan has stopped
(18.5 kW and larger).
The ambient temperature is too high.
Heatsink Overheat
The temperature of the Inverter’s heatsink exceeded 105 °C.
There is a heat source nearby.
Inverter’s Cooling Fan Stopped
The Inverter’s cooling fan(s) stopped.
The Inverter’s internal cooling fan has stopped
(18.5 kW and larger).
Corrective Actions
Check for dirt build-up on the fans or heatsink.
Reduce the ambient temperature around the drive.
Replace the cooling fan(s).
Check for dirt build-up on the fans or heatsink.
Reduce the ambient temperature around the drive.
Replace the cooling fan(s).
Motor Overheating
Detected when the level at A2, programmed for motor temperature (Thermistor input, H3-09=E), exceeds 1.17 V for the time L1-05 and L1-03 = 0 to 2.
Overheating of the motor was measured by the motor thermistor.
Motor Overheating
Detected when the level at A2, programmed for motor temperature (Thermistor input, H3-09=E), exceeds 2.34 V for the time L1-05 and L1-03 = 0 to 2.
Dynamic Braking Resistor
The protection of the heatsink mounted resistor is activated when L8-01=1.
This fault is only applicable when using the 3% duty cycle resistor, which is mounted on the
Inverter’s heatsink. For all other resistors, set L8-01=0.
Dynamic Braking Transistor
The built-in dynamic braking transistor failed.
Overheating of the motor was measured by the motor thermistor.
Overhauling load, extended dynamic braking duty cycle, defective dynamic braking resistor.
Defective or failed dynamic braking resistor caused braking transistor damage.
Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load.
Recheck the accel and decel times (C1).
Recheck the V/f pattern
(E1).
Recheck the motor rated current value (E2-01).
Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load.
Recheck the accel and decel times (C1).
Recheck the V/f pattern
(E1).
Recheck the motor rated current value (E2-01).
Verify dynamic braking duty cycle (load, decel times, motor speed).
Monitor DC bus voltage.
Replace dynamic braking resistor.
Cycle power to the Inverter.
Replace the Inverter.
74
Display
OL1
Motor Overload
OL2
Inv Overload
OL3
Overtorque Det 1
OL4
Overtorque Det 2
OL7
HSB OL
UL3
Undertorq Det 1
UL4
Undertorq Det 2
OS
Overspeed Det
Table 7.1 Fault Detection
Meaning
Motor Overload
Detected when L1-01 = 1 to 3 and the Inverter’s output current exceeded the motor overload curve.
The overload curve is adjustable using parameter E2-01 (Motor
Rated Current), L1-01(Motor Protection Selection) and L2-02
(Motor Protection Time Constant)
Probable Causes
The load is too large. The acceleration time, deceleration time or cycle time are too short.
The voltage settings of the V/f pattern is incorrect for the application.
The setting of Motor Rated Current (E2-01) is incorrect.
Corrective Actions
Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load as well as the accel/decel times
(C1).
Check the V/f characteristics
(E1).
The load is too large. The acceleration time or deceleration times are too short.
Check the setting of Motor
Rated Current Setting (E2-01).
Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load as well as the accel/decel times
(C1).
Inverter Overload
The Inverter output current exceeded the Inverter’s overload curve.
Overtorque Detection 1
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector Control) exceeded L6-02 for longer then the time set in
L6-03 and L6-01 = 3 or 4.
Overtorque Detection 2
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector Control) exceeded L6-05 for longer then the time set in
L6-06 and L6-04 = 3 or 4.
High Slip Braking OL
The output frequency stayed constant for longer than the time set in n3-04 during High Slip Braking.
Undertorque Detection 1
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) fell below L6-02 for longer then the time set in
L6-03 and L6-04 = 7 or 8.
Undertorque Detection 2
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) fell below L6-05 for longer then the time set in
L6-06 and L6-04 = 7 or 8.
Motor Overspeed
Detected when F1-03 = 0 to 2 and
A1-02 = 1 or 3.
The motor speed feedback
(U1-05) exceeded the setting in
F1-08 for a longer time than the setting in F1-09.
The voltage settings of the V/f pattern is incorrect for the application.
The size of the Inverter is too small.
Motor was overloaded.
Motor was overloaded.
The inertia of the load is too large.
Motor was underloaded.
Motor was underloaded.
Overshooting/Undershooting are occurring.
The reference was too high.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 are not appropriate.
Check the V/f characteristics
(E1).
Check the setting of Motor
Rated Current Setting (E2-01).
Ensure the values in L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Ensure the values in L6-05 and L6-06 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Make sure the load is an inertial load.
If possible, reduce the load inertia.
Ensure the values in L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Ensure the values in L6-05 and L6-06 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Adjust the ASR settings in the
C5 parameter group.
Check the reference circuit and reference gain.
Check the settings in F1-08 and F1-09.
7
75
7
Display
PGO
PG Open
DEV
Speed Deviation
SVE
Zero Servo Fault
CF
Out of Control
FBL
Feedback Loss
EF0
Opt External Flt
Meaning
Table 7.1 Fault Detection
PG Disconnection
Detected when F1-02 = 0 to 2 and
A1-02 = 1 or 3
Detected when no PG (encoder) pulses are received for a time longer than the setting in F1-14.
Excessive Speed Deviation
Detected when F1-04 = 0 to 2 and
A1-02 = 1 or 3
The speed deviation is greater than the setting in F1-10 for a time longer than the setting F1-11
Probable Causes
There is a break in the PG wiring.
The PG is wired incorrectly.
Power is not being supplied to the PG.
Wrong brake control sequence when a brake is used.
The load is too large.
The acceleration time and deceleration time are too short.
The load is locked.
The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 are not appropriate.
Wrong brake control sequence when a brake is used.
Corrective Actions
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
Fix the wiring.
Supply power to the PG properly.
Check if the brake is opened when the RUN command is applied.
Reduce the load.
Lengthen the acceleration time and deceleration time.
Check the mechanical system.
Check the settings in F1-10 and F1-11.
Check if the brake is opened when the RUN command is applied.
Increase the torque limit.
Decrease the load torque.
Check for signal noise.
Zero Servo Fault
The motor position moved during
Zero Servo Operation.
The torque limit is too small.
The load torque is too large.
-
Control Fault
A torque limit was reached continuously for 3 seconds or longer during a deceleration stop in Open
Loop Vector control.
PID Feedback Lost
This fault occurs when PID feedback loss detection is programmed to fault (b5-12 = 2) and the PID feedback fell below the
PID Feedback Loss Detection
Level (b5-13) for the PID Feedback Loss Detection Time (b5-14)
Motor parameters were not set properly.
PID feedback source (e.g. transducer, sensor, building automation signal) is not installed correctly or is not working.
Check the motor parameters.
Verify Inverter is programmed to receive the PID feedback source signal.
Check to ensure the PID feedback source is installed and working properly.
External fault input from Communications Option Card
An external fault condition was present, input from a communication option card.
Check for an external fault condition.
Verify the parameters.
Verify communication signals
External fault at terminal S3
EF3
Ext Fault S3
EF4
Ext Fault S4
EF5
Ext Fault S5
EF6
Ext Fault S6
EF 7
Ext Fault S7
External fault at terminal S4
External fault at terminal S5
External fault at terminal S6
An "external fault" was input from a multi-function input terminal (S3 to S7).
Eliminate the cause of the external fault condition.
OPR
Oper Disconnect
External fault at terminal S7
Digital Operator Connection Fault
Detected when the digital operator is removed and the Inverter receives its RUN command through the digital operator
(b1-02=0)
The digital operator was removed during running or the operator cable is broken.
Check the connection of the
Digital Operator.
76
Display
CE
Memobus Com
Err
BUS
Option Com Err
CPF00
COM-
ERR(OP&INV)
CPF01
COM-
ERR(OP&INV)
CPF02
BB Circuit Err
CPF03
EEPROM Error
CPF04
Internal A/D Err
CPF05
External A/D Err
CPF06
Option Error
CPF07
RAM-Err
Table 7.1 Fault Detection
Meaning
MEMOBUS Communication
Error
Detected when control data was not received correctly for two seconds and H5-04 = 0 to 2 and
H5-05=1.
Option Communication Error
After initial communication was established, the connection was lost.
Digital Operator Communication
Fault 1
Communication with the digital operator could not be established within 5 seconds after the power was supplied to the Inverter.
Probable Causes
Connection is broken and/or the master has stopped the communication.
Connection is broken and/or the master has stopped the communication.
Digital operator cable was not securely connected or digital operator is defective and/or control board is defective
Check the connections and all user-side software configurations.
Check the connections and all user-side software configurations.
Corrective Actions
Disconnect the Digital Operator and then connect it again.
Replace the Inverter.
CPU External RAM Fault The control board is damaged.
Cycle the inverter power supply,
Replace the Inverter.
Digital Operator Communication
Fault 2
After communications with the digital operator was established, the communication stopped for 2 seconds or more.
Baseblock circuit error
A baseblock circuit error occurred at power-up.
EEPROM error
Check sum is not valid
CPU Internal A/D Converter
Fault
CPU External A/D Converter
Fault
Option Card Connection Fault
ASIC Internal RAM fault
Digital operator cable was not securely connected or digital operator is defective
The control board is damaged.
Gate array hardware failure at power-up.
Noise or spike was on the control circuit input terminals or the control board is damaged.
Noise or spike was on the control circuit input terminals or the control board is damaged.
Noise or spike was on the control circuit input terminals or the control board is damaged.
The Option Card is not connected properly.
The Inverter or Option Card is damaged
-
The control circuit is damaged.
Disconnect the Digital Operator and then connect it again.
Cycle the power to the
Inverter.
Replace the Inverter.
Perform an initialization to factory defaults.
Cycle the power to the
Inverter.
Replace the Inverter.
Perform an initialization to factory defaults.
Cycle the power to the
Inverter
Replace the Inverter.
Perform an initialization to factory defaults.
Cycle the power to the
Inverter.
Replace the Inverter.
Perform an initialization to factory defaults.
Cycle the power to the
Inverter.
Replace the Inverter.
Turn off the power and reinstall the Option Card again.
Replace the Option Card or the Inverter.
Cycle the power to the
Inverter
Replace the Inverter.
7
77
7
Display
CPF08
WAT-Err
CPF09
CPU-Err
Meaning
Watchdog Timer Fault
CPU-ASIC Mutual
Diagnosis Fault
Table 7.1 Fault Detection
Probable Causes
-
-
The control circuit is damaged.
The control circuit is damaged.
Corrective Actions
Cycle the power to the
Inverter
Replace the Inverter.
Cycle the power to the
Inverter
Replace the Inverter.
CPF10
ASIC-Err
ASIC version fault The control circuit is damaged.
Replace the Inverter.
CPF20
Option A/D Error
CPF21
Option CPU Down
CPF22
Option Type Err
CPF23
Option DPRAM
Err
Communication Option Card A/D
Converter Error
Self-diagnosis Fault of
Option Board
Option Board Code Number Fault
Option Board
Interconnection Fault
Option board connection is not correct.
Option card A/D converter is faulty.
Noise or spike was on the communication line and/or defective option board.
Unrecognizable option board is connected to the control board.
An option board was not correctly connected to the control board, or an option board that was not made for the Inverter is attached to the control board.
Turn off the power and reinstall the option board again
Remove all inputs to the option board
Perform an initialization to factory defaults.
Cycle the power to the
Inverter
Replace the option board
Replace the inverter
Perform an initialization to factory defaults.
Cycle the power to the
Inverter
Replace the option board
Replace the Inverter
Remove any option boards
Perform an initialization to factory defaults
Cycle the power to the
Inverter
Replace the option board
Replace the Inverter
Turn off the power and reinstall the option board again
Perform an initialization to factory defaults
Cycle the power to the
Inverter
Replace the option board
Replace the Inverter
78
Alarm Detection
Alarms are Inverter protection function that do not operate the fault contact output. The system will automatically return to its original status when the cause of the alarm has been removed.
During an alarm condition, the Digital Operator display flashes and an alarm output is generated at the multifunction outputs (H2-01 to H2-03) if programmed
When an alarm occurs, take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below.
Table 7.2 Alarm Detection
Display Corrective Actions
EF
External Fault
(flashing)
UV
DC Bus Undervolt
(flashing)
OV
DC Bus Overvolt
(flashing)
OH
Heatsnk Overtmp
(flashing)
OH2
Over Heat 2
(flashing)
Meaning
Forward/Reverse Run Commands
Input Together
Both the forward and the reverse run commands are input simultaneously for 500ms or more. This alarm stops the motor.
DC Bus Undervoltage
The following conditions occurred
The DC bus voltage was below the Undervoltage Detection Level
Setting (L2-05).
The MC of the inrush current prevention circuit opened.
The control power supply voltage was below the CUV level.
UV Alarm is only detected when the drive is in a stopped condition
DC Bus Overvoltage
The DC bus voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level.
200 V class: 410 VDC
400 V class: 820 VDC
OV Alarm is only detected when the drive is in a stopped condition
Probable causes
The external forward and reverse command were input simultaneously.
For the probable causes please have a look at UV1, UV2 and
UV3 in table 7.1.
The power supply voltage is too high.
The ambient temperature is too high.
Heatsink Overheat
The temperature of the Inverter's cooling fin exceeded the temperature programmed in L8-02.
Enabled when L8-03 = 3
There is a heat source nearby.
The Inverter cooling fan(s) has stopped.
Overheat Alarm
An OH2 alarm signal is input from a multi-function digital input terminal (S3 to S7) that is programmed to OH2 Alarm Signal Input (H1 = B)
An external overheat condition exists that was connected to one of the multi-function input terminals S3 to S7.
Check external sequence logic, so only one input is received at a time.
For the corrective actions please have a look at UV1,
UV2 and UV3 in table 7.1
Check the power supply and decrease the voltage to meet the Inverter’s specifications
Check for dirt build-up on the fans or heatsink.
Reduce the ambient temperature around the Inverter
Replace the cooling fan(s).
Check the external overheat signal connected to the specified digital input.
Verify the parameter settings in H1-
OH3
Motor Overheat 1
(flashing)
Motor Overheating Alarm
Detected when the level at A2, programmed for motor temperature (Thermistor input, H3-09 =
E), exceeds 1.17 V for the time
L1-05 and L1-03 = 3.
Overheating of the motor as measured by the motor thermistor.
Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load.
Recheck the accel and decel times (C1)
Recheck the V/f pattern
(E1).
Recheck the motor rated current value (E2-01)
7
79
7
Display
OL3
Overtorque Det 1
(flashing)
OL4
Overtorque Det 1
(flashing)
UL3
Undertorque Det 1
(flashing)
UL4
Undertorque Det 2
(flashing)
OS
Overspeed Det
(flashing)
PGO
PG Open
(flashing)
DEV
Speed Deviation
(flashing)
EF0
Opt External Flt
(flashing)
Table 7.2 Alarm Detection
Meaning
Overtorque Detection 1
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) exceeded L6-02 for longer than the time set in
L6-03 and L6-01 = 1 or 2
Overtorque Detection 1
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) exceeded L6-02 for longer then the time set in
L6-03 and L6-01 = 1 or 2
Undertorque Detection 1
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) fell below L6-02 for longer then the time set in L6-03 and L6-01 = 5 or 6.
Undertorque Detection 2
The Inverter’s output current (V/f control) or the output torque (Vector control) fell below L6-05 for longer then the time set in L6-06 and L6-04 = 5 or 6.
Overspeed Alarm
Detected when A1-02 = 1 or 3 and F1-03 = 3.
The motor speed feedback
(U1-05) exceeded the value set in
F1-08 for a time longer than the setting in F1-09.
PG Disconnection
Detected when F1-02 = 3 and A1-
02 = 1 or 3.
Detected when no PG (encoder) pulses are received for a time longer than the setting in F1-14
Probable causes
Motor was overloaded
Motor was overloaded
Motor was underloaded
Motor was underloaded
Overshooting/undershooting are occurring.
The reference was too high.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 are not appropriate.
There is break in the PG wiring.
The PG is wired incorrectly.
Power isn't being supplied to the
PG.
Excessive Speed Deviation
Detected when F1-04 = 3 and
A1-02 = 1 or 3.
The speed deviation is greater than the setting in F1-10 for longer than the setting in F1-11.
Communication Option Card
External Fault
The load is too large.
The acceleration time and deceleration time are too short.
The load is locked.
The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 are not appropriate.
An external fault condition was present, input from a communication option card.
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
Fix the wiring
Supply power to the PG properly.
Corrective Actions
Ensure the values in L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Ensure the values in L6-05 and L6-06 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Ensure the values in L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Ensure the values in L6-05 and L6-06 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status to eliminate fault.
Adjust the ASR settings in the
C5 parameter group.
Check the reference circuit and reference gain.
Check the settings in F1-08 and F1-09
Reduce the load.
Lengthen the acceleration time and deceleration time.
Check the mechanical system.
Check the settings in F1-10 and F1-11.
Check for an external fault condition.
Verify the parameters.
Verify communication signals
710
Display
EF3
Ext Fault S3
(flashing)
EF4
Ext Fault S4
(flashing)
EF5
Ext Fault S5
(flashing)
EF6
Ext Fault S6
(flashing)
EF7
Ext Fault S7
(flashing)
Meaning
Table 7.2 Alarm Detection
External fault at terminal S3
External fault at terminal S4
External fault at terminal S5
External fault at terminal S6
External fault at terminal S7
Probable causes
An external fault was input from a multi-function input terminal
(S3 to S7) that is programmed for external fault function that alarms only and continues to run the
Inverter.
Corrective Actions
Eliminate the cause of the external fault condition
FBL
Feedback Loss
(flashing)
CE
MEMOBUS Com
Err
(flashing)
BUS
Option Com Err
(flashing)
DNE
Drive Not Enable
(flashing)
Ext Run Active
Cannot Reset
CALL
ComCall
(flashing)
PID Feedback Lost
This fault occurs when PID feedback loss detection is programmed to alarm (b5-12 = 1) and the PID feedback fell below the PID Feedback Loss Detection
Level (b5-13) for the PID Feedback Loss Detection Time
(b5-14)
MEMOBUS Communications
Alarm
Detected when control data was not received correctly for two seconds and H5-04 = 3 and
H5-05 = 1.
Option Communications Alarm
After initial communication was established, the connection was lost.
Detected when a multi-function digital input (H1-01 to H1-05) is programmed for 6A: Drive
Enable.
The Inverter does not have the enable command when the RUN command is applied. This alarm stops the motor.
PID feedback source (e.g. transducer, sensor, building automation signal) is not installed correctly or is not working
Connection is broken and/or the master has stopped the communication.
Connection is broken and/or the master has stopped the communication.
Enable command was lost while the Inverter was running.
The RUN command was applied prior to the enable signal.
Detected when a RESET command is input while the RUN command is still active
Communications on Standby
Communication has not yet been established.
The RUN command has not been removed and a RESET command is input by digital input or by the
RESET button on the digital operator.
Connection was not made properly or user software was not configured to the proper baud rate or configuration (e.g. Parity).
Verify Inverter is programmed to receive the PID feedback source signal.
Check to ensure the PID feedback source is installed and working properly.
Check the connections and all user-side software configurations.
Check the connections and all user-side software configurations.
Check the wiring of the input terminal and the external sequence of the enable signal.
Apply and maintain the enable command before applying the
RUN command.
Remove the RUN signal first and reset the error.
Check the connections and all user-side software configurations.
7
711
7
Operator Programming Errors
An Operator Programming Error (OPE) occurs when an inapplicable parameter is set or an individual parameter setting is inappropriate. The Inverter will not operate until the parameter is set correctly; however, no alarm or fault outputs will occur. If an OPE occurs, change the appropriate parameter by checking the cause shown in Table 7.3. When OPE error is displayed, press the ENTER key to display U1-34 (OPE Detected).
This monitor will display the parameter that is causing the OPE error.
Table 7.3 Operator Programming Errors
Display
OPE01 kVA Selection
OPE02
Limit
OPE03
Terminal
OPE05
Sequence Select
OPE06
PG Opt Missing
Meaning
Inverter kVA Setting Error
Parameter Setting
Out of Range
Multi-function Input
Selection Error
RUN/Reference Command
Selection Error
The Reference Source Selection b1-01 and/or the RUN Source
Selection parameter b1-02 are set to 3 (option board) but no option board is installed.
Probable Causes
The control board was replaced and the kVA parameter (o2-04) is set incorrectly
Corrective Actions
Enter the correct kVA setting
(o2-04) by referring to the table “Factory settings that change with the Inverter kVA setting“ on page 5-60.
Parameter setting was outside of the allowable range.
One of the following errors has been made in the multi-function input (H1-01 to H1-05) settings:
• Duplicate functions were selected.
• UP/DOWN Command(10 and
11) were not selected simultaneously.
• The up/down commands (10 and 11) and Accel/Decel Ramp
Hold (A) were selected at the same time.
• More than one of the Speed
Search inputs (61, 62, 64) were set simultaneously.
• External Baseblock NO (8) and
External Baseblock NC (9) were selected at the same time.
• The up/down commands (10 and 11) were selected while
PID Control was enabled.
• The Emergency Stop Command NO (15) and NC(17) are set simultaneously.
• PID is enabled and UP and/or
DOWN (10 / 11) command are set.
• HSB (68) and KEB (65/66) command are set simultaneously.
Verify the parameter settings.
Verify the parameter settings in H1-
Option board is not installed or is installed incorrectly
Verify that the board is installed. Remove the power supply and re-install the option board again
Recheck the setting of b1-01 and b1-02.
Control method selection error
One of the control methods needing a PG feedback was selected
(A1-02 = 1 or 3), but a PG option board is not installed.
Verify the control method selection in parameter A1-02 and/or the installation of the
PG option board.
712
Display
OPE07
Analog Selection
OPE08
Constant Selection
OPE09
PID Selection
OPE10
V/f Ptrn Setting
OPE11
CarrFrq/On-Delay
ERR
EEPROM R/W Err
Carrier Frequency Parameter Setting Error
Table 7.3 Operator Programming Errors
Meaning
Multi-function Analog Input/
Pulse Train Input Error
Function Selection Error
PID Control Setup Error
V/f Parameter Setting Error
Probable Causes
The same function has been selected for the analog input selection and the pulse train input selection.
• H3-09 = B and H6-01 = 1
• H3-09 = C and H6-01 = 2 b1-01 (Reference Source Selection) is set to 4 (pulse train) and
H6-01 (Pulse Train Input Function Selection) is set to a value other than 0 (frequency reference).
A setting has been made that is applicable with the current control method.
Example: A function used only with open loop vector control was selected for V/f control.
The following settings have been made at the same time.
• b5-01 (PID Control Mode
Selection) has been set to a value other than 0.
• b5-15 (PID Sleep Function
Operation Level) has been set to a value other than 0.
• b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection) has been set to 2 or 3.
V/f parameter settings were out of range.
Check parameters (E1,
E3). A frequency/voltage value may be set higher than the maximum frequency/ voltage.
One of the following parameter setting errors exists.
• Carrier frequency Gain
C6-05 > 6 and C6-03 (Carrier
Frequency Upper Limit) <
C6-04 (Carrier Frequency
Lower Limit)
• Upper/lower limit error in
C6-03 and 04.
• C6-01 = 0 and C6-02 = 2 to 6.
• C6-01 = 1 and C6-02 = 7 to E.
Corrective Actions
Check the parameters b1-01,
H3-09 and H6-01.
Verify the control method and the function.
Check parameters b5-01, b5-15 and b1-03.
Check the parameter settings.
Cycle power to the Inverter.
EEPROM write error
The NV-RAM data does not match the EEPROM data.
A verification error occurred when writing EEPROM.
Do a factory initialization
(A1-03)
7
713
7
Auto-tuning Fault
Auto-tuning faults are shown below. When the following faults are detected, the fault is displayed on the digital operator and the motor coasts to stop. No fault or alarm outputs will be operated.
Table 7.4 Auto-tuning Faults
Display Meaning
Er - 01
Fault
Motor data fault
Probable causes
There is an error in the data input for autotuning.
There is an error in the relationship between the motor output and the motor rated current.
There is an error between the noload current setting and the input motor rated current (when autotuning for line-to-line resistance is performed for vector control)
Corrective Actions
Check the input data.
Check the Inverter and motor capacity.
Check the motor rated current and no-load current.
Check the input data.
Er - 02
Minor Fault
Alarm
Er - 03
STOP key
Er - 04
Resistance
Er - 05
No-Load Current
No-Load Current Fault
Er - 08
Rated slip
Er - 09
Accelerate
Er - 11
Motor Speed
Er - 12
I-det. Circuit
STOP key input
Line-to-Line Resistance Fault
Rated Slip Fault
Acceleration Fault
Detected only for rotating autotuning
Motor speed Fault
Detected only for rotating autotuning
Current Detection Fault
An alarm is detected during autotuning.
Check wiring and the machine.
Check the load.
The STOP key was pressed to cancel autotuning.
-
Autotuning was not completed in the specified time.
The auto-tuning result is outside the parameter setting range.
• Check the input data.
• Check motor wiring.
• If the motor is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
• If the setting of T1-03 is higher than the Inverter input power supply voltage
(E1-01), change the input data.
The motor did not accelerate in the specified time
(C1-01 + 10 sec)
The torque reference exceeded
100% during acceleration.
Detected when A1-02 = 2 or 3
(Vector control).
• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
• Increase L7-01 and L7-02
(Torque Limits) if they are low.
• If the motor is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
• If the motor is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
• Check the input data (particularly the number of PG pulses and the number of motor poles).
The current exceeded the motor rated current.
Any of U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 has open-phase
Check wiring of the Inverter and the mounting.
714
Display
Er - 13
Leakage Inductance Fault
End - 1
V/f Over Setting
End - 2
Saturation
End - 3
Rated FLA Alm
V/f Settings Alarm
Displayed after auto-tuning is complete
Meaning
Table 7.4 Auto-tuning Faults
Leakage Inductance Fault
Probable causes
Auto-tuning was not completed in the specified time.
Auto-tuning result is outside the parameter setting range.
Corrective Actions
Check motor wiring.
The torque reference exceeded
100% and the no-load current exceeded 70% during auto-tuning.
Check and correct the motor settings
If the motor and the machine are connected, disconnect the motor from the machine.
Motor Core Saturation Fault
Displayed after auto-tuning is complete.
Detected only for rotating autotuning
Rated Current Setting Alarm
Displayed after auto-tuning is complete
During auto-tuning, the measured values of motor iron-core saturation coefficient 1 and 2 (E2-07 and E2-08) exceeded its setting range. A temporary value was set:
E2-07 = 0.75, E2-08 = 0.50
Check the input data.
Check the motor wiring.
If the motor and the machine are connected, disconnect the motor from the machine.
During auto-tuning, the measured value of motor rated current
(E2-01) was greater than the set value.
Check the motor rated current value.
Digital Operator Copy Function Faults
These faults can occur during the digital operator COPY function. When a fault occurs, the fault content is displayed on the operator. A fault does not activate the fault contact output or alarm output.
Table 7.5 Digital Operator Copy Function Faults
Function
READ
Function
Digital Operator
Display
Probable Causes Corrective Actions
PRE
READ IMPOSSIBLE
IFE
READ DATA ERROR
RDE
DATA ERROR o3-01 was set to 1 to write parameter into the Digital Operator when the Operator was write-protected (o3-02 = 0).
Set o3-02 to enable writing parameters into the Operator’s memory.
The data file read from the Inverter was of the wrong size indicating corrupted data.
An attempted writing of the Inverter data to the Digital Operator’s EEPROM failed.
Retry the READ command (o3-01 = 1).
Check the Digital Operator’s cable.
Replace the Digital Operator.
A low Inverter voltage has been detected.
Retry the READ command (o3-01 = 1).
Replace the Digital Operator.
7
715
7
Table 7.5 Digital Operator Copy Function Faults
Function
COPY
Function
Verify
Function
Digital Operator
Display
Probable Causes Corrective Actions
CPE
ID UNMATCHED
VAE
INV. KVA UNMATCH
CRE
CONTROL
UNMATCHED
CYE
COPY ERROR
CSE
SUM CHECK ERROR
VYE
VERIFY ERROR
The Inverter type or software number was different from the stored data in the digital operator
The capacity of the Inverter and the capacity of the stored data in the Digital Operator are different.
The control method of the Inverter and the control method of the stored data in the
Digital Operator are different.
A parameter setting written to the Inverter was different from the setting stored in the
Digital Operator.
Upon completion of the COPY function, the Inverter’s data checksum was different than the digital operator’s data checksum.
The set value of the digital operator and the
Inverter do not match
Use stored data of the same product (F7) and software number (U1-14) only.
Use stored data for the same Inverter capacity only (o2-04).
Use stored data for the same control method (A1-02).
Retry the COPY function (o3-01 = 2)
Retry the COPY function (o3-01 = 2)
Retry the Verify function (o3-01 = 3)
716
Troubleshooting
Due to parameter setting errors, faulty wiring, and so on, the Inverter and motor may not operate as expected when the system is started. If that occurs, use this section as a reference and perform the appropriate countermeasures.
If the contents of the fault are displayed, refer to
page -2, Protective and Diagnostic Functions
.
If A Parameter Cannot Be Set
Use the following information if a parameter cannot be set.
The display does not change when the Increment and Decrement keys are pressed.
The following causes are possible:
The Inverter is operating (drive mode).
There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation. Turn off the RUN command and then set the parameters
Parameter write enable is input.
This occurs when "Parameter Write Enable" (set value: 1B) is set for a multi-function input terminal (H1-01 to
H1-05). If the Parameter Write Enable input is OFF, the parameters cannot be changed. Turn it ON and then set the parameters.
Passwords do not match. (Only when a password is set.)
If the parameter A1-04 (Password) and A1-05 (Password Setting) settings are different, the parameters for the initialize mode cannot be changed. Enter the correct password in A1-04.
If you cannot remember the password, display A1-05 (Password Setting) by pressing the Shift/RESET key and the MENU key simultaneously while in the A1-04 display. Then set the password and input the set password in parameter A1-04.
OPE01 through OPE11 is displayed.
The set value for the parameter is wrong. Refer to
in this chapter and correct the settings.
CPF00 or CPF01 is displayed.
This is a Digital Operator communication error. The connection between the Digital Operator and the Inverter may be faulty. Remove the Digital Operator and then re-install it.
7
717
7
718
If the Motor Does Not Operate Properly
The following causes are possible:
Ensure the Digital Operator is securely connected to the Inverter.
The motor does not operate when the RUN key on the Digital Operator is pressed.
The following causes are possible:
The LOCAL/REMOTE mode is not selected properly.
The status of the SEQ and the REF LEDs have to be OFF for LOCAL mode. Press the LOCAL/REMOTE key to switch between the two modes or check if there is a multi-function digital input programmed to LOCAL/
REMOTE selection (H1 = 1).
The Inverter is not in drive mode
If the Inverter is not in Drive mode, it will not start. Press the MENU key once and then press the DATA/
ENTER key. The Inverter is now in drive mode.
The Frequency Reference is too low
If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter will not operate. Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
There is a multi-function analog input setting error.
If multi-function analog input H3-09 is set to 1 (frequency gain), and if no voltage (current) is input, then the frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct.
The motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input.
The following causes are possible:
The Inverter is not in drive mode.
If the Inverter is not in Drive mode, it will not start. Press the MENU key once and then press the DATA/
ENTER key. The Inverter is now in drive mode.
The LOCAL/REMOTE mode is not selected properly.
The status of the SEQ and the REF LEDs have to be ON for REMOTE mode. Press the LOCAL/REMOTE key to switch between the two modes or check if there is a multi-function digital input programmed to
LOCAL/REMOTE selection (H1 = 1).
The Frequency Reference is too low
If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter will not operate. Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected.
The load may be too large. The motor’s responsiveness limit may be exceeded if it is accelerated too rapidly by the Inverter’s stall prevention function or automatic torque boost function. Increase the acceleration time
(C1-01) or reduce the motor load. Also, consider increasing the motor size.
The motor only rotates in one direction.
"Reverse run disabled" may be selected. If b1-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 (reverse run prohibited), the Inverter will not accept any reverse run commands.
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed
If the motor rotates in the wrong direction, the motor output wiring may be incorrect. When the Inverter operates in the forward direction, the forward direction of the motor will depend on the manufacturer and the motor type, so be sure to check the motor specification
The direction of the motor rotation can be reversed by switching two wires among U, V, and W. If using an encoder, the polarity will also have to be switched. If the Inverter is operated in V/f mode also parameter b1-04 can be used to change the rotation direction.
If the Motor Stalls or Acceleration is Slow
The torque limit has been reached.
When a torque limit has been set in parameters L7-01 to L7-04, the output torque will be limited according these settings. Therefore the motor may not develop enough torque to accelerate or the acceleration time might be very long.
If torque limits have been set for the multi-function analog input (H3-09 = 10 to 12 or 15), check the signals.
The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.
If the value set for L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration) is too low, the acceleration time will be increased. Check that the set value is suitable and that the load is not too large for the motor.
The stall prevention level during running is too low.
If the value set for L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level during Running) is too low, the motor speed and torque will be limited. Check that the set value is suitable and that the load is not too large for the motor.
Auto-tuning has not been performed for vector control
Vector control will not work properly if auto-tuning has not been performed. Perform auto-tuning, or set the motor parameters through calculations.
7
719
7
If the Motor Operates at Higher Speed than the Frequency Reference
PID control is enabled.
If the PID control is enabled (b5-01 = 1 to 4), the Inverter output frequency will change to regulate the process variable to the desired set point. The PID can command a speed up to Maximum Output Frequency (E1-04) even though the reference is much lower.
If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy Above Base Speed in Open Loop
Vector Control Mode
The Inverter’s maximum output voltage is determined by its input voltage. (For example, if 400 VAC is input, then the maximum output voltage will be 400 VAC). Vector control uses voltage to control the currents within the motor. If the vector control voltage reference value exceeds the Inverter output voltage capability, the speed control accuracy will decrease because the motor currents cannot be properly controlled. Use a motor with a low rated voltage compared to the input voltage, or change to Closed Loop Vector control.
If Motor Deceleration is Slow
The following causes are possible:
The deceleration time is long even when braking resistor is connected.
The following causes are possible:
Stall Prevention During Deceleration is enabled.
When a braking resistor is connected, set parameter L3-04 (Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration) to
0 (disabled) or 3 (with braking resistor). When this parameter is set to 1 (enabled, factory default), the stall prevention function will interfere with the braking resistor.
The deceleration time setting is too long.
Check the deceleration time setting (parameters C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, and C1-08).
Motor torque is insufficient.
If the parameters are correct and there is no overvoltage fault, then the motor's power may be insufficient.
Consider increasing the motor and Inverter capacity.
The torque limit has been reached.
When a torque limit is reached (L7-01 to L7-04), the motor torque will be limited. This can cause the deceleration time to be extended. Check to be sure that the value set for the torque limit is suitable.
If a torque limit has been set for the multi-function analog input terminal A2 Function (parameter H3-09 = 10 to 12 or 15), check to be sure that the analog input value is suitable.
720
If the Motor Overheats
The following causes are possible:
The load is too large.
If the motor load is too large and the torque exceeds the motor’s rated torque, the motor may overheat. Reduce the loads by either reducing the load or increasing the acceleration/deceleration times. Also consider increasing the motor size.
The ambient temperature is too high.
The motor rating is determined by a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will overheat if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment where the maximum ambient operating temperature is exceeded. Lower the motor's ambient temperature to be within its acceptable range.
Auto-tuning has not been performed for vector control
Vector control may not perform efficiently if auto-tuning has not been performed. Perform auto-tuning, or set the motor parameters through hand calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Mode Selection (A1-02) to
V/f Control (0 or 1).
If Peripheral Devices Like PLCs or Others are Influenced by the Starting or Running Inverter
The following solutions are possible:
• Change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. This will help to reduce the amount of transistor switching noise.
•
•
•
•
•
Install an Input Noise Filter at the Inverter's input power terminals.
Install an Output Noise Filter at the Inverter's motor terminals.
Use shielded motor cables or a conduit. Metal shields electrical noise.
Check the grounding of the Inverter and motor.
Separate main circuit wiring from control circuit wiring.
If the Earth Leakage Breaker Operates When the Inverter is Running
The Inverter’s output is pulse modulated, i.e. the output voltage consists of high frequency pulses (PWM).
This high frequency signal causes a certain amount of leakage current which may cause the earth leakage breaker to operate and cut off the power supply. Change to a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200 mA or higher, with an operating time of 0.1 s or more), or one that incorporates high frequencies countermeasures (i.e., one designed for use with Inverters). It will also help to some extent to lower the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02). In addition, remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened.
7
721
7
If There is Mechanical Oscillation
Use the following information when there is mechanical vibration:
The application is making unusual sounds.
The following causes are possible:
There may be resonance between the mechanical system's natural frequency and the carrier frequency.
This is characterized by the motor running with no noise generation, but the machinery vibrates with a highpitched whine. To prevent this type of resonance, adjust the carrier frequency with parameters C6-02 to
C6-05.
There may be resonance between a mechanical system’s natural frequency and the output frequency of the Inverter.
To prevent this resonance frequency use the Jump Frequency Function in parameters d3driven motor and load balanced to reduce vibration.
, or have the
Oscillation and hunting occur with V/f control
The torque compensation parameter settings may be incorrect for the machine. Adjust parameters C4-01
(Torque Compensation Gain) and C4-02 (Torque Compensation Delay Time). Decrease C4-01 carefully in steps of 0.05 and/or increase C4-02.
Furthermore the Hunting Prevention Gain (n1-02) can be increased if the problems occur in light load conditions and the Slip Compensation Delay Time (C3-02) can be decreased.
Oscillation and hunting occur with V/f w/PG control.
The parameter settings of the speed control loop (Automatic Speed Regulator, ASR) may be incorrect for the machine. Adjust the gains and integral times.
If the oscillation cannot be eliminated in this way, set the hunting prevention selection (n1-01) to disabled (setting 0) and then try adjusting the gain again.
Oscillation and hunting occur with Open Loop Vector control.
The torque compensation parameter settings may be incorrect for the machine. Adjust parameters C4-01
(Torque Compensation Gain), C4-02 (Torque Compensation Delay Time Parameter) and C3-02 (Slip Compensation Delay Time) in order. Lower the gain parameters and raise the delay time parameters.
If auto-tuning has not been performed, proper performance may not be achieved for Vector Control. Perform auto-tuning or set the motor parameters through hand calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Mode
Selection to V/f Control (A1-02 = 0 or 1)
Oscillation and hunting occur with Closed Loop Vector control
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Adjust the speed control loop (Automatic Speed Regulator, ASR) by changing C5-01 (ASR Proportional Gain). If the oscillation points overlap with those of the machine and cannot be eliminated, increase the ASR Delay Time, and then readjust the ASR gain (C5-01)
722
If auto-tuning has not been performed, proper performance may not be achieved for Closed Loop Vector Control. Perform auto-tuning or set the motor parameters through hand calculations. Alternatively, change the
Control Mode Selection to V/f Control (A1-02 = 0 or 1).
Oscillation and hunting occur with PID control.
If there is oscillation or hunting during PID control, check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust P, I, and D parameters. (Refer to
)
If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped
If the motor rotates after a deceleration when the Inverter is stopped due to a large inertial load, DC-injection braking may be necessary. Adjust the DC injection braking as follows.
•
•
Increase parameter b2-02 (DC Injection Braking Current).
Increase parameter b2-04 (DC Injection Braking Time at Stop).
If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference
The frequency reference is within the jump frequency range.
When the jump frequency function is used, the output frequency does not change within the jump frequency range. Check to be sure that the Jump Frequency (d3-01 to d3-03) and Jump Frequency Width (d3-04) settings are suitable.
The frequency reference upper limit has been reached.
The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula:
Freq Ref Upper Limit = Max. Output Frequency (E1-04) x Frequency Reference Upper Limit (d2-01) /100
Check to be sure that the parameter E1-04 and d2-01 settings are suitable.
7
723
7
724
8
Maintenance and
Inspection
This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the Inverter.
Maintenance and Inspection ..................................................8-2
8
Maintenance and Inspection
Periodic Inspection
Check the following items during periodic maintenance.
• The motor should not vibrate or make unusual noises.
•
•
There should be no abnormal heat generation from the Inverter or motor.
The ambient temperature should be within the Inverter’s specifications.
•
•
The output current value shown in U1-30 should not be higher than the motor or the Inverter rated current for extended period of time.
The cooling fan in the Inverter should be operating normally.
Before attempting any maintenance checks, make sure that the three-phase power is disconnected. With power removed from the unit, the DC bus capacitors will stay charged for several minutes. The Charge LED in the
Inverter will glow red until the DC bus voltage is below 10VDC. To ensure that the DC bus is completely discharged, measure between the positive and negative bus with a DC voltmeter set to the highest scale. Be sure not to touch terminals immediately after the power has been turned off. Doing so can result in electric shock.
Item
External terminals
Mounting bolts
Connectors
Inspection
Are all screws and bolts tight?
Are connectors tight?
Corrective Procedure
Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly.
Cooling fins
All PCBs
Input Diodes
Output Transistors
Power Modules
Are the fins dirty or dusty?
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the PCBs?
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the modules or components?
Reconnect the loose connectors.
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 4 x 10
5
to 6 x 10
5
Pa
(4 to 6 bar, 55 to 85 psi).
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 4 x 10
5
(4 to 6 bar, 55 to 85 psi).
to 6 x 10
5
Pa
Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 4 x 10
5
to 6 x 10
5
Pa
(4 to 6 bar, 55 to 85 psi).
DC bus capacitors
Are there any irregularities, such as discoloration or odor?
Replace the capacitor or Inverter.
Apply power to the Inverter and conduct the following inspection:
Item
Cooling Fan(s)
Inspection
Is there any abnormal noise or vibration, or has the total operating time exceeded
20,000 hours.
Check U1-40 for the elapsed cooling operation time.
Corrective Procedure
Replace Cooling Fan
82
Periodic Maintenance of Parts
In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time, and to prevent down time due to an unexpected failure, it is necessary to perform periodic inspections and replace parts according to their service life.
The data indicated in the following table is to be used as a general guideline only. Periodic inspection standards vary depending on the Inverter’s installation environment conditions and usage. The Inverter’s suggested maintenance periods are noted below.
Cooling fan(s)
Part
DC bus capacitor
Standard Replacement Period
2 to 3 years (20,000 hours)
5 years
–
Replacement Method
Replace with new part.
Replace with new part.
(Determine need by inspection.)
Determine need by inspection.
Soft charge contactor
DC bus fuse
Control power fuse
10 years Replace with new part.
PCB capacitors 5 years
Replace with new board.
(Determine need by inspection.)
Note:The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions:
Ambient temperature:Yearly average of 30 °C/86°F
Load factor: 80% maximum
Operating rate: 12 hours maximum per day
8
83
Cooling Fan Replacement
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Inverter.
If the Inverter is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Inverter, the cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
If the Inverter is mounted with the heatsink external to the enclosure, the cooling fan can only be replaced by removing the Inverter from the enclosure.
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan.
2. Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows “1“ and when pull the fan out in the direction of arrow “2“.
3. Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the power connector.
4. Open the fan cover on the left and right sides in direction of arrows “3“ and remove the fan cover from the fan.
8
3
1
3
Air flow direction
2
Power connector
Fan cover
1
Fig 8.1 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less)
Mounting the Cooling Fan
1. Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan. Be sure that the air flow direction is correct (see figure above).
2. Connect the cables securely and place the connector and cable into the fan cover.
3. Mount the fan cover on the Inverter. Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on the Inverter heatsink.
84
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 22 kW or More
The heatsink cooling fan is attached to the top of the heatsink inside the Inverter. The cooling fan(s) can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan assembly.
2. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the Inverter.
3. Remove the control PCB (if necessary) bracket to which the cards are mounted. Remove all cables connected to the control PCB and remove the cooling fan power connector from the fan board positioned near the top of the Inverter.
4. Remove the cooling fan power connectors from the gate drive board positioned at the back of the Inverter.
5. Remove the fan assembly screws and pull out the fan assembly from the Inverter.
6. Remove the cooling fan(s) from the fan assembly.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching the new cooling fan(s), reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the air flow direction faces the top of the
Inverter.
Control card
Control card bracket
Air flow direction
Fan Assembly
Connector
Gate driver
Fig 8.2 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 22 kW or More)
8
85
Removing and Mounting the Terminal Card
The Terminal Card can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the control wiring.
Removing the Terminal Card
1. Remove the terminal cover, Digital Operator and front cover.
2. Remove the wires connected to FE and/or NC on the terminal card.
3. Loosen the mounting screws on the left and right sides of the terminal card (“1“) until they are free. It is not necessary to remove these screws completely. They are captive and self-rising.
4. Pull the terminal card out in the direction of the block arrow “2“.
Mounting the Terminal Card
Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal card.
Confirm that the terminal card and the control PCB properly meet at connector CN8 before insertion.
The connector pins may be damaged if the terminal card is forced into place, possibly preventing correct
Inverter operation.
1
8
1
2
Fig 8.3 Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card
IMPORTANT
Always confirm that the input power is removed and the Charge LED is not lit before removing or mounting the terminal card.
86
9
Specifications
This chapter describes the basic specifications of the Inverter
and specifications for options and peripheral devices.
Standard Inverter Specifications ............................................9-2
9
Standard Inverter Specifications
The standard Inverter specifications are listed by capacity in the following tables.
Specifications by Model
Specifications are given by model in the following tables.
200V Class
Model Number CIMR-F7Z
Max. applicable motor output (kW) *1
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current
Max. output voltage (V)
20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 23P7 25P5 27P5 2011 2015 2018 2022 2030 2037 2045 2055 2075 2090 2110
0.55
0.75
1.5
2.2
1.2
1.6
3.2
4.1
2.7
3.7
3.7
5.5
5.7
8.8
7.5
12
11
17
15 18.5
22
22 27 32
30
44
37
55
45
69
55 75 90 110
82 110 130 160
7.0
9.6
15 23 31 45 58 71 85 115 145 180 215 283 346 415
3-phase; 200, 220, 230, or 240 VAC
(Proportional to input voltage.)
Heavy Duty (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150 Hz max
Normal Duty 1 or 2 (high/reduced carrier, variable torque applications): 400 Hz max.
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Rated input current (A) 3.8
Allowable voltage fluctuation
4.9
8.4
11.5
18 24
3-phase, 200/220/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
37 52 68 84
+ 10%, - 15%
94 120 160 198 237 317 381 457
Allowable frequency fluctuation
±5%
Measures for power supply harmonics
DC reactor
12-pulse rectification
Optional
Not possible
Built in
Possible
*2
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the
Inverter's rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
* 2. A transformer with dual star-delta secondary is required on the power supply for 12-pulse rectification.
92
400 V Class
Model Number CIMR-F7Z
Max. applicable motor output
(kW) *1
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Rated input current (A)
Allowable voltage fluctuation
40P4
0.55
1.4
1.8
2.2
Allowable frequency fluctuation
40P7
0.75
41P5
1.5
42P2
2.2
43P7
3.7
44P0
4.0
45P5
5.5
47P5
7.5
4011
11
4015
15
1.6
2.8
4.0
5.8
6.6
9.5
13 18 24
2.1
3.7
5.3
7.6
8.7
12.5
17 24
3-phase; 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
Heavy Duty (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150 Hz max.
Normal Duty 1 or 2 (high/reduced carrier, variable torque applications): 400 Hz max.
31
2.5
4.4
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
6.4
20 9.0
10.4
+ 10%, - 15%
15 29 37
±5%
4018
18.5
30
39
47
Measures for power supply harmonics
DC reactor
12-phase rectification
Optional
Not possible
Model Number CIMR-F7Z
Max. applicable motor output
(kW)
*1
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Max. voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Rated input current (A)
Allowable voltage fluctuation
4022
22
34
45
50
4030
30
4037
37
4045
45
4055
55
46
60
66
4075
75
4090
90
4110
110
4132
132
4160
160
4185
185
4220
220
57 69 85 110 140 160 200 230 280
75 91 112 150 180 216 260 304 370
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
Heavy Duty (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150 Hz max.
Normal Duty 1 or 2 (high/reduced carrier, variable torque applications): 400 Hz max.
83
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
100 120 165 198
+ 10%, - 15%
238 286 334 407
390
506
537
4300
300
510
675
743
Allowable frequency fluctuation
±5%
Measures for power supply harmonics
DC reactor
12-phase rectification
Built in
Possible *2
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa standard motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's rated current is higher than the motor's rated current.
* 2. A transformer with dual star-delta secondary is required on the power supply for 12-pulse-rectification.
9
93
9
Common Specifications
The following specifications apply to both 200 V and 400 V class Inverters.
Model Number
CIMR-F7Z
Specification
Control method
Torque characteristics
Speed control range
Speed control accuracy
Speed control response
Torque limits
Torque accuracy
Frequency range
Frequency accuracy (temperature characteristics)
Frequency setting resolution
Sine wave PWM
Closed Loop Vector control, Open Loop Vector control, V/f control, V/f with PG control
Heavy Duty (low carrier, constant torque applications): 2 kHz carrier frequency, 150% overload for 1 minute, higher carrier frequency possible with current derating.
Normal Duty 1 (high carrier, variable torque applications): maximum carrier frequency, depending on inverter capacity,
120% overload for 1 minute.
Normal Duty 2 (variable torque applications): carrier frequency reduced, continuous overload capability increased
1:40 (V/f control)
1:100 (Open Loop Vector control)
1:1000 (Closed Loop Vector control)
± 3% (V/f control)
± 0.03% (V/f control with PG)
± 0.2% (Open Loop Vector control)
± 0.02% (Closed Loop Vector control)
(25 °C ± 10°C)
5 Hz (control without PG)
30 Hz (control with PG)
Provided (4 quadrant steps can be changed by constant settings.) (Vector control)
± 5%
0.01 to 150 Hz (Heavy Duty), 0.01 to 400 Hz (Normal Duty 1 or 2)
Digital references: ± 0.01% (-10 °C to +40°C)
Analog references: ± 0.1% (25 °C ±10°C)
Digital references: 0.01 Hz
Analog references: 0.025/50 Hz (11 bits plus sign)
Output frequency resolution
Overload capacity and maximum current
Frequency setting signal
Acceleration/Deceleration time
Braking torque
Main control functions
Motor protection
Instantaneous overcurrent protection
Fuse blown protection
Approximately 20% (Approximately 125% with Braking Resistor option,
braking transistor built into Inverters of 18.5 kW or less)
Restarting after momentary power loss, speed search, overtorque/undertorque detection, torque limits, 17-speed control (maximum), 4 acceleration and deceleration times, S-curve acceleration/deceleration, 3-wire control, auto-tuning (rotational or stationary), dwell function, cooling fan ON/OFF control, slip compensation, torque compensation, auto-restart after fault, jump frequencies, upper and lower limits for frequency references, DC braking for starting and stopping, high-slip braking, advanced PID control, energy-saving control, MEMOBUS communications (RS-485/422, 19.2 kbps maximum), 2 motor parameter sets, fault reset and parameter copy function.
Protection by electronic thermal overload relay.
Stops at approx. 200% of rated output current.
Overload protection
Overvoltage protection
Undervoltage protection
Stops for fuse blown.
Heavy Duty (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150% of rated output current for 1 minute
Normal Duty 1 (high carrier, variable torque applications): 120% of rated output current for 1 minute
Normal Duty 2 (high carrier, variable torque applications): 120% of rated output current for 1 minute, increased continuous output current.
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 410 V.
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 820 V.
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 190 V.
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 380 V.
Momentary power loss ride through
Cooling fin overheating
Stall prevention
Grounding protection
Charge indicator
Protective structure
0.01 Hz
Heavy Duty (low carrier, constant torque applications): 150% of rated output current for 1 minute
Normal Duty 1 or 2 (high/reduced carrier, variable torque applications): 120% of rated output current for 1 minute
0 to +10V, –10 to +10 V, 4 to 20 mA, pulse train
0.01 to 6000.0 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration time settings)
By selecting the momentary power loss method, operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s.
Protection by thermistor.
Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration and running independently.
Protection by electronic circuits.
Glows when the main circuit DC voltage is approx. 10 VDC or more.
Enclosed wall-mounted type (NEMA 1): 18.5 kW or less (same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters)
Open chassis type (IP00): 22 kW or more (same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters)
94
Model Number
CIMR-F7Z
Ambient operating temperature
Ambient operating humidity
Storage temperature
Application site
Altitude
Vibration
Specification
-10 °C to 40°C (Enclosed wall-mounted type)
–10 °C to 45°C (Open chassis type)
95% max. (with no condensation)
- 20 °C to + 60°C (short-term temperature during transportation)
Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.)
1000 m max.
10 to 20 Hz, 9.8 m/s 2 max.; 20 to 50 Hz, 2 m/s 2 max
9
95
9
96
10
Appendix
This chapter provides precautions for the Inverter, motor, and peripheral devices and also provides lists of constants.
Inverter Application Precautions ..........................................10-2
Motor Application Precautions .............................................10-5
User Constants ....................................................................10-7
10
102
Inverter Application Precautions
Selection
Observe the following precautions when selecting an Inverter.
Installing Reactors
A large peak current will flow in the power input circuit when the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kVA or higher) or when switching a compensating capacitor. Excessive peak current can destroy the rectifier section. To prevent this, install a DC or AC reactor to improve the power supply power factor.
DC reactors are built into Inverters of 22kW and more.
If a thyristor converter, such as a DC drive, is connected in the same power supply system, connect a DC or
AC reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram.
Power supply
(kVA)
DC or AC reactor required
DC or AC reactor not required
Inverter capacity (kVA)
Inverter Capacity in Multiple Motors Applications
When connecting multiple motors in parallel to an Inverter, select the Inverter capacity so that the rated output current of the Inverter is minimum 1.1 times the sum of all the motor rated currents.
Initial Torque
The startup and acceleration characteristics of the motor are restricted by the overload current ratings of the
Inverter that is driving the motor. The torque characteristic generally is different from those when starting a motor on the power supply directly. If a large initial torque is required, select an Inverter one size bigger or increase the capacity of both, the motor and the Inverter.
Installation
Observe the following precautions when installing an Inverter.
Installation in Enclosures
Install the Inverter in a clean location where it is not subjected to oil mist, dust, and other contaminants, or install the Inverter in a completely enclosed panel. Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel space so that the temperature surrounding the Inverter does not exceed the allowable temperature. Do not install the Inverter on wood or other combustible materials.
Installation Direction
Mount the Inverter vertically to a wall or other vertical surface.
Settings
Observe the following precautions when making settings for an Inverter.
Upper Limits
The maximum output frequency can be set up to 400Hz. Setting the output frequency too high can damage the machine. So pay attention to the mechanical system and observe required limits for the output frequency.
DC Injection Braking
If the DC Injection Braking Current or the Braking Time are set too high the motor can overheat what can damage the motor
Acceleration/Deceleration Times
The motor's acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque generated by the motor, the load torque, and the load's inertial moment (GD 2 /4). If the stall prevention functions are activated during acceleration or deceleration, it might be necessary to increase the acceleration or deceleration time.
To reduce the acceleration or deceleration times, increase the capacity of the motor and Inverter.
10
103
10
104
Handling
Observe the following precautions when wiring or performing maintenance for an Inverter.
Wiring Check
The Inverter will be internally damaged if the power supply voltage is applied to output terminal U, V, or W.
Check wiring for any mistakes before supplying power. Check all wiring and control sequences carefully.
Magnetic Contactor Installation
If a magnetic contactor is installed in the power supply line do not exceed one start per hour. Switching more often can damage the inrush current prevention circuit.
Maintenance and Inspections
After turning OFF the main circuit power supply it can take several minutes before the DC bus is discharged completely. The CHARGE LED, indicating if the DC bus is charged, glows above a voltage of 10VD.
Motor Application Precautions
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor
Observe the following precautions when using an Inverter for an existing standard motor.
Low Speed Ranges
If a standard cooled motor is used at low speed the cooling effects are diminished. If the motor is used in constant torque applications in low speed area the motor may overheat. If full torque is required at low speed continuously an externally cooled motor must be used.
Installation Withstand Voltage
If the inverter is used with an input voltage of 440 V or higher and long motor cables, voltage spikes at the motor terminals may occur which can damage the motor windings. Please ensure that the motor insulation class is sufficient.
High-speed Operation
When using the motor at a speed higher than the motor rated frequency (usually 50 Hz), problems may arise in dynamic balance and bearing durability.
Acoustic Noise
The noise generated in the motor depends on the carrier frequency. The higher the setting the less the generated noise is.
Using the Inverter for Special Motors
Observe the following precautions when using a special motor.
Pole-changing Motor
The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors. Select an appropriate
Inverter according to the maximum current of the motor.
Submersible Motor
The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than that of standard motors. Therefore, always select an appropriate Inverter according to the maximum current of the motor.
Explosion-proof Motor
When an explosion-proof motor is used, it must be subjected to an explosion-proof test in conjunction with the
Inverter. This is also applicable when an existing explosion-proof motor is to be operated with the Inverter.
Since the Inverter itself is, however, not explosion-proof, always install it in a safe place.
10
Gear motor
The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer.
In particular, continuous operation of an oil-lubricated motor in the low speed range may result in damaging.
If the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than 50 Hz, consult the manufacturer.
105
10
106
Synchronous Motor
A synchronous motor is not suitable for Inverter control.
Single-phase Motor
Do not use an Inverter for a single-phase capacitor motor. Any capacitors directly connected to the inverter output may damage the Inverter.
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts and Chains)
If an oil-lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism, oil lubrication will be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range. The power transmission mechanism will make noise and experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is operated at low speeds continuously.
User Constants
Factory settings are given in the following table. These are factory settings for a 200 V Class Inverter with 0.4
kW (open loop vector control).
No.
Name
A1-00 Language selection for Digital Operator display
A1-01 Parameter access level
A1-02 Control method selection
A1-03 Initialize
A1-04 Password
A1-05 Password setting
A2-01 to
A2-32
User specified parameters b1-01 Reference source selection b1-02 RUN command source selection b1-03 Stopping method selection b1-04 Prohibition of reverse operation b1-05 Operation selection for setting frequencies equal or lower than E1-09 b1-06 Control input scan b1-07 Operation selection after switching to remote mode b1-08 Run command selection in programming modes b2-01 Zero speed level (DC injection braking starting frequency) b2-02 DC injection braking current b2-03 DC injection braking time at start b2-04 DC injection braking time at stop b2-08 Magnetic flux compensation volume b3-01 Speed search selection (current detection or speed calculation) b3-02 Speed search operating current (current detection) b3-03 Speed search deceleration time (current detection) b3-05 Speed search wait time (current detection or speed calculation) b3-10 Speed Search Compensation Gain (speed calculation only) b3-14 Speed Search Rotating Selection Direction b4-01 Timer function ON-delay time b4-02 Timer function OFF-delay time b5-01 PID control mode selection b5-02 Proportional gain (P) b5-03 Integral (I) time b5-04 Integral (I) limit b5-05 Differential (D) time b5-06 PID limit b5-07 PID offset adjustment b5-08 PID delay time constant b5-09 PID output characteristics selection b5-10 PID output gain b5-11 PID reverse output selection b5-12 Selection of PID feedback signal loss detection b5-13 PID feedback loss detection level
Factory
Setting
0
2
0
0
2
0
–
Setting
100.0%
0.00 s
100.0%
0.0%
0.00 s
0
1.0
0
0
0%
0.2 s
1.10
1
0.0 s
0.0 s
0
1.00
1.0 s
0.5 Hz
50%
0.00 s
0.50 s
0%
*1
*1
2.0 s
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
10
107
10
No.
Name b5-14 PID feedback loss detection time b5-15 PID Sleep function operation level b5-16 PID Sleep operation delay time b5-17 Accel/decel time for PID reference b5-18 PID Setpoint Selection b5-19 PID Setpoint b5-28 PID Square Root Feedback Sel b5-29 Square root Feedback Gain b5-31 PID monitor feedback selection b5-32 PID monitor feedback gain b5-33 PID monitor feedback bias b6-01 Dwell frequency at start b6-02 Dwell time at start b6-03 Dwell frequency at stop b6-04 Dwell time at stop b7-01 Droop Control Gain b7-02 Droop Control Delay Time b8-01 Energy-saving mode selection b8-02 Energy-saving gain b8-03 Energy-saving filter time constant b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient b8-05 Power detection filter time constant b8-06 Search operation voltage limiter b9-01 Zero Servo Gain b9-02 Zero Servo completion bandwidth
C1-01 Acceleration time 1
C1-02 Deceleration time 1
C1-03 Acceleration time 2
C1-04 Deceleration time 2
C1-05 Acceleration time 3
C1-06 Deceleration time 3
C1-07 Acceleration time 4
C1-08 Deceleration time 4
C1-09 Emergency stop time
C1-10 Accel/decel time setting unit
C1-11 Accel/decel time switching frequency
C2-01 S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
C2-02 S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end
C2-03 S-curve characteristic time at deceleration start
C2-04 S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end
C3-01 Slip compensation gain
C3-02 Slip compensation delay time
C3-03 Slip compensation limit
C3-04 Slip compensation selection during regeneration
C3-05 Output voltage limit operation selection
108
10.0 s
1
0.0 Hz
0.20 s
0.20 s
0.20 s
0.00 s
*1
*1
200%
0
0
0.0%
0.05 s
0
*1
*1
*1
20 ms
0%
5
10
10.0 s
1.00
0
100.0%
0.0%
0.0 Hz
0.0 s
0.0 Hz
0.0 s
Factory
Setting
1.0 s
0.0 Hz
0.0 s
0.0 s
0
0
0
Setting
No.
Name
C4-01 Torque compensation gain
C4-02 Torque compensation delay time constant
C4-03 Starting torque compensation (FWD)
C4-04 Starting torque compensation (REV)
C4-05 Starting torque compensation time constant
C5-01 ASR proportional (P) gain 1
C5-02 ASR integral (I) time 1
C5-03 ASR proportional (P) gain 2
C5-04 ASR integral (I) time 2
C5-05 ASR limit
C5-06 ASR delay time
C5-07 ASR switching frequency
C5-08 ASR integral (I) limit
C6-01 Heavy/Normal Duty selection
C6-02 Carrier frequency selection
C6-03 Carrier frequency upper limit
C6-04 Carrier frequency lower limit
C6-05 Carrier frequency proportional gain d1-01 Frequency reference 1 d1-02 Frequency reference 2 d1-03 Frequency reference 3 d1-04 Frequency reference 4 d1-05 Frequency reference 5 d1-06 Frequency reference 6 d1-07 Frequency reference 7 d1-08 Frequency reference 8 d1-09 Frequency reference 9 d1-10 Frequency reference 10 d1-11 Frequency reference 11 d1-12 Frequency reference 12 d1-13 Frequency reference 13 d1-14 Frequency reference 14 d1-15 Frequency reference 15 d1-16 Frequency reference 16 d1-17 Jog frequency reference d2-01 Frequency reference upper limit d2-02 Frequency reference lower limit d2-03 Master speed reference lower limit d3-01 Jump frequency 1 d3-02 Jump frequency 2 d3-03 Jump frequency 3 d3-04 Jump frequency width d4-01 Frequency reference hold function selection d4-02 + - Speed limits d5-01 Torque control selection
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
2.0 kHz
2.0 kHz
00
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
*1
*1
5.0%
0.004 ms
0.0 Hz
400%
0
1
Factory
Setting
1.00
*1
0.0%
0.0%
10 ms
*1
*1
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
6.00 Hz
100.0%
0.0%
0.0%
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
1.0 Hz
0
10%
0
Setting
10
109
10
No.
Name d5-02 Torque reference delay time d5-03 Speed limit selection d5-04 Speed limit d5-05 Speed limit bias d5-06 Speed/torque control switching timer d6-01 Field weakening level d6-02 Field weakening frequency limit d6-03 Field forcing function selection d6-06 Field forcing function Limit
E1-01 Input voltage setting
E1-03 V/f pattern selection
E1-04 Max. output frequency (FMAX)
E1-05 Max. output voltage (VMAX)
E1-06 Base frequency (FA)
E1-07 Mid. output frequency (FB)
E1-08 Mid. output frequency voltage (VB)
E1-09 Min. output frequency (FMIN)
E1-10 Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)
E1-11 Mid. output frequency 2
E1-12 Mid. output frequency voltage 2
E1-13 Base voltage (VBASE)
E2-01 Motor rated current
E2-02 Motor rated slip
E2-03 Motor no-load current
E2-04 Number of motor poles
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance
E2-06 Motor leak inductance
E2-07 Motor iron saturation coefficient 1
E2-08 Motor iron saturation coefficient 2
E2-09 Monitor mechanical losses
E2-10 Motor iron loss for torque compensation
E2-11 Motor rated output power
E3-01 Motor 2 control method selection
E3-02 Motor 2 max. output frequency (FMAX)
E3-03 Motor 2 max. output voltage (VMAX)
E3-04 Motor 2 max. output voltage frequency (FA)
E3-05 Motor 2 mid. output frequency 1 (FB)
E3-06 Motor 2 mid. output frequency voltage 1 (VB)
E3-07 Motor 2 min. output frequency (FMIN)
E3-08 Motor 2 min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)
E4-01 Motor 2 rated current
E4-02 Motor 2 rated slip
E4-03 Motor 2 no-load current
E4-04 Motor 2 number of poles (number of poles)
E4-05 Motor 2 line-to-line resistance
1010
*1
4 poles
*1
*1
0.50
0.75
0.0%
*1
*1
*1
*1
0.0 Hz
0.0 V
0.0 V
*1
*1
0
400%
*1
F
50.0 Hz
*1
50.0 Hz
*1
Factory
Setting
0 ms
1
0%
10%
0 ms
80%
0.0 Hz
*1
0
50.0 Hz
*1
50.0 Hz
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
4 poles
*1
Setting
No.
Name
E4-06 Motor 2 leak inductance
E4-07 Motor 2 rated capacity
F1-01 PG constant
F1-02 Operation selection at PG open circuit (PGO)
F1-03 Operation selection at overspeed (OS)
F1-04 Operation selection at deviation
F1-05 PG rotation
F1-06 PG division rate (PG pulse monitor)
F1-07 Integral value during accel/decel enable/disable
F1-08 Overspeed detection level
F1-09 Overspeed detection delay time
F1-10 Excessive speed deviation detection level
F1-11 Excessive speed deviation detection delay time
F1-12 Number of PG gear teeth 1
F1-13 Number of PG gear teeth 2
F1-14 PG open-circuit detection delay time
F2-01 Bi-polar or uni-polar input selection
F3-01 Digital input option
F6-01 Operation selection after communications error
F6-02 Input level of external error from Communications Option Card
F6-03 Stopping method for external error from Communications Option Card
F6-04 Trace sampling from Communications Option Card
F6-05 Current monitor unit selection
F6-06 Torque reference/torque limit selection from communications option card
H1-01 Terminal S3 function selection
H1-02 Terminal S4 function selection
H1-03 Terminal S5 function selection
H1-04 Terminal S6 function selection
H1-05 Terminal S7 function selection
H2-01 Terminal M1-M2 function selection
H2-02 Terminal M3-M4 function selection
H2-03 Terminal M5-M6 function selection
H3-01 Multi-function analog input terminal A1 signal level selection
H3-02 Gain (terminal A1)
H3-03 Bias (terminal A1)
H3-08 Multi-function analog input terminal A2 signal level selection
H3-09 Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection
H3-10 Gain (terminal A2)
H3-11 Bias (terminal A2)
H3-12 Analog input filter time constant
H3-13 Terminal A1/A2 switching
H4-01 Monitor selection (terminal FM)
H4-02 Gain (terminal FM)
H4-03 Bias (terminal FM)
0
1
0
1
2.0 s
0
0
1
1
24
14
3 (0)
*2
1
0
115%
1.0 s
10%
0.5 s
0
0
Factory
Setting
*1
*1
1024
3
0
1
1
100.0%
0.0%
2
0
100.0%
0.0%
0.00 s
0
4 (3)
*2
6 (4)
*2
2
0
0
1
2
100%
0.0%
Setting
10
1011
10
No.
Name
H4-04 Monitor selection (terminal AM)
H4-05 Gain (terminal AM)
H4-06 Bias (terminal AM)
H4-07 Analog output 1 signal level selection
H4-08 Analog output 2 signal level selection
H5-01 Station address
H5-02 Communications speed selection
H5-03 Communications parity selection
H5-04 Stopping method after communications error
H5-05 Communications error detection selection
H5-06 Send wait time
H5-07 RTS control ON/OFF
H6-01 Pulse train input function selection
H6-02 Pulse train input scaling
H6-03 Pulse train input gain
H6-04 Pulse train input bias
H6-05 Pulse train input filter time
H6-06 Pulse train monitor selection
H6-07 Pulse train monitor scaling
L1-01 Motor protection selection
L1-02 Motor protection time constant
L1-03 Alarm operation selection during motor overheating
L1-04 Motor overheating operation selection
L1-05 Motor temperature input filter time constant
L2-01 Momentary power loss detection
L2-02 Momentary power loss ride through time
L2-03 Min. baseblock time
L2-04 Voltage recovery time
L2-05 Undervoltage detection level
L2-06 KEB deceleration time
L2-07 Momentary recovery time
L2-08 Frequency reduction gain at KEB start
L3-01 Stall prevention selection during accel
L3-02 Stall prevention level during accel
L3-03 Stall prevention limit during accel
L3-04 Stall prevention selection during decel
L3-05 Stall prevention selection during running
L3-06 Stall prevention level during running
L4-01 Speed agreement detection level
L4-02 Speed agreement detection width
L4-03 Speed agreement detection level (+/-)
L4-04 Speed agreement detection width (+/-)
L4-05 Operation when frequency reference is missing
L4-06 Frequency reference value at frequency reference loss
L5-01 Number of auto restart attempts
1012
0.20 s
0
*1
*1
*1
*1
0.0 s
*1
0.0%
0.10 s
2
1440 Hz
1
1.0 min
3
1
0
3
1
5 ms
1
0
1440 Hz
100.0%
Factory
Setting
3
50.0%
0.0%
1F
3
0
0
2.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
2.0 Hz
0
80%
0
100%
1
150%
50%
1
1
150%
0.0 Hz
Setting
No.
Name
L5-02 Auto restart operation selection
L6-01 Torque detection selection 1
L6-02 Torque detection level 1
L6-03 Torque detection time 1
L6-04 Torque detection selection 2
L6-05 Torque detection level 2
L6-06 Torque detection time 2
L7-01 Forward drive torque limit
L7-02 Reverse drive torque limit
L7-03 Forward regenerative torque limit
L7-04 Reverse regenerative torque limit
L7-06 Torque limit time constant
L7-07 Torque Limit Operation during accel/decel
L8-01 Protect selection for internal DB resistor (Type ERF)
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level
L8-03 Operation selection after overheat pre-alarm
L8-05 Input open-phase protection selection
L8-07 Output open-phase protection selection
L8-09 Ground protection selection
L8-10 Cooling fan control selection
L8-11 Cooling fan control delay time
L8-12 Ambient temperature
L8-15 OL2 characteristics selection at low speeds
L8-18 Soft CLA selection
N1-01 Hunting-prevention function selection
N1-02 Hunting-prevention gain
N2-01 Speed feedback detection control (AFR) gain
N2-02 Speed feedback detection control (AFR) time constant
N2-03 Speed feedback detection control (AFR) time constant 2
N3-01 High-slip braking deceleration frequency width
N3-02 High-slip braking current limit
N3-03 High-slip braking stop dwell time
N3-04 High-slip braking OL time o1-01 Monitor selection o1-02 Monitor selection after power up o1-03 Frequency units of reference setting and monitor o1-04 Setting unit for frequency parameters related to V/f characteristics o1-05 LCD Display contrast adjustment o2-01 LOCAL/REMOTE key enable/disable o2-02 STOP key during control circuit terminal operation o2-03 User parameter initial value o2-04 kVA selection o2-05 Frequency reference setting method selection o2-06 Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected o2-07 Cumulative operation time setting
1
1.00
1.00
50 ms
750 ms
5%
150%
1.0 s
60 s
45 °C
1
1
1
0
1
0
200%
200%
200%
200%
200 ms
0
0
95 °C
*1
3
Factory
Setting
0
0
150%
0.1 s
0
150%
0.1 s
1
1
0
3
40 s
6
1
0
0
0
0
0
0 hr
Setting
10
1013
10
1014
No.
Name o2-08 Cumulative operation time selection o2-09 Initialize Mode o2-10 Fan operation time setting o2-12 Fault trace initialize o2-13 kWh monitor initialize o3-01 Copy function selection o3-02 Read permission selection
T1-00 Motor 1/2 selection
T1-01 Autotuning mode selection
T1-02 Motor output power
T1-03 Motor rated voltage
T1-04 Motor rated current
T1-05 Motor base frequency
T1-06 Number of motor poles
T1-07 Motor base speed
T1-08 Number of PG pulses
* 1. The factory setting depends on the inverter model and the control method.
* 2. The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3-wire sequence.
*1
*1
1
0
*1
50.0 Hz
4 poles
1450 r/min
1024
Factory
Setting
0
2
0 hr
0
0
0
0
Setting
Download
Anúncio